Skip to main content

Full text of "Both sides of the veil; a personal experience"

See other formats


ISrH  SIDES  <f7/?e 


J 


-^ -■?* 


ANNE  MANNING  ROBBI 


IN 


GIFT   OF 


■3£ 


LIBRARY 


BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE 
VEIL 

3  ^personal  experience 

BY 

ANNE  MANNING  ROBBINS 


BOSTON 

SHERMAN,   FRENCH  &  COMPANY 

I909 


Copyright,  1909 
Sherman,  French  &*  Company  g 


EDUC. 

PSYCH. 

LIBRARY 


Printed  in  U.  S.  A. 


TO 

AUGUSTUS  PEARL  MARTIN 
whose  life  on  earth  exemplified  to  the 
author,  during  an  association  of  eight 
short  years,  many  noble  and  beautiful 
qualities  of  soul,  and  whose  seeming 
continued  existence  on  the  other  slde 
of  the  Veil  has  inspired  new  faith 
in  the  reality  of  that  Other  Life, 
this  book  is  reverently 
dedicated 


The  following  letter  from  Professor  William 
James  was  addressed  to  the  publishers: 

The  manuscript  which  this  accompanies,  and 
which  I  recommend  hereby  to  your  attention,  is 
from  a  companion  of  mine  in  psychical  research, 
who,  from  a  state  of  doubt,  has  won  through  to 
a  faith  in  human  survival  in  a  spiritual  order 
which  continues  the  visible  order.  It  is  a  gen- 
uine record  of  moral  and  religious  experience, 
profoundly  earnest,  and  calculated,  I  should 
think,  to  interest  and  impress  readers  who  desire 
to  know  adequately  what  deeper  significances  our 
life  may  hold  in  store. 

Truly  yours, 

William  James 


All  names  and  initials  used  in  this 
book  are  genuine.  In  every  instance 
deemed  advisable  the  necessary  permis- 
sion has  been  obtained. 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

Introduction vii 

PART  I 
Personal  Experience  and  Growth  of  Faith 

I.     Preliminary 15 

II.     Mount    Holyoke    and    Loss    of    a 

Creed 17 

III.  Means  of  Livelihood 25 

IV.  Early    Acquaintance    with    Mrs. 

Piper 31 

V.     Richard  Hodgson  and  Psychical  Re- 
search         38 

VI.    Association  with  A.  P.  Martin  .      .  48 

VII.    Apparent  Failure  of  Prediction     .  56 

VIII.    Fulfilment 67 

IX.    Faith 80 

PART  II 

Communications  from  the  Other  Side  of  the 
Veil  through  Mrs.  Piper 

X.     Prefatory  Explanations  .     .     .     .91 
XI.     Extracts  from  Reports  of  Sittings  .   100 


COxNTENTS 

PART  III 

Suggestive  Thoughts  on  the  Attainment  of 
Spirituality 

PAGE 

Self-Discipline 217 

Happiness 229 

Various  Intimations 239 

Love 255 


INTRODUCTION 

F.  W.  H.  Myers  says:  "We  receive  life 
and  knowledge,  which  it  is  our  business  to 
develop  into  Love  and  Wisdom  and  Joy."  1 

William  James  says:  "  The  whole  subject 
of  immortal  life  has  its  prime  roots  in  personal 
feeling.  .  .  .  There  are  individuals  with 
a  real  passion  for  the  matter,  men  and  women 
for  whom  a  life  hereafter  is  a  pungent  craving, 
and  the  thought  of  it  an  obsession;  and  in 
whom  keenness  of  interest  has  bred  an  insight 
into  the  relations  of  the  subject  that  no  one 
less  penetrated  with  the  mystery  of  it  can  at- 
tain. Some  of  these  people  are  known  to  me. 
They  are  not  official  personages;  they  do  not 
speak  as  the  scribes,  but  as  having  direct 
authority.  And  surely,  if  anywhere  a  prophet 
clad  in  goatskins,  and  not  a  uniformed  official, 
should  be  called  to  give  inspiration,  assurance, 
and  instruction,  it  would  seem  to  be  here,  on 
such  a  theme."  2 

The  business  of  life  as  concisely  stated  by 
Myers  I  have  been  and  still  am  endeavoring  to 
carry  on,  and  I  find  it  a  business  which  I  shall 
wish  to  pursue  to  the  day  of  my  death,  and 
quite  possibly  thereafter.     I  offer  both  quota- 

1  Human  Personality  and  its  Survival  of  Bodily  Death. 
Vol.  II,  p.  310. 

2  Human  Immortality,  pp.  3,  4. 

vii 


viii    BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

tions  as  justification,  if  justification  be  needed, 
for  the  publication  of  the  present  volume. 
My  real  authority,  however,  must  be,  not  what 
others  have  thought  and  said,  with  all  due  re- 
spect for  the  writers  quoted,  and  with  grati- 
tude for  the  expression  of  the  ages  inextricably 
woven  into  the  literature  of  our  own  genera- 
tion; but  the  authority  of  deep  conviction,  of 
actual  experience,  of  ever-widening  vision,  of 
increasing  happiness,  of  growing  power,  and 
the  belief  that  these  things  are  for  all  who  will 
seek. 

There  is  nothing  more  patent  to  the  observer 
and  the  thinker  than  the  differences  in  capacity 
with  which  men  are  born.  Let  that  fact  be  ex- 
plained as  it  may,  or  not  explained  at  all,  it 
has  always  seemed  to  me  unreasonable  to  com- 
plain of  the  condition  in  which  one  finds  one's 
self  when  awakening  to  consciousness  in  early 
life;  for  whoever  will  make  use  of  his  God- 
given  faculties,  whether  he  be  a  savage  of  the 
lowest  type  or  an  Eastern  sage,  whether  he 
occupy  a  plane  but  little  removed  from  the 
animal  or  have  back  of  him  ages  of  inherited 
thought,  may  make  that  degree  of  progress  in 
his  life  between  birth  and  the  grave  which 
shall  be  to  him  a  satisfaction,  which  shall 
bring  to  him  the  good  which  he  craves.  To 
this  end  it  is  not  necessary  to  understand  the 
whole  scheme  of  creation,  or  to  be  able  to  say 
positively  that  such    and   such  things    are    so, 


INTRODUCTION  ix 

but  what  seems  to  be  true  to  a  person  who 
clarifies  his  brain  and  purifies  his  heart,  and 
then  looks  and  listens,  is  generally  a  safe 
guide  for  that  person.  In  fact,  it  is  often 
the  person  who  appears  to  the  casual 
observer  to  have  no  religion  at  all,  because  it 
cannot  be  expressed  by  or  comprised  in  any 
creed  or  dogma,  who  is  most  likely  to  have  a 
religion  of  his  own,  sincere,  deep,  vital  and 
soul-saving.  By  many  a  system  of  philosophy 
and  through  many  a  religious  creed  the  human 
soul  has  continued  its  search  after  self-knowl- 
edge and  God  knowledge,  yet  each  one  in  his 
own  generation  must  begin  as  a  little  child  to 
find  out  for  himself  the  relation  between  him- 
self and  his  Maker,  must  make  the  knowledge 
his  individual  possession,  as  if  no  one  had  ever 
lived  and  talked  before. 

It  does  not  appear  that  one  is  pushed  on  to 
acquire  knowledge,  pushed  on  to  master  the 
lessons  of  life,  pushed  on  to  reap  the  profit  of 
his  experience,  against  his  will,  but  from  the 
moment  that  the  desire  makes  itself  felt  in  the 
soul,  from  that  moment  opportunities  come. 
It  is  quite  plain  that  opportunities  come  to  him 
who  deserves  them,  to  him  who  is  ready  for 
them,  to  him  who  is  able  to  seize  them.  And 
what  is  opportunity,  and  what  do  we  mean  by 
the  word?  Analyzed,  it  means  the  appearance 
before  our  eyes  of  an  opening  in  the  black  wall 
of  fate   about  us,    through   which  we  may  ex- 


>/ 


x       BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

press  ourselves,  our  talents,  our  souls  in  some 
larger  way  than  we  have  hitherto  done.  But, 
the  soul  is  its  own  teacher.  It  is  not  necessary 
for  it  to  be  here  or  there  in  order  that  it  may 
learn.  It  may  acquire  knowledge  wherever 
it  chances  to  be,  by  revolving  in  the  mind  what- 
ever is  suggested  by  its  particular  environ- 
ment, or  whatever  wells  up  from  within. 

Unforeseen  events  seem  to  determine  for  us 
a  course  in  life  which  proves  in  the  end  far 
better  than  anything  we  could  possibly  have 
planned,  had  the  choice  been  absolutely  in  our 
owm  hands.  While  we  are  free  to  do  as  we 
wish  within  certain  limits,  there  are  boundaries 
beyond  which  we  cannot  go.  This  shaping  of 
events  points  to  Eternal  Law,  to  Divine  Guid- 
ance, to  an  Over-ruling  Providence,  which  while 
great  enough  to  control  the  stars  in  their 
orbits  also  enters  each  individual  life. 

I  disclaim  the  slightest  pretence  to  science, 
yet  I  understand  that  any  one  who  observes 
facts  carefully  and  records  them  truthfully, 
whether  those  facts  be  in  the  physical,  mental 
or  spiritual  realm  of  being,  is  adding  his  mite 
to  the  accumulations  of  science. 

I  have  no  scheme  of  philosophy  to  offer,  but 
only  such  bits  of  philosophic  thought  as  have 
filtered  through  my  own  brain  and  shown 
themselves  effective  for  good  in  my  own  life. 

I  wrish  to  record  here  only  the  thoughts 
and  experiences  which  are  and  have  become  my 


INTRODUCTION  xi 

own.  Whatever  the  origin  of  the  thoughts, 
whether  forced  out  of  me  by  the  intensity  of 
misery,  or  dropped  into  my  heart  by  an  angel, 
they  now  belong  to  me.  It  is  as  if  I  had 
found  myself  drowning;  as  if  absolutely  noth- 
ing which  I  could  grasp  were  within  sight  or 
within  reach;  as  if,  realizing  my  danger,  I  had, 
as  the  only  means  of  saving  myself,  suddenly 
disappeared  from  the  material  and  become 
pure  ether;  thus  finding  myself  able  through 
the  inherent  power  of  my  own  nature  to  rise 
out  of  the  blackness  of  the  engulfing  waves,  to 
float  above  all  danger,  or  to  land,  as  I  choose, 
on  solid  ground. 

The  serious  author  must  deliberate  most 
carefully  before  committing  to  the  cold  type 
that  which  cannot  be  unsaid  or  taken  back.  I 
can  only  offer  the  present  volume  in  the  spirit 
of  the  greatest  humility,  yet  there  is  something 
within  me  which  is  insistent  upon  expression. 
This  something  within  me  has  been  leading  me 
through  varied  phases  of  life,  through  doubt 
and  mental  darkness,  through  disappointment 
of  hopes,  through  loss  of  beloved  friends,  and 
lo !  life's  pathway  has  suddenly  opened  upon  a 
bright  and  luminous  field.  At  a  little  distance 
ahead  of  me  in  this  same  bright  field  there  ap- 
pears a  veil.  Written  across  this  veil  is  the 
word  "  Death,"  and  while  the  path  which  I 
descry  in  advance  grows  more  beautiful  as  it 
approaches  that  veil,  beyond  it  the  brightness 


xii      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

is  yet  more  dazzling,  so  that  with  the  light  on 
this  side  and  the  still  greater  light  on  that,  the 
veil  itself  is  almost  transparent. 

From  childhood  in  a  country  town  where 
the  orthodox  church  gathered  within  its  fold 
all  young  eager  spirits  like  my  own,  engrafting 
upon  them  its  creed  and  dedicating  them  to  its 
service,  to  a  present  freedom  of  soul  which  for 
itself  fits  all  things  into  the  scheme  of  the  ever- 
lasting goodness  of  God,  which  looks  with 
admiration,  wonder  and  reverence,  but  no  fear, 
upon  the  mysteries  of  the  Universe,  which 
realizes  the  presence,  the  sympathy  and  the 
helpfulness  of  friends  called  dead,  which  re- 
sponds to  the  invisible  life  palpitating  all  about 
and  receives  energy  therefrom,  of  this  pathway 
and  this  transition  I  would  speak. 

It  may  be  said  that  this  is  the  philosophy  of 
self-development  merely,  and  that  all  such 
philosophy  is  as  old  as  the  hills.  So  be  it.  I 
will  utter  my  little  word  too.  If  to  the 
psychologist  my  logic  seem  crude,  and  to  the 
litterateur  my  language  inadequate,  my  ut- 
terance will  not  have  been  in  vain  if  haply  its 
message  meet  the  need  of  some  human  heart. 


PART  I 


PERSONAL     EXPERIENCE     AND 
GROWTH  OF  FAITH 


I 

PRELIMINARY 

Since  the  early  spring  of  1 88  I  to  the  time  of 
publication  I  have  resided  in  the  city  of  Bos- 
ton. My  interest  in  Spiritism  and  what  is 
known  as  "  Psychical  Research  "  dates  from 
about  that  time.  My  opportunities  have  been 
unusual  and  my  experience  unique  in  some  re- 
spects, and  for  that  reason  I  feel  that  I  ought 
not  to  withhold  the  experience  from  those  who 
are  seekers  in  the  same  field  with  myself,  or 
from  others  in  whom  it  may  awaken  an  inter- 
est. I  heartily  wish  that  I  might  give  my 
message  dissociated  from  myself.  Consider- 
ing, however,  the  peculiar  nature  of  my  sub- 
ject, I  find  that  my  personality  must  be  wholly 
sacrificed  to  the  object  for  which  I  write.  My 
search  after  spiritual  truth  and  the  material 
circumstances  of  my  life  have  been  so  closely 
interwoven  that  I  cannot  speak  of  the  former 
without  touching  upon  the  latter.  In  fact,  it 
is  the  close  association  and  interdependence  of 
the  material  and  the  spiritual  which  I  wish  to 
make  prominent  in  this  brief  narrative,  and 
were  it  not  for  that  relation  I  should  not  as- 
sume that  the  outward  affairs  of  an  ordinary 
routine  life  could  have  the  slightest  interest  for 
any  one. 

15 


:6      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

In  order  to  make  clear  the  different  phases  in 
the  development  of  my  faith  I  shall  be  obliged 
to  go  back  a  few  years  previous  to  1881  and 
*r>eak  briefly  of  my  early  religious  experience. 


II 

MOUNT  HOLYOKE  AND  LOSS  OF  A 
CREED 

When  I  was  sixteen  years  old  I  left  home 
for  the  first  time,  and  entered  Mount  Holyoke 
Seminary,  now  Mount  Holyoke  College. 
Homesick  girls  of  sixteen,  surrounded  by 
strangers  and  awed  by  superiors,  are  doubtless 
extremely  impressionable.  Some  aged  divine 
from  Boston  was  holding  religious  meetings  at 
the  seminary.  It  was  impressed  upon  me 
very  strongly  that  I  ought  to  "  be  converted," 
but  how  to  become  converted  puzzled  my 
brain  and  my  heart.  I  knew  that  is  was  neces- 
sary to  feel  a  conviction  of  sin  and  contrition 
therefor,  but  try  as  best  I  might  I  was  not 
able  to  realize  the  enormity  of  sin  that  I  was 
supposed  to  have  committed  during  the  short 
sixteen-years  of  my  childhood.  However,  one 
evening  I  was  wrought  up  to  the  point  of  ven- 
turing upon  a  personal  encounter  with  this  min- 
isterial personage,  in  a  private  room  which 
seems  to  have  been  used  as  a  sort  of  confes- 
sional. It  had  the  desired  effect  and  I  "  be- 
came converted." 

This  man  told  me  that  God  had  been  giving 
me  good  things  all  my  life,  and  he  asked  me 
what  I    had  done  for  God,  implying   that    I 

17 


1 8      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

had  done  absolutely  nothing  and  that  at  best  I 
was  a  most  ungrateful  creature.  This  argu- 
ment appealed  to  my  sense  of  justice,  for  upon 
reflection  I  could  not  pick  out  any  special  thing 
that  I  had  done  for  God,  and  of  course  justice 
required  that  I  should  do  something  in  return 
for  all  that  He  had  done  for  me.  It  gave  me 
a  working  basis,  and  I  resolved  that  from  that 
moment  I  would  "  do  something  "  for  God, 
though  just  what  assistance  the  Mighty  Creator 
wanted  of  such  a  babe  was  not  quite  clear  in 
my  mind.  However,  I  was  swept  along  on  a 
wave  of  enthusiasm  and  found  myself  very 
happy.  I  was  happy  in  praying  for  my  be- 
nighted relatives  who  had  not  been  through  a 
similar  experience,  and  I  went  to  my  bed  at 
night  with  songs  of  joy  on  my  lips  and  in  my 
heart.  My  youth,  my  love  of  study  and  my 
opportunities  may  have  had  something  to  do 
with  this  happiness  and  possibly  would  have 
been  sufficient  to  account  for  it  even  though  the 
word  "  religion  "  had  not  been  pronounced  in 
my  hearing.  I  believe  there  was,  however,  a 
new  sense  of  being  on  the  right  track,  of  con- 
scientiously endeavoring  to  do  right,  of  being 
in  harmonious  relation  with  the  Power  that  I 
conceived  as  God.  The  great  life-and-death 
struggle  of  maturer  years,  the  desperate  effort 
of  the  floundering  soul  to  save  itself,  was  yet 
to  come.  This  period  at  the  age  of  sixteen  I 
count  as  one  of  the  happiest  in  my  life.      But 


THE  LOSS  OF  A  CREED         19 

the  religion  which  I  then  professed  did  not 
make  me  over.  It  did  not  remove  the  timidity 
from  my  nature  or  blot  out  of  existence  certain 
other  temperamental  and  possibly  inherited 
traits  which  were  then  beginning  to  torment 
me.  This  required  analytical  thought  and 
brave  effort.  Nor  on  the  other  hand  did  it 
quench  a  certain  fearlessness  of  spirit  which 
seems  to  have  been  born  in  me  side  by  side  with 
the  timidity,  and  for  which  saving  grace  in  my 
make-up  I  have  always  been  profoundly  grate- 
ful. 

During  my  senior  year  at  this  school  Bible 
study  was  an  important  part  of  the  curriculum 
and  it  required  considerable  time  each  week  to 
master  the  lessons  which  were  recited  on  Sun- 
days. One  Sunday  the  presiding  teacher  asked 
for  the  meaning  of  the  words  "  being  covered 
with  the  righteousness  of  Christ."  No  one  in 
the  large  class  offered  an  answer  until  I  at- 
tempted one  by  expressing  the  idea  that  because 
we  have  no  righteousness  of  our  own  we  must 
be  covered,  hidden  as  it  were,  by  that  of 
Christ,  in  order  to  be  saved.  If  I  had  said 
that  we  must  attempt  to  make  for  ourselves  a 
garment  pure  and  righteous  like  that  of  Christ, 
I  never  should  have  regretted  my  words,  but 
what  I  did  say  I  have  regretted  many  times 
and  wished  that  I  might  have  an  opportunity 
to  unsay.  For  the  idea  then  in  my  mind  was 
that  of  Christ  standing  garbed  in  ample  white 


20      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

robe,  so  full  that  it  could  spread  out  like 
wings,  completely  hiding  from  the  view  of  a 
wrathful  God  poor  creatures  like  ourselves, 
garmentless  or  clothed  in  rags.  My  reply  ap- 
peared to  give  satisfaction.  To-day  I  see  not 
only  ignorance  but  cowardice  in  my  words. 
To-day  I  believe  not  only  that  we  may  have 
righteousness  of  our  own,  but  that  not  until  we 
do  have  such  righteousness  can  we  or  shall  we 
be  saved.  Being  righteous  is  salvation.  As 
Christ  set  us  the  example,  so  must  we  follow, 
and  as  He  was  righteous,  so  must  we  be  accord- 
ing to  our  light  and  our  power. 

At  Mount  Holyoke  the  discipline  of  the 
routine  which  demands  of  every  one  her  best  is 
an  invaluable  factor  in  the  development  of 
character.  I  shall  never  forget  the  impres- 
sion made  upon  me  by  the  teachers  of  my  day 
through  their  spirit  of  consecration  and  lofty 
devotion  to  their  chosen  work.  And  I  believe 
the  same  powerful  influence  is  exerted  there  to- 
day. They  grow  accustomed  to  their  work, 
they  forget  themselves,  and  they  little  realize 
the  effect  which  the  developed  beauty  of  their 
lives  makes  upon  the  sensitive  girl  from  the 
country  away  from  home  for  the  first  time  in 
her  life,  for  the  first  time  brought  into  contact 
with  her  peers  and  superiors. 

The  religious  teaching  of  those  years, — 
why  speak  of  it?  Let  them  praise  it  or  criti- 
cise it  who  will.     The    true    inwardness  of  it 


THE  LOSS  OF  A  CREED         21 

made  it  worthy,  left  its  impress  upon  the  pupil 
and  gradually  cast  into  the  shadow  of  incon- 
sequcntiality  all  outward  observance.  To  the 
freed  mind  the  extreme  exactions  of  conscien- 
tious, orthodox  Christianity,  fearful  lest  it 
shall  not  do  right,  seem  puerile.  Yet  through 
all  these  different  forms  of  religion  one  sees  the 
self-same  effort  of  the  soul,  the  effort  to  com- 
prehend its  true  place  in  the  Cosmos  and  to 
rind  its  true  relation  to  God. 

It  does  not  seem  to  me  necessary  for  a  per- 
son to  be  told  in  the  freshness  of  his  youth, 
when  he  knows  almost  nothing  about  sin  from 
any  experience  of  his  own,  that  a  gulf  lies  be- 
tween himself  and  God,  that  God  has  cast  him 
out  from  His  presence,  that  only  in  meek  de- 
pendence upon  the  saving  grace  of  another's 
virtue  and  the  sacrifice  of  another's  life  may  he 
be  reinstated  in  the  Divine  favor.  Is  it  not 
better  to  present  to  the  young  mind  the  beauty 
of  goodness,  the  delight  of  conforming  to  right- 
eous laws  as  the  natural  way  of  living?  If  a 
Christ  had  within  him  a  saving  grace  and  a 
righteous  power,  it  is  enough  to  hold  up  His 
life  as  an  ideal,  and  better  for  the  youth  to  fol- 
low that  ideal  of  his  own  accord  because  it  is 
shown  to  him  to  be  altogether  lovely,  and  not 
because  he  must  fear  dire  punishment  if  he  does 
not.  Yet  the  thinker  —  and  everyone  may 
think  —  is  bound  to  come  out  at  last  into 
spiritual  freedom  through  any  and  every  path. 


22      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

The  instructors  in  this  particular  college 
who  were  there  in  my  day  will  always  be  re- 
membered by  me  as  among  the  loveliest,  lofti- 
est, noblest  characters  it  has  ever  been  my  good 
fortune  to  know.  They  set  before  their  pupils 
the  saving  truth  by  its  daily  exemplification. 
Though  there  may  have  been  grades  among 
them,  I  make  no  exception,  for  at  the  institu- 
tion founded  by  Mary  Lyon  no  one  is  ever 
called  to  the  sacred  work  of  teaching  who  has 
not  already  shown  herself  to  be  a  consecrated 
soul. 

Yet  when  I  returned  to  my  home  I  saw  that 
my  father,  who  was  a  close  student  of  nature 
but  passed  for  a  skeptic  in  matters  of  religion, 
however  much  I  might  pray  for  him  could  no 
more  change  his  nature  than  the  leopard  could 
change  his  skin.  I  felt  there  must  be  some- 
thing wrong  with  my  belief.  I  was  asking 
God  for  that  which  was  contrary  to  laws  of 
His  own  making.  My  reason  showed  me  that 
facts  are  unalterable,  that  the  unalterableness 
of  things  is  what  makes  them  facts.  My  be- 
lief was  a  changeable  thing;  my  belief  must  ac- 
commodate itself  to  facts,  for  facts  would 
never  adjust  themselves  to  it. 

And  my  oldest  sister  was  a  lovely  person. 
She  was  lovely  to  look  at,  kind  and  gentle 
in  her  actions ;  her  sweet  voice  and  her  musical 
talent  made  beautiful  music  in  the  home;  she 
was  a  second  mother  to  us  all.     Why,  then, 


THE  LOSS  OF  A  CREED         23 

should  I  wish  to  change  her  nature?  Her  na- 
ture was  in  my  opinion  quite  adorable.  Yet 
she  somehow  seemed  to  lack  a  religious  creed 
of  which  I  could  approve.  She  believed  if  we 
do  well  here  we  shall  do  well  hereafter,  but 
she  had  no  elaborate  scheme  of  salvation 
such  as  had  been  drilled  into  me;  an  angry 
God,  an  incarnation,  a  sacrifice,  an  atonement, 
and  the  hiding  behind  His  garments.  Again 
my  philosophy  must  somehow  be  changed  so 
as  to  include  this  motherly  girl,  for  I  could  not 
possibly  believe  that  a  good  God  would  con- 
demn her.  This  beloved  sister  passed  out  of 
the  body  in  1SS1. 

My  mother  always  has  been  and  is  to-day 
in  her  extreme  old  age  devoted  to  her  church 
and  her  creed,  yet  her  charity  has  been  of  the 
broadest  kind  and  she  was  never  coercive  in 
matters  of  religion.  Blessed  be  mothers  like 
mine. 

In  a  very  short  time  after  leaving  college  I 
felt  my  religious  creed  slipping  from  me.  I 
could  not  hold  it.  It  did  not  satisfy  my  re- 
quirements. As  is  usual,  I  believe,  with 
devotees  who  cut  loose  from  the  bonds  of  their 
early  faith,  I  swung  to  the  other  extreme  and 
clung  to  no  dogma  at  all.  For  a  brief  period 
I  experienced  a  sort  of  exultant,  reckless  joy  in 
my  newly  acquired  independence.  It  was  de- 
lightful to  think  that  I  was  not  bound  to  ac- 
cept as  authoritative  any  religious  creed  or  any 


24      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

code  of  philosophy  laid  down  in  any  book.  I 
was,  after  all,  arbiter  of  my  own  fate.  I  could 
do  as  I  pleased  so  long  as  I  did  not  positively 
injure  others.  I  might  be  a  creature  that  was 
to  live  for  all  eternity  for  aught  I  knew.  I 
knew  nothing  about  it.  But,  I  reasoned,  if  this 
be  so,  there  is  time  enough  for  learning  one's 
lessons.  I  shall  reach  my  destination  in  time 
or  eternity,  and  if  I  dilly-dally  a  little  on  the 
way  it  only  hinders  my  own  progress  and  harms 
no  one  else.  Was  this  all?  No.  There 
made  itself  heard  within  me  a  voice  which  said  : 
"  To  refrain  from  injury  to  your  neighbor  is 
not  enough.  You  must  do  no  harm  to  your- 
self. You  are  bound  to  your  fellow  creatures. 
Any  injury  to  yourself  will  necessarily  be  felt  by 
them.  You  must  preserve  inviolate  the  purity 
of  your  own  nature.  You  must  seek  knowl- 
edge and  you  must  diffuse  light." 

Yet  I  was  a  creature  of  moods,  now  happy, 
now  the  reverse,  altogether  subject  to  them, 
and  suffering  much  from  self-condemnation. 
I  do  not,  however,  claim  a  monopoly  in  suffer- 
ing, nor  do  I  propose  to  discuss  these  uninter- 
esting things  here,  further  than  to  say  that  as 
soon  as  I  found  that  I  need  not  be  slave,  but 
might  be  master,  of  both  physical  sensation  and 
mental  mood,  I  began  to  make  some  headway, 
and  I  believe  it  was  the  reading  of  Plato  that 
first  gave  me  an  insight  into  this  important 
truth. 


Ill 

MEANS  OF  LIVELIHOOD 

I  had  a  great  desire  to  live  in  a  large  city 
where  I  might  come  in  contact  with  all  phases 
of  life  and  take  advantage  of  the  opportunities 
which  such  a  centre  affords.  After  leaving 
school  I  resided  a  short  time  in  Philadelphia , 
where  I  practically  began  the  battle  of  life. 
From  the  time  I  set  foot  in  Boston,  in  1 88 1, 
my  hands  and  my  mind  have  been  fully  occu- 
pied, and  the  gaining  of  a  sufficient  livelihood 
has  been  a  comparatively  easy  matter. 

I  was  engaged  from  the  very  first  in  steno- 
graphic and  clerical  work,  mostly  stenographic. 
For  a  few  years  I  occupied  a  position  in  the  of- 
fice of  a  commercial  firm.  From  1885  to 
1899  I  served  as  official  stenographer  in  the 
office  of  what  was  then  the  Board  of  Police  of 
the  city  of  Boston,  reporting  hearings,  confer- 
ences, conversations,  and  during  the  last  five 
years  of  that  period  acting  as  private  secretary 
to  the  chairman  of  the  board.  From  1900  to 
1902  I  was  private  secretary  to  the  Water 
Commissioner  of  the  city,  whose  office  was  at 
City  Hall.  From  1903  to  the  present  time, 
1909,  I  have  been  engaged  in  the  office  of  a 
Bureau  of  the  Massachusetts  State  Board  of 
Agriculture.     These  several  periods  stand  out 

25 


26      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

clearly  in  my  own  mind,  and  reference  to  them 
may  have  to  be  made  in  the  following  chapters. 

In  addition  to  this  regular  occupation  I  had 
other  work  which  occupied  much  of  my  spare 
time,  it  being  mostly,  however,  of  the  same  na- 
ture as  my  daily  work.  In  Philadelphia  I  had 
studied  a  system  of  shorthand-writing  which 
was  then  new,  a  system  which  its  author  claim- 
ed was  equal  to  any  of  the  older  systems  in  its 
adaptability  and  yet  was  much  more  easily  ac- 
quired. Soon  after  reaching  Boston  I  was  ask- 
ed to  teach  the  system,  and  from  that  time  on, 
for  the  next  ten  or  twelve  years,  I  had  all  the 
private  pupils  I  could  well  attend  to,  teaching 
both  by  correspondence  and  by  personal  les- 
sons. I  was  obliged  finally  to  drop  this  on  ac- 
count of  the  increasing  pressure  of  other  work. 

The  civil  service  law  of  Massachusetts  was 
enacted  in  1884.  The  rules  went  into  effect 
early  in  1885  and  were  thereafter  applied  as 
rapidly  as  possible  to  the  various  departments 
of  public  service.  Henry  Sherwin,  who  has 
been  Chief  Examiner  for  the  civil  service 
from  1884  to  the  present  day,  was  just  be- 
ginning to  gather  around  him  a  corps  of  as- 
sistants in  his  special  work  of  examination,  a 
work  which  has  grown  enormously  since  its  in- 
itiation. Soon  after  my  own  examination  I 
was  appointed  one  of  the  examiners,  having 
been  a  member  of  one  board  continuously  from 
that  time  to  this,  and  serving  from   1902  to 


MEANS  OF  LIVELIHOOD        27 

1907,   inclusive,   as   a   member  of   two  other 
boards. 

As  I  look  back  I  can  see  many  events  which 
apparently  happened,  yet  it  seems  to  me  now 
that  nothing  really  ever  happens.  That  is 
our  word  for  something  which  seems  to  come 
by  chance,  but  which  may  in  reality  have  been 
a  long  time  in  preparing.  If  one  has  a  pur- 
pose in  life,  or  a  serious  intent,  the  person  and 
the  event  are  somehow  brought  together  when 
the  time  is  ripe  for  the  accomplishment  of  the 
purpose  or  the  furthering  of  the  intent. 

For  instance,  when  I  began  teaching  short- 
hand my  system  was  not  perfected;  the  author 
was  making  improvements  in  it,  and  I  did  not 
feel  that  I  had  it  sufficiently  at  my  command  to 
undertake  the  teaching  of  it.  Yet  I  was  afraid 
to  let  the  opportunity  slip.  I  had  a  dim 
notion,  even  then,  of  unused  organs  becoming 
atrophied,  and  of  lost  opportunities  blocking 
the  appearance  of  others.  I  looked  at  life  in 
its  youth  as  a  narrow  stream  of  water  running 
between  high  banks.  So  long  as  the  stream 
does  not  swell,  gains  no  accretions,  it  cannot 
branch  off  into  other  channels  or  flow  out  into 
meadow  lakes.  And  so  I  accepted  the  task,  my 
pupils  agreeing  to  follow  me  in  any  changes 
which  might  be  introduced,  and  the  system  was 
thereafter  gradually  perfected. 

About  this  time  it  happened  that  William 
H.  Lee,  who  for  many  years  filled  the  position 


28      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

of  Clerk  of  Committees  for  the  City  Govern- 
ment, wanted  to  know  something  about  the  new 
system  of  shorthand  and  engaged  me  to  teach 
it  to  him.  It  happened,  again,  that  in  the 
year  1885  the  charter  of  the  city  of  Boston  was 
amended  by  the  legislature  of  Massachusetts, 
and,  among  other  changes  made,  the  control  of 
the  large  police  force  of  the  city  was  taken 
from  the  mayor  and  city  council  and  put  into 
the  hands  of  a  commission  of  three,  who  were 
appointed  by  the  Governor  of  the  Common- 
wealth, to  whom  they  were  answerable  for  the 
proper  management  of  the  force.  Mr.  Lee 
was  appointed  one  of  the  members  of  this  first 
Metropolitan  Board  of  Police,  serving  for  nine 
years.  When  he  took  office,  in  1885,  he  was 
broad-minded  enough  to  see  that  the  position 
of  reporter  for  the  board  could,  not  improper- 
ly, be  filled  by  a  woman,  in  which  opinion  his 
fellow-members  of  the  board  coincided.  At 
that  time  there  were  comparatively  few  women 
occupying  positions  as  official  stenographers  or 
court  reporters,  though  there  are  many  such  to- 
day. 

There  was  apparently  very  little  significance 
attaching  to  the  question  of  whether  I  should 
or  should  not  do  a  little  teaching,  whether  I 
wished  or  did  not  wish  to  spend  my  time  in 
that  way,  but  if  I  had  not  undertaken  it  at 
just  the  time  that  I  did,  I  should  never  have 
been  drawn  into  the  particular  associations,  or 


MEANS  OF  LIVELIHOOD        29 

into  the  particular  stream  of  events,  the  out- 
come of  which  seems  to  me  of  sufficient  im- 
portance and  interest  to  put  upon  permanent 
record  and  offer  to  others.  That  matter  re- 
mains, however,  for  the  reader  to  decide  for 
himself. 

My  years  in  the  police  department  were  of 
the  greatest  benefit  to  me,  disciplining  me  in 
many  ways.  The  nature  of  the  work  required 
the  concentration  of  all  my  powers  in  order  to 
accomplish  it  with  any  degree  of  satisfaction  to 
myself.  The  humanism  of  our  common  life, 
in  aspects  humorous  and  again  interesting  even 
to  pathos,  was  often  brought  out  in  occurrences 
which  took  place  before  my  eyes,  and  the 
camaraderie  of  my  daily  associations,  deepen- 
ing in  some  instances  into  the  sincerity  of 
friendship,  will  long  be  treasured  in  my 
memory. 

Far  be  it  from  me  to  belittle  any  kind  of 
work,  of  any  grade  whatever,  performed  in 
public  or  private  capacity.  The  machinery  of 
government  of  this  great  Country  must  be 
kept  moving.  The  greater  the  skill  and  liie 
intelligence  of  the  thousands  of  men  and 
women  who  stand  behind  the  wheels,  the 
better  the  government.  And  what  is  govern- 
ment for  but  to  serve  the  people.  Serve  them 
how  ?  By  helping  them  to  live  healthy,  nor- 
mal, peaceful,  progressive  lives. 

Yet  all  the  while  there  has  been  with  me  an 


3o      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

undercurrent  of  unrest,  a  feeling  that  some  one 
else  might  fill  my  place  just  as  well  or  better 
than  I,  and  a  secret  wish  that  I  might  do  some 
little  work  in  the  course  of  my  life  that  should 
be  of  a  different  grade  and  of  more  permanent 
value. 

And  why  is  it  of  any  consequence  to  speak 
here  of  my  work  at  all?  It  is  simply  this: 
since  I  have  been  trusted  by  city  and  state,  my 
work  generally  approved  and  placed  on  file 
among  public  records,  and  since  I  have  been 
accredited  with  sanity  and  a  fair  degree  of  in- 
telligence, I  ask,  in  all  humility,  that  the  same 
courtesy  and  confidence  be  extended  to  me 
when  I  offer  records  of  other  matters  of  an  en- 
tirely different  nature  from  that  which  is  known 
as  "  red  tape  "  of  government  work. 


LEONORA   E.    PIPER 

IN    EARLY    MARRIED   LIFE 


IV 

EARLY  ACQUAINTANCE  WITH 
MRS.  PIPER 

1885 

It  was  during  the  winter  of  1884-5  tnat  I 
became  acquainted  with  Mrs.  Leonora  E. 
Piper,  the  famous  psychic  who  for  so  many 
years  has  been  generously  contributing  of  her 
time  and  her  special  gifts  to  the  cause  of 
spiritual  science,  under  the  auspices  of  the 
English  Society  for  Psychical  Research.  I 
was  invited  one  evening  with  a  personal  friend 
to  a  family  gathering  of  about  a  dozen  people, 
because  of  my  newly  awakened  interest  in  phe- 
nomena called  psychical.  Mr.  Piper,  senior, 
was  present,  as  were  also  Mrs.  Piper  and  her 
husband.  The  personality  of  Mrs.  Piper, 
then  a  young  woman,  with  her  sweet,  pure, 
refined  and  gentle  countenance,  attracted  me  at 
once. 

The  company  sat  around  a  large  table,  and  I 
think  there  were  one  or  two  sensitives  pres- 
ent who  made  some  little  exhibition  of  their 
powers,  but  nothing  occurred  that  made  any 
impression  upon  me,  or  that  remained  in 
my  memory,  outside  of  what  was  connected 
with  Mrs.  Piper.     During  the  course  of  the 

3i 


32      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

evening  she  retired  with  one  or  two  of  her 
friends  to  a  small  room  adjoining  and  opening 
into  the  large  room  in  which  the  company  was 
assembled,  and,  as  I  understood,  "  went  under 
control,"  whatever  that  might  mean.  It  was 
something  new  and  strange  to  me.  I  think  she 
had  not  then  begun  to  give  sittings  outside  of 
the  immediate  circle  of  her  own  family,  but 
was  in  the  process  of  developing  her  powers. 
Her  husband  explained  to  me  that  she 
was  a  little  bashful  about  going  into  trance 
under  the  eyes  of  other  people,  and  for  that 
reason  had  retired  to  the  smaller  room.  I 
heard  the  sound  as  of  some  one  talking  in  a 
low  tone  issuing  from  the  small  room,  and  as  I 
remember  Mr.  Piper  told  me  that  the  poet 
Longfellow  was  supposed  to  be  speaking 
through  his  wife,  and  a  little  later  in  the  even- 
ing that  "  Dr.  Phinuit  "  had  arrived. 

"  Dr.  Phinuit  "  was  the  name  assumed  by 
the  early  spirit-control  of  Mrs.  Piper.  He 
claimed  to  have  been  a  French  physician  who 
passed  out  of  the  body  somewhere  in  the 
vicinity  of  twenty-five  years  previous  to  his  re- 
turning through  the  organism  of  Mrs.  Piper. 
While  under  the  control  of  Phinuit,  Mrs. 
Piper  rose  and  walked  out  into  the  large  room, 
and  the  control  addressed  a  few  remarks  to  the 
company  in  general.  I  chanced  to  be  standing 
near  Mrs.  Piper  with  the  lady  who  was  my 
companion    that    evening,    and    Dr.    Phinuit 


ACQUAINTANCE  OF  MRS.  PIPER   33 

[Mrs.  P.]  put  his  hand  on  my  shoulder  and 
said  in  his  emphatic  way,  addressing  us  both, 
11  You  are  very  harmonious." 

This  was  my  introduction  to  Dr.  Phinuit, 
dear  old  Phinuit  of  those  early  days,  for  it 
proved  in  course  of  time  that,  in  spite  of  any 
and  all  idiosyncrasies  and  crudities  which  this 
personality  displayed,  he  succeeded  in  endear- 
ing himself  to  all  those  with  whom  he  had 
numerous  conversations,  probably  without  ex- 
ception, some  of  whom  speak,  of  him  to  this 
day  with  familiar  affection. 

I  lost  no  time  in  making  an  appointment  for 
a  private  interview  with  Mrs.  Piper,  to  take 
place  as  soon  as  she  might  be  ready  to  see  me, 
and  my  notebook  gives  April,  1885,  as  the  date 
of  my  first  sitting.  This  antedates  by  some 
months  Professor  William  James's  acquaint- 
ance with  her,  and  he  is  the  person  who  intro- 
duced her,  in  May,  1887,  to  the  man  who  be- 
came the  first  American  Secretary  of  the  Eng- 
lish Society  for  Psychical  Research.  Up  to 
the  time  when  Professor  James  made  her  ac- 
quaintance, in  the  autumn  of  1885,  she  was  not 
known  as  a  psychic,  nor  even  as  a  person  who 
gave  promise  of  developing  psychic  gifts,  ex- 
cept to  a  small  number  of  friends  and  acquaint- 
ances of  her  immediate  family. 

The  hour  was  to  me  one  of  extreme  fascina- 
tion. Was  Dr.  Phinuit  really  a  discarnate 
spirit,  temporarily  and  partially  incarnated  in 


34      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

this  woman's  body  for  the  purpose  of  convers- 
ing with  me?  If  so,  how  fortunate  was  I  to 
be  witness  of  so  mysterious  and  interesting  a 
phenomenon,  interesting  and  significant  wholly 
apart  from  what  was  said  in  the  trance.  For 
let  it  be  remembered  that  I  am  not  presuming 
to  discuss  the  nature  of  the  trance  from  the 
standpoint  of  psychology.  I  realize  that  what 
is  said  while  the  medium  is  entranced  is  to  the 
psychologist  all-important  in  his  interpreta- 
tion of  the  phenomena  as  such.  I  wish  to 
record  only  observations  and  impressions,  leav- 
ing theoretics  to  the  scientist,  to  whom  they 
properly  belong.  And  while  I  may  speak  of 
my  impressions  as  if  they  conveyed  to  me  facts, 
I  understand  that  the  scientist  must  have  some- 
thing more  than  impressions  before  he  can 
put  before  the  world  what  he  calls  scientific 
truth. 

I  found  that  Dr.  Phinuit  understood  me, — 
and  who  does  not  flatter  himself  that  he  is  not 
ordinarily  understood?  He  seemed  to  know 
all  about  my  good  points  and  somehow  to 
have  a  special  knowledge  of  my  failings,  and 
from  that  time  on  he  sustained  the  relation  of 
adviser  and  friend.  I  was  altogether  too 
proud  to  impart  my  secrets  to  even  the  closest 
living  acquaintance,  yet,  confession  being  good 
for  the  soul,  I  found  myself  confessing  freely 
to  Phinuit.  But  although  I  may  have  ap- 
peared  to  those   who   knew   me   during  this 


ACQUAINTANCE  OF  MRS.  PIPER    35 

period  foolishly  eager  to  get  advice  from  such 
a  friend,  or  from  any  supposed  spirit  who  pro- 
fessed to  be  able  to  give  advice,  I  laid  it  down 
as  a  working  principle,  in  the  very  earliest 
days  of  my  investigations,  not  to  follow  the 
advice  of  any  psychic  which  was  contrary  to 
the  dictates  of  my  own  judgment.  I  do  not 
consider  that  any  one  who  has  not  respect 
enough  for  his  own  judgment  to  consult  it  and 
to  follow  it  in  the  conduct  of  his  material  af- 
fairs, even  though  it  may  conflict  at  times  with 
what  purports  to  be  advice  from  spirit  friends, 
is  a  fit  person  to  carry  on  investigations  into 
psychical  phenomena. 

I  did  not  have  frequent  sittings  with  Mrs. 
Piper,  but  I  had  a  number  each  year  under 
the  Phinuit  regime  during  a  period  of  ten 
years,  which  extended  to  September,  1895, 
with  the  exception  of  one  season  when  Mrs. 
Piper  was  abroad;  then  there  was  a  break  of 
several  years  for  various  reasons,  Mrs.  Piper 
not  being  able  to  give  sittings  all  of  this  time 
on  account  of  ill  health,  and  in  December, 
1899,  I  had  my  first  sitting  under  the  latter- 
day  regime,  an  account  of  which  will  be  given 
later. 

My  first  sitting,  in  April,  1885,  took  place 
about  three  months  after  the  death  of  a  friend 
whose  acquaintance  I  had  made  when  living  in 
Philadelphia,  by  name  Hiram  Hart.  [In  old 
reports  he  is  called  "  H."]     Dr.  Phinuit  ad- 


36      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

vised  me  to  wait  about  eight  months  longer, 
saying  that  by  that  time  I  should  probably 
hear  from  this  friend.  I  waited  that  length 
of  time,  and  I  did  hear  from  him,  as  it  seemed, 
and  I  witnessed  the  interesting  phenomenon  of 
the  gradual  development  of  a  new  control,  for 
in  the  course  of  a  little  time  Hiram  Hart  suc- 
ceeded in  controlling  the  organism  almost  as 
well  as  did  Phinuit  himself,  and  during  all  this 
period  of  ten  years  he  was  my  special  com- 
municator, though  never,  of  course,  occupy- 
ing more  than  a  portion  of  the  time  at  any 
one  sitting.  [See  Proc.  S.  P.  R.,  Part 
XXXIII,  pp.  289-290.] 

The  Phinuit  regime  is  ancient  history  now 
in  the  Piper  case,  and  I  will  not  dwell  on  it 
here  at  length.  A  general  account  of  these 
early  sittings  of  mine  was  given  to  the  S.  P. 
R.  and  is  included  in  an  article  entitled  "  Ob- 
servations of  Certain  Phenomena  of  Trance  " 
in  part  XXI  of  the  Proceedings,  pp.  m-114. 
But  Hiram  Hart  has  shown  the  persistent  fidel- 
ity of  a  returning  spirit,  and  has  been,  so  to 
speak,  a  "  friend  at  court "  on  the  Other  Side, 
keeping  himself  modestly  in  the  background 
in  these  latter  years  because  there  has  not 
been  time  for  me  to  hold  much  communica- 
tion with  him,  but  appearing  for  brief  mo- 
ments whenever  he  could  serve  my  interests 
in  any  way  in  my  other  relations,  or  sending 
to  me  a  message  of  remembrance. 


ACQUAINTANCE  OF  MRS.  PIPER    37 

It  has  been  my  habit,  from  the  very  be- 
ginning, to  make  notes  of  sittings  very  soon 
after  they  occurred,  unless  I  had  taken  full 
notes  during  the  hour,  which  has  been  my  in- 
variable custom  of  late  years,  and  I  have 
notes  preserved  either  in  shorthand  or  tran- 
scriptions of  nearly  every  sitting  that  I  ever 
had  with  Mrs.  Piper  or  any  other  psychic. 

Mrs.  Piper  builded  better  than  she  knew 
when  she  elected  to  reside  at  Arlington 
Heights.  The  place  is  one  of  the  loveliest  of 
Boston's  lovely  suburbs.  For  the  dweller  in 
the  city  like  myself,  it  was  most  restful  to  take 
a  train  in  the  morning  at  an  hour  when  the 
tide  of  humanity  sets  toward  the  city,  thus 
leaving  the  suburbs  quiet;  to  ascend  to  the 
top  of  the  "  Heights "  through  an  avenue 
shaded  its  entire  length  by  beautiful  trees;  to 
meet  Mrs.  Piper's  serene  face;  to  mount  still 
higher  to  an  upper  chamber,  lock  the  door, 
watch  the  psychic  while  she  seems  to  lose  all 
consciousness  of  my  presence,  and  then  be  free 
to  commune  with  —  whom  ? 


RICHARD     HODGSON     AND 
PSYCHICAL  RESEARCH 


I  find  in  my  notebook  a  memorandum  to  the 
effect  that  it  was  on  Feb.  10,  1888,  that  I 
first  met  Richard  Hodgson  at  the  rooms  of 
the  S.  P.  R.  at  5  Boylston  place,  Boston.  He 
had  come  from  England  early  the  preceding 
year  and  established  himself  in  the  city,  act- 
ing first  as  secretary  of  the  old  American 
Psychical  Research  Society,  which  in  1890  be- 
came the  American  Branch  of  the  English 
Society,  which  latter  organization  he  repre- 
sented for  the  next  fifteen  years.  I  believe 
he  was  then  looking  up  and  interviewing  Mrs. 
Piper's  early  sitters  and  I  had  a  note  of  in- 
troduction to  him  from  Mrs.  Piper  herself, 
but  found  her  at  the  rooms  when  I  called  and 
was  introduced  in  person  by  her.  From  that 
time  on  during  the  years  I  saw  him  occasion- 
ally, not  frequently.  I  communicated  with 
him  oftener  than  I  saw  him.  I  at  first  offered 
service  to  the  Society  in  the  line  of  reporting, 
and  assisted  Dr.  Hodgson  at  times  during  the 
period  of  my  acquaintance,  sometimes  gratui- 
tously and  sometimes  being  employed  by  him 

38 


RICHARD    HODGSON 

IN    HIS    KIKTIETH    YEAR 


PSYCHICAL  RESEARCH  39 

to  make  verbatim  stenographic  reports  of  sit- 
tings, or  copy  of  records  already  made.  I 
learned  his  methods  and  became  familiar  with 
the  technicalities  of  his  system  of  keeping 
records  of  sittings  with  notes  thereon.  Aside 
from  the  Piper  work  I  occasionally  had  sit- 
tings with  other  psychics  with  whom  he  had 
not  time  to  carry  on  investigations,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  enabling  him  to  answer  more  intelli- 
gently the  numerous  inquiries  that  were  made 
at  the  rooms  of  the  Society,  as  to  where  to 
find  professionals  who  could  be  recommended 
as  having  some  psychical  powers.  I  always 
took  notes  and  made  more  or  less  full  reports 
to  him  of  such  sittings,  which  went  on  file 
with  the  S.  P.  R. 

I  find  that  I  reported  a  Piper  sitting  for 
him,  which  he  could  not  attend  and  which  I 
think  was  one  in  a  series  of  sittings  carried  on 
by  some  members  of  the  American  Society  at 
that  time  in  existence,  as  early  as  March  6, 
1888,  and  in  May  and  June  of  the  same  year 
I  attended  a  short  series  of  sittings  given  by 
Mrs.  Piper  for  the  express  purpose  of  allow- 
ing Dr.  Hodgson  to  find  out  what  he  could 
in  his  own  way  about  the  Phinuit  personality. 
[See  Proceedings  S.  P.  R.,  Part  XXI,  pp.  2-3 
and  59.]  We  three  met  on  successive  Satur- 
day evenings,  Dr.  Hodgson  giving  his  time 
and  his  effort,  I  giving  my  report,  and  Mrs. 
Piper  giving  her  services.      This  series  was 


40      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

interrupted  after  the  fifth  sitting,  but  those 
five  Saturday  evenings  were  memorable,  each 
one  of  three  entering  upon  the  undertaking 
in  the  happiest  of  moods,  and  each  one  stand- 
ing by  his  or  her  part  of  the  agreement.  Dr. 
Hodgson  asked  questions  and  tried  various 
harmless  experiments,  or  what  seemed  to  him 
at  that  time  harmless,  such  as  putting  salt  on 
the  psychic's  tongue  when  in  trance,  for  the 
purpose  or  ascertaining  whether  Phinuit  was 
conscious  of  it  in  the  trance  or  whether  Mrs. 
Piper  was  conscious  of  it  on  coming  out  of  the 
trance.  These  experiments  are  not  for  me  to 
discuss  here.  But  I  will  say  that  about  twelve 
years  later,'  in  1900,  in  some  correspondence 
with  me  regarding  the  transformations  that 
had  taken  place  in  ourselves  during  those 
dozen  years,  Dr.  Hodgson  admitted  that  what 
he  knew  in  1888  about  the  care  with  which 
the  person  of  the  psychic  should  be  guarded 
while  in  trance  and  the  conditions  which  should 
precede  a  sitting,  was  mere  folly  compared 
with  the  knowledge  he  had  then  gained  by 
his  experience. 

I  remember  the  freshness  of  his  enthusiasm 
of  those  early  days,  his  intense  eagerness  to 
"  find  out  what  is  on  the  Other  Side  of  the 
Veil."  He  told  me  then  that  he  would  not 
allow  himself  to  follow  any  profession  or  be 
engaged  in  any  occupation  for  the  mere  sake 
of  making  money,  that  he  would  pursue  only 


PSYCHICAL  RESEARCH  41 

that  kind  of  work  in  life  in  which  his  heart 
and  his  soul  could  be  absorbed,  with  money 
if  possible,  without  it  if  necessary. 

In  all  probability  the  very  first  attempts  at 
automatic  writing  by  Mrs.  Piper  occurred  in 
some  of  my  sittings.  [See  Proc.  S.  P.  R., 
Part  XXXIII,  p.  292.]  The  writing  there 
referred  to  as  having  occurred  on  May  23, 
1 89 1,  was  the  first  I  had  of  any  length.  It 
was  by  the  control  "  Hiram  Hart."  Distinct 
messages  were  given  and  I  was  asked  to  com- 
pare the  writing  with  his  own  when  in  life. 
I  did  compare  it,  being  convinced  myself  of 
the  appearance  in  it  of  more  than  one  old 
peculiarity,  which  I  did  not  think,  however, 
were  sufficiently  marked  to  be  clear  to  others. 
Dr.  Hodgson  also  made  the  comparison  as  an 
expert  on  handwriting,  and  would  not  admit 
that  there  was  any  similarity  worthy  of  men- 
tion between  the  two  styles  except  in  the  one 
capital  letter  "  H."  This  he  could  not  deny 
was  very  much  like  the  old  style. 

I  have  only  recently  discovered  in  Part 
XXXIII,  Proc.  S.  P.  R.,  p.  399,  a  discussion 
by  Dr.  Hodgson  of  early  attempts  at  writing, 
and  a  footnote  which  reads  as  follows : 

"Miss  R.  (p.  292),  whose  friend  was  apparently 
the  first  to  write  at  all,  using  the  hand  while  '  con- 
trolling '  the  body  generally,  and  also  using  the  hand 
while  Phinuit  was  controlling  the  voice,  has  shown 
me  some  of  this  early  writing  and  some  writing  of 


42      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

her  friend  when  living.  Some  peculiarities  were 
common  to  both,  but  not  enough  to  found  an  argu- 
ment upon  as  to  the  identity  of  the  communicator." 

Previous  to  this  date,  December  8,  1888, 
Phinuit  wrote  my  name  and  his  name,  and 
Hiram  Hart  wrote  his  own  name.  The  two 
styles  of  writing  were  quite  dissimilar. 

I  have  three  wrords  written  by  the  Hart 
control  at  a  still  earlier  date,  on  July  2,  1888. 

All  three  of  these  instances  antedate  the 
occurrence  of  any  writing  of  which  I  have 
ever  seen  any  account.  These  specimens  are 
reproduced  on  the  facing  page,  with  the  excep- 
tion that  I  have  given  only  one  of  the  three 
words  mentioned  as  coming  on  the  very  ear- 
liest date. 

It  will  be  noticed  that  on  Dec.  8,  1888,  a 
new  way  of  spelling  the  Christian  name 
"  Hiram  "  occurs.  There  was  more  or  less 
joking  about  this  afterwards  between  myself 
and  the  control  Hart,  the  latter  insisting  upon 
it  that  he  really  did  know  how  to  spell 
his  own  Christian  name.  I  am  sure  that  such 
inaccuracies  as  this,  especially  in  early  attempts 
at  automatic  writing,  can  now  be  easily  ex- 
plained by  the  experienced  investigator  who  is 
himself  a  psychologist;  or,  rather,  I  should 
say  that  if  they  cannot  be  explained  —  since 
I  believe  the  trance  itself  is  not  yet  really  ex- 
plained —  they  form  no  hindrance  to  the  ac- 
ceptance of  the  theory,  in  a  general  way,  that 


OTTV 


Written  by  Hiram  Hart,  July  2,  1888 
Written  by  Hiram  Hart,  May  23,  i8qi 


Q 


Written  by 

Dr.  Phintit 

^  May  23,  1891 


Written  by  Mrs.  Piper,  May  23,  1891 
In  her  normal  state  after  coming  out  of  trance 


Written  by  Dr.  Phintit,  Dec.  8,  1 


\\  ritten  by  Dr.  Phintit,  Dec.  8,  1888 

I' Written  by  Hiram  Hart,  Dec.  8    1888 


PSYCHICAL  RESEARCH  43 

intelligences  on  the  Other  Side  are  endeavor- 
ing to  communicate  with  intelligences  on  this 
side,  through  an  intermediary,  by  the  ordinary 
method  of  handwriting. 

In  the  winter  of  1892-3  came  the  extremely 
interesting  series  of  sittings  arranged  by  Dr. 
Hodgson  for  the  express  purpose  of  obtaining 
further  communications  from  that  remarkable 
personality,  George  Pelham,  who  died  in  the 
preceding  February,  and  made  himself  known 
to  some  of  his  friends  within  a  few  weeks 
after  his  death.  The  history  of  the  early  G. 
P.  communications,  as  they  are  called,  is  given 
in  detail  by  Dr.  Hodgson  in  Part  XXXIII 
of  the  S.  P.  R.  Proceedings,  February,  1898, 
with  which  all  students  of  psychical  research 
are  doubtless  familiar.  The  sittings  of  this 
series  took  place  in  the  evening,  when  I  was 
able  to  attend  as  reporter.  It  is  needless  to 
say  that  all  this  work  was  most  interesting 
and  fascinating  to  me,  and  I  considered  myself 
specially  favored  in  having  opportunity  to  per- 
form it. 

In  September,  1895,  I  had  my  last  conver- 
sation with  the  personality  known  as  Dr. 
Phinuit,  though  of  course  I  did  not  know  at 
the  time  that  it  was  to  be  my  last,  or  I  should 
have  felt  that  I  was  taking  leave  of  a  dear 
faithful  friend.  There  was  an  interval  of 
four  vears  during  which  I  had  no  sittings. 
Mrs.  Piper  was  ill  a  portion  of  the  time  and 


44      BUII1  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

was  not  giving  sittings,  and  when  she  did  give 
them  I  was  not  knowing  to  all  that  was  going 
on  in  the  affairs  of  the  trance.  I  knew  that 
it  had  taken  on  an  entirely  new  phase,  that 
the  number  of  sitters  had  been  reduced  to  z 
comparatively  small  one.  I  learned  later  that 
strange  things  had  taken  place,  and  that  in 
the  course  of  the  year  1897  Dr.  Phinuit  was 
displaced  by  other  controls,  and  a  new  regime 
was  established.  I  presumed  there  was  so 
much  of  greater  importance  of  which  Dr. 
Hodgson  had  charge,  in  the  conduct  of  his 
work,  that  my  small  affairs  had  been  lost  sight 
of  altogether.  I  feared  I  had  had  my  last  talk 
with  my  old  friend  Hiram  Hart.  In  fact, 
I  thought  my  connection  with  the  Piper  work 
had  come  to  an  end,  whereas  the  truth  is  that 
by  far  the  most  important  part  of  it  was  to 
come. 

It  was  in  the  fall  of  1899  tnat  I  resigned 
my  position  in  the  police  department,  and  for 
a  period  of  about  three  months  I  enjoyed  a 
rest  from  routine  work.  Hardly  had  I  found 
myself  at  leisure  when  Dr.  Hodgson  asked  for 
my  assistance  to  make  copy  of  a  volume  of 
records  of  communications  which  had  been  re- 
ceived in  the  course  of  the  two  preceding  sea- 
sons and  after  the  important  change  in  the 
mediumship  had  taken  place.  Much  of  this 
matter  proved  to  be  most  fascinating  reading 
and    the    volume    had    for    me    an    absorbing 


PSYCHICAL  RESEARCH  45 

interest.  For  a  few  brief  weeks  just  at  this 
time  I  was  living  absolutely  alone  in  a  good- 
sized  apartment,  the  friend  with  whom  I 
shared  the  apartment  being  absent  temporarily. 
If  a  diary  kept  during  these  weeks  had  re- 
corded that  I  M  rose  betimes,  breakfasted, 
copied,  lunched,  copied,  supped,  copied,  re- 
tired," it  would  not  have  been  far  from  the 
truth.  And  I  went  to  my  bed  singing  and 
slept  the  sleep  of  a  child.  While  one  world 
was  entirely,  in  accordance  with  my  wish,  shut 
out  by  the  brick  walls  of  my  own  apartment, 
I  myself  was  being  introduced  to  a  new  and 
different  world.  There  were  in  these  records 
descriptions  of  life  on  the  Other  Side  of  the 
Veil,  supposed  to  be  given  by  one  or  more 
persons  whose  names  are  well  known  to  Eng- 
lish speaking  people,  which  were  most  enter- 
taining. But  of  these  matters  I  am  not  priv- 
ileged nor  do  I  wish  to  speak  in  detail  here. 
They  are  private  records  now  in  the  possession 
of  the  English  S.  P.  R.,  the  publication  of 
which  lies  in  the  discretion  of  the  Council  of 
that  body.  Suffice  it  to  say  that  I  could  not 
lay  the  volume  down  for  more  than  a  moment 
at  a  time,  but  kept  it  in  my  hand  from  morn- 
ing till  night. 

While  this  work  was  going  on  or  when 
nearly  finished  I  was  surprised  one  day  to  re- 
ceive a  note  from  Dr.  Hodgson  saying  that 
I  might  have  a  sitting.     I  went  to  the  Heights 


46      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

on  Dec.  20,  1899,  Dr.  Hodgson  accompany- 
ing me.  I  was  practically  introduced  on  that 
day  to  the  group  of  personalities  on  the  Other 
Side  who  have  been,  as  it  appears,  managing 
the  communications  from  that  side  ever  since, 
among  whom  "  Imperator  "  is  supposed  to  be 
the  leader,  "  Rector  "  the  amanuensis  and  in- 
terpreter, who  controls  and  looks  after  the 
organism  generally  while  the  psychic  is  en- 
tranced, "  Prudens,"  "  Grocyn,"  and  the 
"  Doctor "  members,  all  evidently  assumed 
appellations;  to  which  group  George  Pelham, 
F.  W.  H.  Myers,  and  one  or  two  others 
whose  names  are  prominent  have  from  time 
to  time  been  added;  to  say  nothing  of  numer- 
ous "lesser  lights,  friends  and  relatives  of  in- 
dividual sitters  whom  they  have  been  and  still 
are  trying  to  reach. 

The  reader  who  is  not  familiar  with  these 
matters  is  referred  to  past  regular  publications 
of  the  English  S.  P.  R.,  also  to  a  book  called 
"  Spirit  Teachings,"  published  by  William 
Stainton  Moses  under  the  pseudonym  of  M. 
A.  Oxon,  London,  1883;  a  remarkable  book 
which  is  full  of  the  spiritual  teachings  of  the 
trance  personality  calling  itself  Imperator. 

At  this  first  sitting  under  the  new  regime, 
behold  my  old  friend  Hiram  Hart  appeared 
once  more.  Dr.  Hodgson  left  the  room  tem- 
porarily while  I  conversed  with  my  friend. 
He   had   neither   progressed   out   of   remem- 


PSYCHICAL  RESEARCH  47 

brance  of  me,  it  seems,  nor  had  he  been  un- 
faithful to  early  ties,  but  the  moment  there 
was  opportunity  he  was  on  hand.  He  asked 
if  I  knew  that  he  had  been  calling  for  me  for 
a  long  time,  but  in  reply  to  my  question  said 
he  had  been  told  why  I  could  not  come.  The 
method  of  communication  on  this  occasion  was 
by  writing.  My  friend  made  some  of  his 
peculiar  H's,  and  when  I  said,  "  Hodgson 
doesn't  believe  in  those  H's,  does  he?"  he 
replied:  "  I  do  not  know  or  care;  I  know  I 
am  I  .  .  .  .  and  that  is  I  am  Hiram 
Hart." 

There  were  statements  made  to  me  at  this 
and  a  second  sitting  occurring  a  few  weeks  later 
which  proved  in  the  light  of  subsequent  events 
to  be  so  important  that  they  mark  an  epoch 
in  my  life.  But  these  I  shall  have  to  reserve 
for  a  further  chapter. 


VI 
ASSOCIATION  WITH  A.  P.  MARTIN 

1894 

In  1894  Augustus  P.  Martin  was  appointed 
to  the  chairmanship  of  the  board  of  police 
and  came  to  the  office  where  I  had  already 
served  nine  years.  I  had  never  previously 
met  him,  though  from  his  having  been  for  a 
long  time  prominent  in  the  commercial  and 
social  life  of  Boston  I  knew  him  by  reputation 
and  had  seen  him  in  his  accustomed  place  on 
Sundays  at  church.  At  one  time  he  had  been 
mayor  of  the  city.  In  fact,  it  was  just  ten 
years  previous  to  this  that  he  had  served  as 
mayor,  and  it  was  during  the  year  immediately 
following  his  term  of  office  that  the  amend- 
ments to  the  city  charter,  previously  men- 
tioned, went  into  force,  under  which  the  board 
of  police  was  created,  to  which  he  now  came 
as  its  head. 

The  five  years  of  his  term  of  office  as  head 
of  the  police  department  were  crowded  full 
of  serious  and  responsible  work  for  him,  and 
I  was  allowed  to  have  my  share  in  it  as  one 
of  his  assistants.  During  those  five  years  I 
seemed  to  be  living  under  a  sort  of  pater- 
nalism, different  from  anything  I  had  ever 
48 


AUGUSTUS    P.    MARTIN 

I.N     Hlfl     Hh  I  IB  I  H     ■»  I     .K 


ASSOCIATION  WITH  MR.  MARTIN  49 

known.  He  was  in  public  office  what  I  imag- 
ine an  old  Roman  patrician  might  have  been. 
He  was  like  a  father  to  all  young  people  who 
were  in  the  employ  of  the  department  of 
which  he  had  charge,  especially  to  women. 
The  invasion  of  the  business  world  by  women 
had  taken  place  mostly  in  his  day  and  he  be- 
lieved that  this  step  was  freighted  with  in- 
calculable benefit  to  both  sexes. 

He  had  the  faculty  of  appealing  to  and 
calling  out  the  best  in  his  subordinates.  The 
geniality  of  his  nature  and  the  kindly  cour- 
tesy of  his  manner  made  themselves  felt  like 
sunlight  in  the  quarters  which  he  occupied 
daily,  and  during  all  my  experience  in  office 
life  I  have  never  known  a  man  more  loved 
by  other  men  than  was  he.  Men  were  glad 
to  come,  if  for  a  few  brief  moments  only, 
into  the  warmth  of  his  presence,  and  seldom 
one  left  it  without  feeling  better  for  it.  This 
is  not  my  own  prejudiced  opinion  merely,  for 
I  have  heard  his  occupancy  of  a  public  chair 
characterized  as  "  dignity,  sweetness  and 
light." 

He  listened  patiently  to  the  complaint  of 
the  poorest  petitioner  for  justice  or  applicant 
for  assistance,  and  in  cases  which  called  for 
the  rendering  of  a  judgment  he  generally 
showed  himself  possessed  of  a  wisdom  and  a 
sense  of  justice  such  that  his  friends  often 
jokingly  told  him  that  he  had  missed  his  call- 


5o      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

ing  in  life  and  should  have  been  a  judge  on 
the  bench. 

But  with  all  his  gentleness  of  manner  and 
kindness  of  heart,  his  mentality  was  original 
and  forceful.  He  did  not  always  follow  in 
the  footsteps  of  his  predecessors.  It  was  his 
habit  first  to  decide  upon  what  policy  it  was 
best  to  pursue,  and  then,  if  ordinary  methods 
were  not  adequate  for  putting  the  policy  into 
effect,  to  devise  others.  Not  that  he  never 
erred  in  judgment  or  in  conduct.  In  fact,  he 
was  one  of  the  most  natural  human  beings 
I  have  ever  known,  and  humanity  does  err. 
His  naturalness  was  his  charm.  But,  I  am 
not  writing  a  biography. 

The  General  —  for  as  such  he  was  popu- 
larly known  —  left  the  police  department  at 
the  expiration  of  his  term  of  office,  in  the 
spring  of  1899,  and  it  was  in  the  fall  of  that 
same  year  that  I  gave  up  my  position  also. 
The  association  seemed  to  have  come  to  an 
end.  Oct.  5  was  the  date  of  my  leaving.  On 
Oct.  16  a  certain  psychic  [Mrs.  G.]  whom  I 
saw  occasionally  told  me  that  I  was  to  go 
back  to  my  old  position,  that  something  more 
was  to  be  required  of  me,  and  on  Nov.  30 
another  psychic  [Mrs.  S.]  told  me  practically 
the  same  thing.  They  were  both  very  posi- 
tive in  their  statements,  and  both  said  I  was 
to  go  back  for  a  short  time  only.  I  set  these 
predictions  down  at  once  as  incorrect,  for  my 


ASSOCIATION  WITH  MR.  MARTIN   5 1 

feeling  against  returning  was  so  strong  that 
I  thought  no  possible  inducement  could  take 
me  back.  On  Dec.  13  I  had  persuaded  Gen- 
eral Martin,  who  was  then  at  leisure  at  his 
home,  to  accompany  me  on  a  visit  to  one  of 
these  same  psychics  [Mrs.  S.],  who  prophe- 
sied for  him,  in  plain  language,  that  another 
high  office  or  position  was  to  be  offered  him. 
Then  came  my  first  private  sitting  with  Mrs. 
Piper  under  the  new  regime,  previously  men- 
tioned, which  took  place  on  Dec.  20,  at  which 
I  was  accompanied  by  Dr.  Hodgson. 

Dr.  Hodgson  had  chided  me,  taking  the 
ground  of  worldly  wisdom,  for  having  re- 
signed the  position  I  had  held  so  long,  not  un- 
derstanding all  my  reasons  for  so  doing,  but 
when  I  appealed  to  Imperator  as  to  whether 
I  had  done  right  or  wrong,  the  latter  unhesi- 
tatingly replied: 

11  Right,  and  made  the  way  for  a  new  life, 
new  scenes,  new  enterprises,  new  conditions, 
whereby  thou  wilt  be  completely  thine  own 
master.     Regret  not  thy  act." 

And  Dr.  Hodgson  had,  of  course,  to  sub- 
mit to  the  opinion  of  the  personality  for  whom 
he  had  so  great  a  respect.  In  speaking  of 
future  work  Imperator  said: 

"  There  are  many  that  are  thy  friends  and 
who  would  give  thee  much  help  and  will  with- 
out any  effort  of  thine  own,  remember,  friend. 
We  often  say  seek  and  ye  shall  find.     In  this 


52      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

case  we  say  seek  not,  and  if  we  be  obeyed, 
every  detail  will  be  made  known  to  thee.  We 
[see  thee]  receiving  communications  from  thy 
past  surroundings  which  will  verify  all  we 
now  give  utterance  to." 

It  happened  that  Josiah  Quincy,  who  was 
mayor  of  Boston  that  year,  just  before  leaving 
the  mayor's  chair  and  as  almost  his  last  offi- 
cial act,  appointed  General  Martin  to  the 
position  of  water  commissioner  for  the  city, 
which  position  he  accepted  and  took  up  his 
duties  in  the  beginning  of  the  year  1900. 
This  was  a  complete  surprise  to  me,  and  I 
understand  was  an  equal  surprise  to  the  ap- 
pointee. On  Jan.  12  I  received  a  request 
from  the  new  water  commissioner  to  present 
myself  at  City  Hall  for  the  purpose  of  ren- 
dering him  some  assistance,  although  not  then 
as  an  employee  of  the  department.  On  the 
very  same  day,  the  12th,  to  my  astonishment 
I  received  a  letter  from  Dr.  Hodgson  saying 
that  Imperator  had  especially  asked  him  to 
arrange  another  sitting  for  me  with  Mrs. 
Piper,  that  I  was  to  go  alone,  that  it  was  im- 
portant for  my  own  good,  after  which  it  might 
not  be  necessary  for  me  to  go  again  for  some 
time. 

I  went  to  City  Hall  on  the  15th.  I  did 
not  feel  at  all  certain  in  my  own  mind  that  it 
was  best  to  engage  myself  in  a  position  there 
permanently.       Imperator    had    hinted    new 


ASSOCIATION  WITH  MR.  MARTIN   53 

fields,  new  scenes,  etc.  I  was  a  little  puffed 
up  by  these  suggestions,  and,  although  it  was 
a  pleasure  to  assist  General  Martin  in  any  kind 
of  work,  1  secretly  hoped  that  my  service  in 
government  departments  had  come  to  an  end, 
that  the  monotony  of  my  life  was  to  be  bro- 
ken, and  that  I  might  take  wing  for  some  dis- 
tant spot,  I  cared  not  where. 

On  the  17th  I  went  again  to  Mrs.  Piper. 
Imperator  said: 

"  Thou  art  being  cared  for  in  all  ways  and 
we  have  thy  interests  at  stake,  friend,  and  we 
are  leading  thee  in  the  right  way  now.  Let 
us  tell  thee  that  within  a  few  short  weeks  thou 
wilt  see  a  great  change  in  thy  life  for  the  very 
best.  A  position  will  be  given  thee  without 
thy  seeking  it.  As  we  were  closing  our  last 
meeting  we  saw  a  light  before  thee  of  which 
we  could  not  then  speak  and  we  have  chosen 
this  opportunity  to  do  so." 

Very  shortly  after  this  I  was  appointed  to 
a  position  in  the  water  department  and  the 
old  association  was  renewed,  City  Hall  being 
only  a  stone's  throw  from  the  old  locality.  I 
therefore  considered  that  the  prophecy  made 
by  the  two  psychics  was  almost  literally  ful- 
filled. Imperator,  however,  seemed  to  see 
this  still  more  clearly,  and  said:  "We  warn 
thee  not  to  re-enter  the  former  surroundings, 
we  desire  thee  to  keep  apart  from  it  altogether, 
and  we  ask  thee  to  dare  not  disobey  our  lead- 


54      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

ings."  He  had  seen  me  "  receiving  communi- 
cations from  my  past  surroundings,"  which 
was  correct,  but  did  not  see  me  going  back  to 
the  identical  position  in  the  police  department. 
All  three  psychics  saw  the  same  event,  which 
was  to  take  place  and  did  take  place,  Mrs. 
Piper  seeing  it  more  clearly  than  the  other 
two  psychics,  as  I  reread  my  notes  to-day. 

I  have  thought  best  to  give  these  items  in 
detail  in  this  particular  instance,  since  they  all 
are  so  closely  related.  The  subject  of  fore- 
sight, however,  is  one  on  which  I  do  not  wish 
to  express  here  any  definite  opinion  whatever, 
nor  to  assume  an  understanding  of  it.  Coming 
events  cast  their  shadows  before,  which  we 
ourselves,  with  our  normal  sight,  can  some- 
times perceive.  It  is  human,  especially  when 
one  is  in  trouble  or  doubt,  to  want  to  know7 
something  about  what  is  to  take  place,  but  it 
is  not  dignified  to  seek  to  know  about  the  fu- 
ture to  the  extent  of  having  one's  serenity  dis- 
turbed in  the  performance  of  the  duty  of  the 
day.  In  fact,  it  seems  to  me  that  it  is  only 
in  the  conscientious  performance  of  the  daily 
duty,  without  undue  anxiety  about  the  future, 
that  desirable  changes  are  brought  about.  We 
bring  them  about  ourselves.  We  work  stead- 
ily toward  them  and  by  some  occult  law  we 
draw  to  ourselves  that  which  we  really  need, 
that  of  which  we  are  deserving  and  for  which 


ASSOCIATION  WITH  MR.  MARTIN   55 

we  are  prepared.  Outward  affairs,  in  the  life 
of  a  serious-minded  person,  seem  to  follow 
and  correspond  with  inward  change  and 
growth. 


VII 

APPARENT  FAILURE  OF  PREDIC- 
TION 

1900-1902 

To  go  back  to  the  sitting  of  Jan.  17,  1900, 
with  Mrs.  Piper,  mentioned  in  the  preceding 
chapter.  Of  all  the  sittings  which  I  can  re- 
member, this  one  made  the  deepest  impression 
upon  me.  After  a  few  lines  of  script  the 
pencil  was  dropped  from  the  psychic's  hand 
and  the  voice  taken,  and  for  nearly  two  hours 
conversation  was  carried  on.  Before  the  time 
was  up  I  threw  away  my  own  pen  and  paper, 
gave  up  the  effort  to  take  notes,  and  had  a 
heart  to  heart  talk  with  the  trance  personalities. 

It  was  my  first  experience  with  Rector's  use 
of  the  voice.  His  style  differed  so  greatly 
from  the  familiar  style  of  Phinuit,  or  even 
from  that  of  my  friend  Hiram  Hart,  that  I 
realized  at  once  that  I  was  conversing  with  a 
different  individuality.  He  was  so  dignified, 
so  kind,  so  sympathetic,  so  serious,  so  desirous 
of  assisting  me  to  lift  my  life  to  a  higher  level, 
that  I  was  almost  overcome.  How  these 
newly  found  spirits,  whoever  they  might  be, 
should  know  so  much  about  me,  I  could  not 
understand.  I  thought  myself  a  stranger  to 
56 


FAILURE  OF  PREDICTION       57 

them,  but  they  seemed  to  know  me  through 
and  through.  They  saw  in  me  capacity  which 
I  only  half  recognized  in  myself,  and  they 
seemed  to  think  me  worthy  of  their  time, 
their  effort,  their  assistance,  and  they  en- 
deavored to  convince  me  of  the  fact  that 
my  life  was  of  some  importance  and  must 
not  be  undervalued  by  me.  The  period  of 
fourteen  years  in  one  spot,  just  then 
ended,  had  seemed  long  and  difficult  to 
me,  yet  Imperator  now  called  it  "  only  a  short 
school  for  thee."  So  brief  evidently  do  the 
decades  seem  to  the  discarnate  eye  which  takes 
in  the  wider  span. 

Hiram  Hart  came  and  said:  "  Oh,  I  bless 
the  day  when  I  found  you  here.  I  do  not  see 
you  very  often  now.  I  come  here  and  take  a 
look  and  do  not  see  you  and  then  go  away." 
"  Here  "  means  at  the  scene  of  operations,  the 
point  of  communication,  which  is  always  where 
Mrs.  Piper  happens  for  the  time  to  be  located. 

But  the  most  important  statement  made  to 
me  by  Imperator  on  this  occasion,  in  speaking 
of  my  again  being  associated  with  General 
Martin,  was  the  following: 

"  We  see  thee  and  him  writing  a  book 
together." 

I  asked:     "What  about?" 

"  It  is  concerning  the  natural  things  in  life 
and  many  different  conditions  of  thy  life, 
which  will  be  put  together  in  a  form  of  phi- 


5 8      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

losophy.  //  zvill  be  so  in  spite  of  anything 
which  thou  mayst  think  to  the  contrary." 

It  was  true  we  were  able  to  work  well  to- 
gether, or  so  at  least  I  flattered  myself.  Both 
the  commercial  world  and  the  official  world 
to-day  are  full  of  just  such  combinations  of 
men  as  directors  and  women  as  right-hand  as- 
sistants. A  woman  serving  in  the  capacity  of 
private  secretary  to  a  man  whose  mind  is  filled 
with  the  affairs  of  his  office  and  whose  time  is 
precious  should  be  able  to  adapt  herself  to  his 
peculiarities,  complement  his  weaknesses,  and 
stand  respectfully  and  safely  aside  from  his 
strength.  Women  have  an  intuitive  percep- 
tion of  these  things,  and  even  a  young  woman 
who  has  not  had  experience  is  often  easily  able 
to  adjust  herself  to  the  requirements  of  such 
a  position.  At  any  rate,  when  in  a  haphazard 
selection  the  right  combination  is  formed,  a 
better  than  the  ordinary  grade  of  work  ought 
to  be  expected  and  more  than  the  usual  amount 
can  be  accomplished. 

I  will  say  here  that  as  far  back  as  when  I 
was  at  school  I  made  up  my  mind  that,  what- 
ever else  I  did,  I  would  not  attempt  to  become 
an  author.  That  was  not  to  be  my  field. 
Others  were  more  naturally  fitted  for  it.  I 
must  have  other  work  to  do.  Later  in  life, 
when  I  found  myself  struggling  along  in  doubt 
and  mental  darkness,  and  occasionally  the  solu- 
tion of  some  problem  would  relieve  my  mind, 


FAILURE  OF  PREDICTION       59 

I  flattered  myself  secretly  that  sometime  I 
might  gather  together  into  a  sort  of  whole 
the  solutions  of  the  various  problems  which 
had  presented  themselves  to  me,  and  inflict  the 
mass  in  printed  form  upon  others.  Still  later, 
I  came  to  the  conclusion  that  every  problem, 
without  exception,  with  which  I  had  battled 
had  been  met  and  solved  ages  before  I  was 
born ;  I  found  that  the  wisdom  of  all  the  great 
philosophers  had  been  handed  down  and  was 
accessible  to  all  who  could  read,  and  therefore 
I  again  dropped  the  idea  of  ever  entering  the 
field  of  authorship.  Not  that  it  is  a  difficult 
thing  in  these  days  to  write  and  publish  a 
book  of  some  kind,  but  I  concluded  that  there 
were  too  many  books  in  the  world.  The 
world  be  better  off  if  there  were  only  half 
as  many.  But  when  Imperator  marked  out 
my  path  for  me  in  the  manner  above  given,  I 
confess  to  at  least  a  little  surprise,  and  on 
another  later  occasion,  when  I  remarked  to  him 
that  I  did  not  wish  to  publish  a  book  simply 
from  a  sense  of  duty,  he  replied : 

"  Friend,  to  write  a  book,  it  is  thy  doom  or 
duty,  one  and  both  combined." 

I  did  not  speak  of  this  particular  matter  to 
General  Martin.  He  was  eager  to  hear  all  I 
was  willing  to  report,  but  while  I  gave  him 
much,  I  also  withheld  much.  I  simply  told 
him  in  a  general  way  that  it  was  said  we  were 
yet  to  do  some  special  work  together.     I  was 


60     BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

afraid  and  ashamed  to  tell  him.  I  had  long 
before  learned  to  keep  prophecies  to  myself 
until  I  saw  some  sign  of  their  fulfilment.  He 
was  a  man  of  family  ties,  of  many  cares,  bur- 
dens and  responsibilities  both  in  his  private 
and  public  life,  and  especially  when  illness 
came  upon  him  I  could  see  no  possible  way  by 
which  any  work  of  that  kind  could  be  done. 

I  will  say  here  that  he  did  not  specially  pur- 
sue the  subject  of  Spiritism  in  the  sense  of 
seeking  mediums  and  paying  attention  to  what 
they  had  to  say,  yet  he  was  altogether  too 
open-minded  and  simple-hearted  to  scoff  at  it. 
Soon  after  my  making  his  acquaintance  he  re- 
lated to  me  an  interesting  experience  of  his 
own  which  happened  very  soon  after  the  death 
of  his  mother,  who  died  when  he  was  a  young 
man  of  about  twenty-one,  and  to  whom  he  had 
been  attached  with  more  than  the  usual  devo- 
tion of  son  to  mother.  A  servant  in  the  fam- 
ily, young  and  quite  ignorant,  gave  indications 
of  being  controlled  by  the  spirit  of  his  mother 
within  a  short  time  after  her  passing  out,  giv- 
ing her  maiden  name  —  Verrall  —  a  very 
uncommon  name,  and  one  which  the  servant 
could  not  possibly  have  known.  I  cannot  re- 
late the  incident  in  full,  my  point  being  that  it 
made  an  ineradicable  impression  upon  his  mind 
and  was  sufficiently  serious  to  cause  him  to  re- 
frain from  speaking  lightly  of  such  matters 
when  he  found  any    one    deeply    interested  in 


FAILURE  OF  PREDICTION      61 

them,  had  he  otherwise  been  inclined  to  do  so. 

During  middle  life  he  attended  the  church 
of  the  Rev.  Minot  J.  Savage  for  something 
over  twenty  years,  rarely  missed  a  Sunday  and 
took  a  leading  part  in  the  management  of 
church  affairs.  He  was  an  admirer  of  Mr. 
Savage's  independent  thinking,  and  all  the  old 
attendants  at  that  church  know  that  there  was 
a  great  deal  of  what  might  be  called  Spiritual- 
ism in  Mr.  Savage's  sermons. 

He  sat  in  his  chair  at  City  Hall  for  some- 
what over  a  year,  then  one  day  in  March, 
1 90 1,  he  was  taken  ill  and  obliged  to  remain 
at  his  home.  He  was,  however,  continued  in 
office  by  two  mayors,  Thomas  N.  Hart  and 
Patrick  A.  Collins.  This  was  one  way  in 
which  his  conspicuous  service  of  the  past,  to 
both  city  and  country,  was  recognized  by  some 
of  his  friends,  citizens  of  Boston  of  substantial 
character,  who  had  power  and  influence  in  the 
management  of  public  affairs.  But  I  wish  to 
state  here,  in  justice  to  him,  that  during  al- 
most the  entire  length  of  his  illness  his  mind 
remained  clear,  he  was  knowing  to  all  the  im- 
portant affairs  of  the  department  of  which  he 
had  charge,  and  himself  dictated  its  policy. 
It  devolved  upon  me  to  travel  back  and  forth 
frequently,  almost  daily,  between  City  Hall 
and  his  residence  in  the  suburbs,  carrying  bills 
and  papers  of  all  kinds,  getting  his  signature  to 
them  and  taking  back  his  orders.     I  remem- 


62      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

ber  one  instance  in  particular  when  he  dictated 
an  important  letter,  assigning  newly  appointed 
subordinates  to  their  respective  places  and 
duties,  a  letter  which  was  remarked  upon  when 
I  took  it  back  to  the  office  for  the  clearness 
and  terseness  of  its  expression  and  for  the 
authority  which  it  conveyed. 

But  this  was  a  weary  summer,  that  of  1901. 
The  suffering  sick  were  languishing  in  the  ex- 
treme heat,  and  for  the  well  there  was  the  dead 
monotony  of  life's  drudgery  and  the  heart- 
sickness  which  comes  from  hope  deferred.  I 
had  not  had  access  to  Mrs.  Piper  since  Novem- 
ber of  the  preceding  year.  The  trance  per- 
sonalities had  not  sent  for  me,  and  it  was  not 
my  habit  at  that  time  to  ask  for  sittings.  All 
signs  seemed  to  be  failing,  and  the  ground 
which  I  had  thought  solid  seemed  to  be  slipping 
again  from  beneath  my  feet.  I  think,  how- 
ever, Dr.  Hodgson  made  it  known  that  I  de- 
sired a  sitting,  and  on  Jan.  13,  1902,  at  a 
sitting  of  his  own,  the  following  came : 

"  Also  Miss  Robbins'  friends  hath  tried  in 
vain  to  reach  her.  I,  Rector,  in  particular. 
But,  friend,  we  fail  to  reach  through  lights  * 
sufficiently  to  give  our  messages  clearly." 

Dr.  Hodgson  replied:  "She  thought  she 
got  a  few  words  I  believe  from  you  through 
another  light." 

1  "  Light "  is  the  word  commonly  used  by  the  trance 
personalities  for  "  psychic  "  or  "  medium." 


FAILURE  OF  PREDICTION      63 

Rector  said:  "Imperator  sent  me  several 
times  but  I  was  not  sure  that  I  had  reached 
her." 

This  certainly  implies  that  Imperator  and 
his  group  do  try  or  have  tried  on  occasions  to 
communicate  through  other  "  lights  "  when 
there  is  special  need  of  their  reaching  those 
over  whom  they  assume  to  have  charge. 
What  they  do  in  the  way  of  experiment  is 
another  matter.  I  had  recognized  on  one  or 
two  occasions  what  appeared  to  be  an  attempt 
on  the  part  of  Rector  to  communicate  with  me 
through  natural  but  undeveloped  psychics.  I 
felt  strongly  that  such  an  attempt  was  being 
made. 

A  sitting  was  arranged  for  me,  to  take  place 
about  a  week  later,  on  Jan.  22.  From  that 
time  on,  for  the  next  two  months,  I  was  con- 
stantly receiving  through  Dr.  Hodgson  mes- 
sages from  Imperator  and  Rector  and  sending 
messages  to  them.  For,  strange  as  it  may 
seem,  although  the  sick  man  whom  all  these 
messages  concerned  knew  very  little,  almost 
nothing,  about  Imperator  and  his  group,  the 
latter  apparently  took  a  very  great  interest  in 
him.  I  delivered  to  him  a  few  messages  which 
I  thought  might  give  him  hope  and  comfort, 
and  I  think  I  must  certainly  have  given  him  the 
impression  that  my  own  feeling,  in  spite  of  all 
misunderstandings,  was  that  just  as  soon  as  he 
passed  through  and  emerged  from  the  shadow 


64     BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

of  death  there  would  be  for  him  a  welcome  on 
the  Other  Side  of  which  he  little  dreamed.  At 
least,  that  was  my  hope. 

But  the  important  point  here  in  its  relation 
to  psychical  research  is  that  I  believed,  from 
the  many  emphatic  statements  made  to  me  by 
a  group  of  spirits,  that  I  was  to  be  required  in 
the  future  to  assist  in  a  field  of  work  which 
they  considered  most  important,  that  there 
was  a  particular  person  with  whom  I  was  to  be 
associated  in  that  work  perhaps  more  closely 
than  with  any  other,  yet  that  particular  person 
was  dying. 

While  the  object  I  have  in  view  compels  me 
to  speak  freely  of  serious  things,  I  trust  no 
one  will  dream  that  there  is  aught  in  my 
heart  but  the  utmost  reverence  for  everything 
associated  with  that  most  mysterious  change 
through  which  all  human  beings  must  pass  and 
which  comes  to  none  but  once.  Although  I 
had  been  bereft  of  certain  relatives  and  friends, 
it  had  not  hitherto  fallen  to  my  lot  to  sit  often 
or  long  at  the  bedside  of  the  sick.  But  to 
watch  a  fellow-creature  who  is  gradually  and 
surely  approaching  the  end  of  life,  who  will 
not  stay  his  feet  for  protest,  tear  or  prayer, 
to  almost  see  the  soul  as  it  plumes  its  wings  for 
flight,  is  certainly  an  experience  which  should 
produce  the  greatest  awe  in  the  heart  and  the 
mind  of  the  watcher. 


FAILURE  OF  PREDICTION      65 

The  actual  date  of  the  passing  out  was 
March  13,  1902. 

While  General  Martin  was  a  man  widely 
known  in  his  own  city,  he  had  little  reputation 
which  extended  beyond  this  limit,  except  in 
connection  with  the  War  of  the  Rebellion,  in 
which  he  served  during  its  entire  continuance. 
He  was  complimented  by  General  Meade  for 
distinguished  service  at  the  Battle  of  Gettys- 
burg. It  was  on  the  third  and  last  day  of  this 
memorable  and  terrific  fight  that  his  battery, 
which  had  been  located  with  immense  difficulty 
on  the  summit  of  a  rugged  hill,  had  a  clear 
sweep  of  the  open  field  over  which  Pickett's 
Division  of  the  Confederate  Army  made  its 
famous  charge,  rank  after  rank  of  which  were 
mowed  down  by  the  steady  firing  from  Little 
Round  Top,  and  the  tide  of  battle  was  turned. 

The  Boston  Transcript  said  of  him  at  the 
time  of  his  death:  "Hardly  any  other  of 
Boston's  citizens  was  better  known,  and  few 
had  contributed  more  than  he  of  time,  talent 
and  activity  to  the  military  and  civic  service 
and  functions  of  the  city.  .  .  .  He  fitted 
best  into  those  free  movements  of  citizens 
called  into  being  by  special  occasions,  and  ex- 
pressive of  local  patriotism  and  public  spirit. 
It  was  the  recognition  of  this  fitness  that  secur- 
ed his  selection  as  chief  marshall  upon  two  of 
the  most  prominent    commemorative  occasions 


66      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

within  the  last  quarter-century,  and  he  was 
sure  to  be  prominent  in  all  projects  for  the 
development  and  improvement  of  his  city." 

He  was  not  a  general  in  the  army,  nor  did 
that  title  rightfully  belong  to  him  until  the  year 
1882,  when  Governor  John  D.  Long,  after- 
wards Secretary  of  the  United  States  Navy, 
upon  whose  staff  he  was  serving  at  the  time, 
commissioned  him,  lawfully,  Brigadier  General, 
in  recognition  of  his  valuable  services  during 
the  war.  Another  newspaper  article  which 
appeared  at  the  time  of  his  death  says: 
11  Tardy  justice  was  thus  done  and  he  there- 
after bore  a  title  truthfully  which  he  had  long 
borne  by  courtesy." 

It  may  be  evident  later  that  the  title  which 
best  fits  a  person's  character,  the  name  by 
which  he  has  been  most  intimately  known  and 
by  which  he  is  most  endeared,  clings  to  him 
after  he  has  passed  to  the  Other  Side. 


VIII 
FULFILMENT 

i 903- 1 907 

March  13,  1902,  must  be  borne  in  mind  as 
an  important  date  in  this  narration.  It  mark- 
ed the  passing  of  a  life  from  this  earth.  A 
few  days  after  the  occurrence  I  saw  Dr. 
Hodgson  and  instructed  him  particularly  not  to 
mention  my  name  in  any  way  at  the  Piper 
trance,  as  it  is  sometimes  called.  I  felt  that, 
as  matters  stood  between  myself  and  the  trance 
personalities,  there  had  been  to  say  the  least 
some  misunderstanding  and  confusion,  and 
that  the  only  dignified  course  for  me  to  pursue 
was  to  ask  no  favors  and  abide  my  time.  I 
thought  this  my  opportunity,  too,  to  test  the 
value  once  more  of  what  had  seemed  to  be  a 
close  relation  between  myself  and  personalities 
whom  I  knew  only  as  a  part  of  the  Unseen. 

No  word  or  hint  came  for  me  during  the 
remainder  of  that  season,  and  almost  another 
whole  season  passed  when  one  day,  May  21, 
1903,  at  a  sitting  of  Dr.  Hodgson's,  in  one  of 
those  significant  mutterings  of  Mrs.  Piper's 
when  coming  out  of  trance,  when  she  seems  to 
be  returning  to  her  body,  taking  last  glimpses 
of  people  in  the  spirit  whom  she  designates  as 
67 


68      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

"  white  people,"  while  those  to  whom  she  is 
returning  appear  to  her  "black,"  she  said: 

"  General  Martin  says  he  is  coming  here 
pretty  soon  to  speak  —  Martin  —  love  to  — 
this  is  a  pretty  dark  place  after  all." 

Nothing  more  until  Dec.  15  of  that  same 
year,  when  the  following  conversation  took 
place  between  Rector  and  Dr.  Hodgson  while 
arrangements  were  being  made  for  future 
sittings,  Rector's  words  being  quoted  from  the 
automatic  script,  Dr.  Hodgson's  being  en- 
closed in  the  round  brackets :  — 

"  There  is  a  spirit  here  who  calls  constantly 
for  a  lady  in  the  body  whom  he  refers  to 
as  — 

[Hand  enquires  of  Spirit?] 

"Rob  bins." 

(Yes.  She  will  doubtless  be  rejoiced  to 
come.  She  said  long  ago  that  she  was  waiting 
for  anything  that  came.) 

"  This  is  Imperator's  arrangement  for  the 
spirit  who  spake  unto  Him  to  give  him  re- 
lief." 

(Yes.) 

"  Imperator  hath  referred  to  it  several  times 
and  called  our  attention  to  it  but  He  hath  not 
really  commanded  us  until  now,  as  He  hath 
been  assisting  the  spirit." 

"  Wilt  thou  attend  to  this  friend  on  the 
earthly  side  and  appoint  for  a  meeting  with  us 
on  the  third  after  coming?  " 


FULFILMENT  69 

(Yes,  I  will.) 

["  Third  after  coming  "  means  the  third 
day  after  the  coming  Sabbath.] 

A  sitting  was  then  arranged  for  me,  to  take 
place  on  Dec.  23d,  about  twenty-one  months 
after  the  passing  out.  Behold,  my  old  friend, 
business  associate  and  employer  appears,  com- 
municates as  clearly  and  strongly  as  if  he  had 
had  many  previous  opportunities  instead  of 
having  had  none,  and  at  this  very  first  oppor- 
tunity says: 

"  I  want  to  know  if  you  don't  think  we 
could  manage  to  write  a  book?  " 

And  later,  on  the  same  occasion : 

"  I  have  had  this  on  my  mind  ever  since  I 
came  into  this  world  and  I  would  like  to  have 
it  carried  out." 

Still  later : 

"  It  has  got  to  be.  It  is  a  thing  that  I  am 
bound  to  have." 

I  ask: 

(You  mean  that  you  are  bound  I  shall 
publish  a  book?) 

The  reply  came: 

"  Literally,  absolutely,  out  and  out,  with 
pen,  paper  and  ink,  write  a  book  and  publish 
it,  and  I  am  going  to  be  the  inspirer  and  insti- 
gator of  it,  and  we  are  going  to  write  that  book 
together  just  as  sure  as  you  live." 

What!  Was  it  then  true  that  the  line  of 
work  marked  out  four  years  previously    was 


7o     BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

after  all  to  be  pursued,  no  hindrance  having 
occurred  in  the  meantime  except  —  except  — 
except  —  death  ! ! 

My  sittings  with  Mrs.  Piper  continued  from 
that  time  on,  taking  place,  however,  rarely.  I 
was  directed  from  the  beginning  to  withhold 
some  of  my  communications  from  Dr.  Hodg- 
son, although  I  gave  him  the  greater  part  of 
them.  He  could  not  himself  always  under- 
stand the  full  purpose  of  my  relation  to  the 
trance  personalities,  or  why  a  certain  day 
should  be  assigned  to  me  rather  than  to  some 
one  else  who  could  give  more  substantial  aid  to 
the  investigations  that  were  being  carried  on  in 
the  name  of  science,  or  some  one  who,  perhaps, 
received  better  communications  and  more  mat- 
ter that  was  evidential  in  its  nature  than  my 
own.  But  it  is  well  known  that  he  came  in 
time  to  obey  implicitly  the  wishes  of  the  trance 
personalities  in  making  arrangements  for  the 
different  sitters,  and  I  am  told  that  he  was 
heard  to  remark  in  his  emphatic  way,  in  re- 
gard to  an  appointment  for  me :  "  If  they 
wish  it,  so  it  shall  be." 

I  do  not  claim  any  "  inspiration  "  in  any- 
thing I  say  or  do.  Nor  do  I  disclaim  it.  I 
simply  do  not  know.  In  the  first  place,  I 
would  not  be  guilty  of  putting  upon  any  spirit, 
either  friend  or  stranger,  the  responsibility  for 
something  no  better  than  what  I  can  do.  In 
the   second   place  ,  if   I  do    anything   that   is 


FULFILMENT  71 

worthy,  especially  after  long  preparation  and 
with  much  effort,  I  am  human  enough  still  to 
want  a  little  credit  for  it,  for  myself.  I  fond- 
ly dreamed  that  I  might  become  one  of  those 
scribes  who  have  only  to  hold  the  pencil  for 
language  to  flow  with  fluency  from  the  tips  of 
their  fingers.  But  not  so.  I  might  sit  for  an 
hour  at  a  time  in  silent  expectation,  and  not 
until  there  was  a  conscious  effort  on  my  part  to 
move  the  pencil  would  it  show  the  slightest  in- 
clination to  stir. 

However,  to  say  that  I  am  not  conscious  of 
the  cooperation  of  friends  in  the  Unseen  in  any 
part  of  my  work  would  not  be  strictly  true.  I 
am  often  conscious  of  their  presence.  Apart 
from  the  recognition  within  one's  own  spirit, 
there  are  at  times  delicate  changes  in  or  subtle 
states  of  the  nervous  system  which  come  grad- 
ually to  be  recognized  by  the  highly  sensitive 
organization  as  sure  indices  of  the  closeness  of 
other  beings,  though  we  cannot  point  the  fin- 
ger at  them  or  clasp  them  by  the  hand.  I  feel 
sure  from  conversations  I  have  had  with  others 
that  this  fact  lies  within  the  experience  of  many 
people  who  will  recognize  the  truth  of  what  I 
say,  impossible  as  it  is  to  define  such  experience 
with  sufficient  precision  to  make  it  understood 
by  one  who  has  never  known  it. 

On  December  1,  1905,  the  many  friends  of 
Dr.  Richard  Hodgson  were  astounded  at  see- 
ing in  the  morning  papers  the  announcement  of 


72     BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

his  sudden  death,  which  occurred  the  preced- 
ing evening.  It  is  safe  to  say  that  there  was 
not  a  man  in  the  city  of  Boston  who  took  bet- 
ter care  of  his  health,  who  derived  more 
pleasure  from  athletic  sports,  who  felt  more 
pride  in  keeping  his  physique  up  to  its  highest 
standard.  He  purified  his  body  and  his  life 
for  his  special  work,  and  I  feel  that  I  am 
within  bounds  of  the  strictest  veracity  when  I 
say  that  in  and  through  that  work  higher  ideals 
of  living  were  continually  being  presented  to 
his  mind.  He  was  not  ashamed  to  say  that  he 
followed  the  advice  of  an  "  Imperator  "  or  of 
some  other  unseen  intelligence  even  in  matters 
pertaining  to  physical  well-being,  although  1 
think  no  one  who  ever  saw  him  could  say  that 
he  had  aught  but  the  greatest  respect  for  his 
own  good  judgment  which  was  plainly  indicated 
upon  his  brow. 

The  day  of  his  death  happened  to  be  my  op- 
portunity at  Arlington  Heights.  I  had  a 
sitting  in  the  morning  and  he  died  in  the  very 
early  evening  of  the  same  day.  No  hint  of 
what  was  to  take  place  reached  me  from  the 
Other  Side.  Mrs.  Piper,  who  had  just  enter- 
ed upon  her  work  for  the  season,  was  much 
shocked  by  the  occurrence.  I  spent  an  hour 
at  her  bedside  on  the  evening  of  the  day  after 
the  death,  and  she  related  to  me  a  most  inter- 
esting dream  which  she  had  the  preceding 
night.     It  was,  in  brief,  as  follows: 


FULFILMENT  73 

She  seemed  to  be  approaching  a  large  dark 
tunnel.  At  its  entrance,  appearing  from  the 
inside,  stood  a  man  who  waved  his  hand  at 
her  with  a  motion  which  seemed  to  say: 
"  Keep  back,  do  no  enter  this  tunnel."  She 
related  her  dream  early  the  next  morning  to 
members  of  her  family,  remarking  as  she  did 
so  that  the  hand  looked  like  Dr.  Hodgson's 
hand  and  its  peculiar  motion  was  like  his.  It 
was  not  until  after  she  had  told  her  dream  that 
the  morning  paper  containing  the  news  of  the 
death  was  laid  upon  her  bed.  Of  course  I 
was  ready  at  once  with  my  own  interpretation 
of  the  dream,  which  seemed  to  me  a  most  sig- 
nificant one,  namely,  that  Dr.  Hodgson's  first 
thought,  on  finding  that  he  had  himself 
traversed  the  dark  passage  leading  from  this 
world  to  the  other,  was  to  turn  back  to  impress 
upon  her  the  importance  of  the  fact  that  her 
time  had  not  yet  come,  that  her  work  was  not 
yet  finished. 

I  took  down  the  dream  at  her  dictation  and 
afterwards  secured  its  corroboration  by  her 
daughters.  I  handed  this  record  in  to  the 
authorities,  but  have  never  seen  or  heard  of  any 
reference  to  the  dream  since  that  time.  My 
own  interpretation  of  it,  however,  certainly 
harmonizes  with  a  message  which  purported  to 
come  for  Mrs.  Piper  from  Dr.  Hodgson  him- 
self later  in  that  winter  at  one  of  my  own  sit- 
tings ;  for,  strange  as  it  may  seem,  though  many 


74     BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

messages  come  through  her,  seldom  one  comes 
for  her.     He  said: 

"  Will  you  give  my  love  to  Mrs.  Piper  and 
tell  her  that  I  wish  her  to  cling  to  the  rigging, 
and  tell  her  to  go  on  unceasingly,  untiringly, 
and  everything  will  win  out." 

I  attended  Dr.  Hodgson's  funeral  on  Dec. 
23>  I9°5*  On  Jan.  I,  1906,  eight  days  later, 
when  passing  out  of  my  house  in  the  morning 
and  glancing  at  the  accustomed  place  for  my 
mail,  what  was  my  astonishment  at  seeing  an 
envelope  addressed  to  myself  in  the  familiar 
and  peculiar  handwriting  of  Dr.  Hodgson.  It 
startled  even  me  a  little,  to  whom  life  and 
death  have  become  the  same.  The  envelope 
contained  his  Christmas  card.  He  had  for 
some  years  been  in  the  habit  of  sending  to  his 
friends,  at  Christmas,  cards  with  a  few  lines  or 
a  stanza  of  poetry  printed  thereon,  an  accom- 
paniment to  his  good  wishes  for  the  season.  I 
learned  later  that  the  envelopes  were  found  all 
addressed,  ready  for  the  Christmas  mail,  and 
about  ten  days  after  his  death  his  executors  had 
them  mailed.  This  particular  selection,  lines 
from  Tennyson,  was  so  appropriate  to  the  oc- 
casion and  the  circumstances  that  I  will  insert 
it  here: 

Let  be  thy  wail,  and  help  thy  fellow-men, 
And  make  thy  gold  thy  vassal,  not  thy  king, 
And  fling  free  alms  into  the  beggar's  bowl, 
And  send  the  day  into  the  darken'd  heart; 


FULFILMENT  75 

Nor  list  for  guerdon  in  the  voice  of  men, 
A  dying  echo  from  a  falling  wall; 

******* 

And  lay  thine  uphill  shoulder  to  the  wheel, 
And  climb  the  Mount  of  Blessing,  whence,  if 

thou 
Look   higher,    then  —  perchance  —  thou    mayest 

—  beyond 
A  hundred  ever-rising  mountain  lines, 
And  past  the  range  of  Night  and  Shadow  —  see 
The  high-heaven  dawn  of  more  than  mortal  day 
Strike  on  the  Mount  of  Vision! 

Surely  a  call  to  duty  if  ever  there  were  one, 
a  clarion  call  from  the  Mount  of  Vision  itself, 
which  he  had  already  climbed. 

Dr.  Hodgson  occupied  an  unique  position  in 
Boston  in  relation  to  other  people  who  were 
interested  in  psychical  research,  and  especially 
to  those  who  had  access  to  Mrs.  Piper.  He 
was  the  centre  of  a  group.  He  was  the  centre 
of  a  circle.  Each  member  of  the  circle  placed 
in  him  the  utmost  confidence,  a  trust  he  was 
never  known  to  betray  Yet,  while  his  ac- 
quaintance extended  to  all,  there  was  not  a  gen- 
eral acquaintance  among  the  members  of  the 
group.  They  formed  a  sort  of  chain  to  which 
his  relation  was  the  connecting  link.  But 
when  he  fell,  a  half-dozen  or  more  sitters  im- 
mediately joined  hands  to  see  to  it  that  the 
chain  should  not  entirely  fall  apart;  to  see  that 
all  papers  and  reports  confidentially  placed  in 


76     BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

his  keeping  should  be  properly  safeguarded; 
and,  perhaps  more  important  than  all  else,  to 
see  that  the  "  Light,"  so  called,  should  be  care- 
fully watched  and  that  opportunities  for 
further  experiment  should  if  possible  be  offer- 
ed, now  that  he  was  on  the  Other  Side  instead 
of  on  this. 

I  discovered  then  that  there  were  at  least 
a  few  people  who,  while  recognizing  fully  the 
scientific  importance  of  this  work,  had  at  the 
same  time  received  from  the  Other  Side  of  the 
Veil  a  spiritual  uplifting  which  meant  almost 
their  salvation. 

To  return  to  my  sitting  of  Dec.  20  of  this 
same  year  (1905),  a  date  which  marks  an 
epoch  in  the  annals  of  psychical  research  in  this 
country.  While  conversing  with  my  communi- 
cator I  remarked  that  I  would  like  to  tell  the 
gentleman  at  the  head  of  the  state  department 
in  which  I  was  employed  something  about  my 
private  work.  I  thought  it  was  due  him  to  be 
told  something  about  the  nature  of  the  outside 
matters  which  occasionally  took  me  away  from 
my  post,  that  it  was  no  more  than  courtesy  on 
my  part  to  inform  him.  Moreover,  I  took 
him  to  be  a  man  who  would  not  allow  himself 
to  be  prejudiced  against  the  subject,  whether 
familiar  with  it  or  not,  and  who  might  even 
take  an  interest  it  it.     The  reply  was: 

II  It  would  be  a  little  unwise  at  the  present 
time,     ...     it  might  weaken  his   respect 


FULFILMENT  77 

for  you  along  the  intellectual  lines, 
but  there  is  a  time  for  everything,  and  the 
truth  will  bear  its  weight  and  it  will  work  its 
way  through  all  the  dark  clouds  and  win  its 
way  into  the  light,  and  leave  this  to  time,  and 
the  time  will  present  itself  when  you  can  speak 
openly  on  the  question  and  not  be  considered  in- 
ferior intellectually,  and  that  is  what  I  do  not 
wish.  I  am  determined  that  you  shall  be  re- 
spected." 

These  remarks,  unimportant  though  they 
may  seem,  turned  out  very  shortly  to  be  truly 
prophetic  in  their  nature.  Dr.  Hodgson  died 
on  the  evening  of  that  very  day.  I  did  not 
know  of  the  death  until  some  time  the  follow- 
ing day.  At  the  very  first  sitting  which  took 
place  after  the  death,  given  to  a  gentleman  who 
had  been  a  close  friend  of  Dr.  Hodgson's 
and  familiar  with  his  work  for  years,  the 
trance  personalities  mentioned  the  names  of 
various  persons  who,  in  the  emergency  which 
had  arisen,  could  be  of  service  in  what  they 
call  "  their  work,"  and  my  name  was  one  of 
the  number.  My  assistance,  however,  was  not 
actually  requested  by  those  in  charge  on  this 
side  until  about  two  months  later. 

It  must  be  remembered  by  the  uninitiated 
that  the  more  highly  developed  the  psychic  and 
the  deeper  the  trance  into  which  she  passes,  the 
more  delicate,  apparently,  are  the  conditions 
pertaining  to  that  state,  and  the  greater  the 


78     BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

watchfulness  required  on  the  part  of  the  sitter. 
And  in  this  particular  case  the  spirit  controls 
are  somewhat  autocratic.  They  will  have  this 
and  they  will  not  have  that.  They  will  allow 
this  person  and  they  will  not  allow  that  person. 
It  is  wholly  against  their  wishes,  for  reasons 
probably  still  best  known  to  themselves,  that 
strangers  should  be  introduced  without  their 
express  consent.  And  sometimes  they  say  in 
as  many  words  that  if  their  wishes  in  certain 
matters  are  not  complied  with  they  will  "  re- 
fuse to  come,"  which  evidently  means  that  Mrs. 
Piper  would  not  be  able  to  go  into  the  trance 
state  at  her  pleasure  and  there  would  be  no 
sitting.  The  control  of  affairs  is  practically 
from  the  Other  Side,  however  much  we  may 
like  to  ignore  the  fact. 

About  this  time,  two  months  after  the  death, 
some  one  in  authority  on  this  side,  on  his  own 
initiative,  consulted  with  the  governor  of  the 
commonwealth  and  the  chief  of  the  department 
where  I  was  engaged  —  by  name  Dr.  Austin 
Peters  —  and  I  was  briefly  informed  that  I 
might  absent  myself  on  occasional  days  for  the 
special  purpose  of  assisting  in  the  Piper  work, 
provided  that  my  absence  was  "  not  detrimen- 
tal to  the  public  service,"  and  provided,  also, 
that  time  thus  taken  should  be  charged  against 
the  vacation  days  of  the  year  which  were  due 
me.  I  found  that  Dr.  Peters,  while  unfamiliar 
with  psychial  research  as  such,  recognized  the 


FULFILMENT  79 

importance  of  any  work  done  in  the  name  of 
science.  During  the  remainder  of  the  season, 
therefore,  I  was  present  at  many  of  the  sittings 
and  assisted  in  keeping  the  records. 

The  subject  having  been  brought  to  my  at- 
tention in  the  manner  explained,  instead  of  my 
being  obliged  to  bring  it  to  the  attention  of 
others,  and  my  pathway  thus  made  easy,  was 
all  the  fulfilment  that  I  desired  of  the  pro- 
phetic words  uttered  through  the  trance  two 
months  previously. 

It  appears,  then,  that  respect  for  psychical 
research  still  depends  somewhat  —  at  least  in 
an  opinion  expressed  from  the  Other  Side  — 
upon  whether  the  work  be  initiated  and  back- 
ed by  some  one  high  in  social  standing  or  offi- 
cial life,  or  whether  it  be  pursued  by  some  one 
lower  down  in  the  scale  of  position.  But  let 
us  be  thankful  that  search  in  this  interesting 
and  important  field  has  at  last  become  respect- 
able, no  matter  by  whom  it  has  been  made  so. 

During  the  winter  of  1906-7  Mrs.  Piper 
was  in  England  giving  sittings  under  the 
auspices  of  the  English  S.  P.  R.  at  its  rooms 
in  London.  [See  Proc.  Part  LVII,  Vol. 
XXII,  October,  1908.]  The  winter  of 
1907-8  she  spent  in  Boston.  I  was  called 
early  in  the  season  for  a  sitting.  My  com- 
municator appears,  tells  me  that  "  delays  are 
dangerous,"  and  that  he  wishes  me  to  lose  no 
time  in  the  gathering  together  of  my  scattered 
papers  in  preparation  for  publication. 


IX 

FAITH 

I  do  not  like  the  word  "  belief  "  as  it  is  com- 
monly used,  and  I  have  tried  to  extirpate  it 
from  my  vocabulary;  not,  however,  with  per- 
fect success.  When  a  person  puts  the  direct 
question  to  me,  "  Do  you  believe  such  and  such 
a  thing,"  and  expects  me  to  answer  yes  or  no, 
I  feel  that  by  answering  "  yes  "  I  am  com- 
mitting myself  to  a  state  of  mind  so  positive 
that  it  shuts  out  further  light  on  the  point  in 
question.  Many  times  I  have  answered :  "  I 
neither  believe  nor  disbelieve;  I  think  it 
is  so,  but  do  not  know."  For  that  is 
what  the  word  means,  an  acceptance  of  an 
opinion  or  a  fact  without  personal  knowl- 
edge of  its  truth.  The  word  is  associated 
in  my  mind  with  an  ignorant  assent,  and 
after  throwing  away  dogmatic  belief  in 
early  years  I  have  tried  to  keep  my  mind 
open  for  whatever  of  new  there  might  come 
into  it,  and  not  make  hasty  judgments.  I  want 
to  know  things.  Some  things  I  do  know  and 
can  prove  their  truth  to  others.  Many  other 
things  are  for  me  practically  true,  though  I 
can  not  prove  their  truth  to  others.  They 
appear  to  me  to  be  true,  and  the  appearance  is 
so  strong  that  it  practically  amounts  to  a  belief, 
80 


FAITH  8 1 

so  that  I  can  hardly  dispense  with  the  word 
after  all.  But  to  believe  a  thing  without  any 
knowledge  at  all,  either  the  knowledge  that 
comes  from  a  clear  inner  light  or  an  outward 
experience,  is  something  that  is  contrary  to  my 
nature,  and  when  I  am  expected  to  answer  yes 
or  no  to  a  direct  question  about  belief,  I  want 
to  have  some  idea  of  what  the  person  who  puts 
the  question  means  by  the  word. 

The  expression  "  inner  light  "  has  no  mean- 
ing for  many  people,  but  for  some  it  has  a  very 
great  significance.  Inner  light  sometimes 
makes  a  truth  so  clear,  to  the  person  possessing 
the  light,  that  it  is  impossible  for  him  not  to 
believe  it  even  before  outward  experience  has 
confirmed  it,  and  though  all  the  world  may  for 
the  moment  say  "  you  are  wrong." 

During  the  larger  portion  of  the  first  busy 
decade  of  which  I  have  spoken,  after  swing- 
ing onto  a  ground  of  no  definite  religious  belief 
of  any  kind,  I,  too,  was  privileged  to  sit  under 
the  liberalizing,  optimistic  and  truly  spiritual 
teaching  of  the  Rev.  Minot  J.  Savage,  then 
occupying  a  pulpit  in  Boston.  The  seeming 
deadness  to  me  of  everything  outside  of  the 
senses  was  gradually  lessening,  and  a  new  kind 
of  faith  in  a  future  life  was  budding;  not  one 
which  had  been  handed  down  to  me  from  my 
ancestors,  but  one  which  was  destined  in  time 
to  become  more  real,  and  my  experiences  in 
Spiritism,  so  called,  probably  helped  on  con- 


82      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

siderably  the  growth  of  this  new  faith.  I 
would  not  give  the  impression  that  from  the 
very  beginning  I  actually  believed  in  all  that 
purported  to  come  from  the  spirit  world,  but 
with  long  continued  experience,  and  a  fidelity 
on  the  part  of  friends  on  the  Other  Side  which 
seems  never  to  fail,  conviction  grows,  it  fastens 
itself  upon  one  and  cannot  be  shaken  off. 

Belief  in  a  future  life  is,  as  William  James 
puts  it,  "  largely  a  matter  of  personal  feeling." 
It  is,  I  think,  a  matter  of  individual  apprehen- 
sion and  appropriation,  based  partly  upon  ex- 
perience in  what  purports  to  be  communion  of 
some  sort  with  the  so-called  dead,  and  partly 
upon  an  indefinable  quality  of  the  soul  which  is 
able  to  appropriate  from  the  Vastness  outside 
of  itself,  a  quality  variable  in  its  potency  in 
different  individuals  and  which  one  person  can- 
not impart  to  another.  I  might  offer  page 
after  page  of  communications,  yet  they  would 
never  mean  to  one  who  sees  them  only  in  the 
cold  type  what  they  mean  to  me.  Personal 
experience  of  this  kind,  therefore,  may  be  a 
very  large  factor  in  the  gradual  growth  of  be- 
lief, yet  not  the  only  factor  and  perhaps  not 
the  most  important.  The  layman  who  is  eager 
and  thirsting  for  the  truth  cannot  wait  for 
the  dictum  of  Science,  and  if  to  him  truth  is 
revealed  in  some  surer  and  quicker  way  than 
by  the  slow  process  of  scientific  experimenta- 
tion, no  one  may  easily  rob  him  of  the  personal 


FAITH  83 

satisfaction  which  he  derives  from  such  revela- 
tion. 

As  one  after  another  of  my  friends  have 
gone  to  the  spirit  world  they  have  in  turn 
become  such  a  vital  part  of  my  every-day  con- 
sciousness that  I  think  about  them  and  speak 
of  them  as  if  they  were  still  actually  in  my 
circle  of  acquaintance  and  only  temporarily  out 
of  my  sight.  I  believe  that  I  do  converse 
with  them,  perhaps  not  in  the  "  fullness  of 
their  personality,"  or  the  "  same  fullness  of 
clear  consciousness  that  they  exhibited  during 
life,"  but  that  I  do  converse  with  them;  that 
there  is,  not  always,  but  on  many  occasions, 
a  clear  and  distinct  understanding  between  me 
and  my  communicator,  and  a  sense  of  grati- 
fication on  my  part  as  of  having  met  and  ex- 
changed greetings  with  some  dear  old  friend. 
I  do  not  think,  however,  that  if  I  had  not  had 
opportunity  with  some  of  the  most  gifted  and 
highly  developed  psychics  I  should  ever  have 
become  possessed  of  so  strong  a  sense  of  re- 
ality and  gratification.  This  I  say  with  the 
greatest  respect  for  those  who  possess  the 
psychic  gift  in  a  lesser  degree. 

It  was  not  until  the  passing  of  the  friend 
who  went  last  to  the  spirit  world  that  I  seemed 
somehow  to  come  into  the  blessedness  of  think- 
ing mostly  about  life  and  excluding  death  al- 
together from  my  thoughts,  of  feeling  life  in 
the  air  which  I  breathe,  the  sky  which  I  look 


84     BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

at,  the  sun  which  shines  upon  me,  and  the 
darkness  which  shrouds  and  rests  me;  in  fact, 
life  and  intelligence  everywhere.  And  the 
wonderful  thing  about  thus  "  coming  into  uni- 
versal consciousness,"  as  it  is  called,  is  that 
it  takes  away  morbid  over-anxiety  to  under- 
stand the  whole  scheme  of  creation  or  nothing, 
it  brings  back  the  natural  charm  of  things 
which  we  felt  in  our  childhood,  it  puts  a  new 
meaning  into  our  common  every-day  life,  and 
makes  it  worth  while  to  endeavor  to  make  of 
it  a  "  thing  of  beauty,"  a  "  thing  of  power." 

I  do  not  wish  to  be  understood  as  uttering 
any  final  word  on  the  subject  of  prophecy,  or 
as  really  offering  any  explanation  at  all.  That 
must  be  left  to  the  psychologist  and  the  sci- 
entist. Nor  do  I  wish  any  one  to  place  any 
reliance  whatever  on  predictions  made  by 
psychics  from  anything  I  may  say.  However 
important  the  subject  of  prophecy  may  be,  the 
predictions  themselves  form  a  small  part  of 
the  mass  and  the  worth  of  the  communications 
that  come  through  Mrs.  Piper.  But  I  offer 
my  personal  experience,  and  if  read  aright  I 
think  it  will  show  that  the  counsel  given  by 
Imperator  and  his  group,  as  it  affects  an  indi- 
vidual life  and  the  spiritual  significance  of  in- 
dividual life-work,  is  far-seeing  and  wise, 
piercing  not  merely  through  a  few  years,  but 
even  through  death  itself. 

In  1 90 1,  four  years  before  the  death  of  Dr. 


FAITH  85 

Richard  Hodgson,  I  communicated  with  him 
asking  if  he  would  kindly  give  me  some  in- 
formation on  the  matter  of  the  failure  or  the 
fulfilment  of  prophecy  as  it  had  come  under 
his  observation.  He  replied  promptly  and  at 
length.  At  the  close  of  the  letter  in  which 
he  discussed  it  fully  for  my  benefit,  he  gave  ex- 
pression to  his  own  belief  in  the  reality  of  the 
trance  personalities  in  language  so  emphatic 
and  so  beautiful  that  I  cannot  refrain  from 
quoting  it  here.  After  his  death  copies  of 
this  letter  were  circulated  among  some  of  his 
most  intimate  friends,  none  of  whom  had  seen 
anything  quite  like  it  written  by  him,  and  this 
particular  passage,  or  rather  the  latter  part 
of  it,  came  to  be  known  among  these  friends 
as  his  "  confession  of  faith."  1 

The  passage  in  question  has  not  been  in 
every  instance  quite  accurately  quoted,  possibly 
owing  to  my  own  misinterpretation  of  it  orig- 
inally, and  then  to  its  getting  into  print  with- 
out my  having  opportunity  to  correct  it.     I 

1  This  has  already  been  published,  with  my  permission, 
privately  at  first,  being  included  in  a  paper  read  at  the 
annual  meeting  of  the  Tavern  Club  of  Boston  on  May 
6,   1906,  by  M.  A.  DeWolfe  Howe,  and  later  copied. 

Those  who  are  interested  are  referred  to  a  memorial 
of  Richard  Hodgson  by  Dr.  James  H.  Hyslop,  Journal  of 
the  American  Society  for  Psychical  Research,  Vol.  I, 
January,  1907;  and  to  memorials  by  Mrs.  Henry  Sidg- 
Wtck  and  J.  G.  Piddington,  in  Proceedings  of  the  English 
Society  for  Psychical  Research,  Part  LII,  Vol.  XIX. 
February,  1907,  in  which  the  paper  by  Mr.  Howe,  above 
mentioned,  is  also  included. 


86     BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

am  therefore  tempted  to  give  it  here  in  Dr. 
Hodgson's  own  peculiar  chirography,  which 
will  be  recognized  by  his  many  friends  to 
whom  his  handwriting  is  familiar. 

TRANSCRIPTION 

November  24,  1901. 
Dear  Miss  Robe-ins:     I  should  have  replied  to 
yours  of  17  earlier,  but  could  not  find  any  copy  of 
the  notes  which  I  now  enclose  in  T  sheets. 

******* 

But  apart  from  all  this  we  must  remember  that 
nothing  can  be  regarded  as  infallible,  and  I  tried  to 
put  my  general  view  about  this  in  the  notes  a  copy 
of  which  I  enclose.  About  what  Imperator  and  his 
group  are  in  their  world  I  have  no  doubt.  They 
have  done  for  me  and  for  some  others  also, —  more 
than  everything,  but  the  final  written  or  spoken  re- 
sults through  Mrs.  P.'s  inadequate  organism  sur- 
rounded by  our  earthly  make-ups  generally  can  only 
afford  us  faint  glimpses  of  the  great  holies  from 
which  they  take  their  origin.  We  cannot  pray  too 
much  to  do  and  suffer  the  will  of  God,  whatever  it 
be.  I  went  through  toils  and  turmoils  and  perplexi- 
ties in  '97  and  '98  about  the  significance  of  this  whole 
Imperator  regime,  but  I  have  seemed  to  get  on  a 
rock  after  that, —  I  seem  to  understand  clearly  the 
reasons  for  incoherence  and  obscurity,  etc.,  and  I  think 
that  if  for  the  rest  of  my  life  from  now  I  should 
never  see  another  trance  or  have  another  word  from 
Imperator  or  his  group, —  it  would  make  no  differ- 
ence to  my  knowledge  that  all  is  well,  that  Impera- 


i 


-j    mi    1 1 » i ^ i 


^>/    .►  *  V   ^ 


y. 


WJ- 


^ ' 


.1 


if  lift 


y 


86       ROTR    QTTM7C 


FAITH  87 

tor,  etc.,  are  all  they  claim  to  be  and  are  indeed  mes- 
sengers that  we  may  call  divine.  Be  of  good  courage 
whatever  happens,  and  pray  continually,  and  let  peace 
come  into  your  soul.  Why  should  you  be  distraught 
and  worried?  Everything,  absolutely  everything, — 
from  a  spot  of  ink  to  all  the  stars,  every  faintest 
thought  we  think  up  to  the  contemplations  of  the 
highest  intelligences  in  the  cosmos,  are  all  in  and 
part  of  the  infinite  Goodness.  Rest  in  that  Divine 
Love.  All  your  trials  are  known  better  than  you 
know  them  yourself.  Do  you  think  it  is  an  idle 
word  that  the  hairs  of  our  heads  are  numbered? 
Have  no  dismay,  fear  nothing  and  trust  in  God. 
Yours  sincerely, 

R.  Hodgson. 

I  give  also  extracts  from  a  second  letter  in 
reply  to  my  acknowledgment  of  the  above. 

TRANSCRIPTION 

Boston,  Mass.,  December  1,  1901. 

Dear  Miss  Robbins:  Just  a  word  or  two  in 
reply  to  your  kind  letter  of  November  27.  Thanks 
for  T  document  returned. 

Of  course  we  get  misrepresented  and  misunder- 
stood in  all  sorts  of  ways.  In  the  old  years  when 
I  was  prominent  in  exposing  fraudulent  mediums, 
Spiritualists  generally  used  to  revile  me  as  a  gross 
materialistic  skeptic  who  had  no  other  object  but  the 
persistent  determination  to  disprove  Spiritualism. 
Nothing  could  have  been  further  from  the  truth  even 


88      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

then.  And  now,  as  you  rightly  say,  in  recent  years, 
with  the  Imperator  regime,  another  influence  has 
come  which  I  trust,  even  to  the  end  and  after, — 
with  all  my  darkness  and  weakness  and  blunderings 
and  brutencsses, —  I  shall  not  escape,  which  I  trust 
will  abide  with  me  ever,  for  it  is  law  and  love  and 
peace  and  freedom  and  joy  and  God. 
Yours  ever, 

Richard  Hodgson. 

These  letters  speak  for  themselves  and  need 
no  comment  from  me. 

Let  me  say  once  more  that  I  have  been  re- 
peatedly and  continually  urged  by  those  on 
the  Other  Side  of  the  Veil,  since  1900,  and 
more  especially  since  1902,  to  offer  to  others 
something  of  my  experience  and  something  of 
the  comfort  which  I  myself  have  received. 


And  the  End  is  Not  Yet.     September,  igog. 


AMERICAN      BRANCH 


Society  for  psychical  Research. 


RICHARD  HODGSON,  11.  D., 


SBoston,  Mass.:       £2^  /     /A/ 


PART  II 


COMMUNICATIONS       FROM       THE 

OTHER  SIDE  OF  THE  VEIL 

THROUGH    MRS.    PIPER 


X 

PREFATORY  EXPLANATIONS 

Up  to  the  beginning  of  1906  I  never 
dreamed  that  I  should  arrive  at  the  point  of 
publishing  reports  of  my  own  sittings  with 
Mrs.  Piper.  The  reports  were  not  mine  to 
publish,  as  they  were  all  in  the  hands  of  Dr. 
Hodgson  and  he  held  them  by  right  of  his 
office  as  Secretary  of  the  Society  for  Psychical 
Research.  For  some  years  previous  to  his 
death  the  condition  on  which  most  or  all  of 
the  sittings  were  allowed  was  that  a  report 
of  some  kind  should  be  made  to  him,  every 
sitter,  of  course,  retaining  the  right  to  with- 
hold whatever  was  considered  of  too  intimate 
and  personal  a  character  to  disclose.  He 
himself  accompanied  many  of  the  sitters  and 
made  his  own  records.  It  was  my  habit  to 
make  very  full  reports.  On  my  proposing  on 
one  occasion  to  omit  some  talk  about  my 
health,  which  I  did  not  presume  was  of  in- 
terest to  any  one  but  myself,  he  insisted  that 
I  should  give  him  every  word  that  I  possibly 
could,  saying  that  he  had  been  working  for 
years  to  obtain  verbatim  reports  of  these  sit- 
tings, and  that,  of  the  few  people  whose  com- 
munications came  by  voice,  I  happened  to  be 
the  only  one  who  was  accustomed  to  the  more 

91 


92      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

rapid  reporting.  Therefore  I  gave  him  much 
that  I  would  not  think,  of  allowing  to  be  pub- 
lished, on  the  understanding  between  us  that 
before  he  made  any  use  of  these  records  by 
way  of  publications  of  his  own  there  would 
be  opportunity  for  the  reconsideration  and 
the  withholding  of  certain  portions.  I  gave 
him  these  full  records  for  the  purpose  of  en- 
abling him  as  a  psychologist  to  form  a  better 
judgment  of  the  value  of  a  sitting  as  a  whole. 

He  also  expressed  to  me  his  opinion  that 
in  the  publication  of  records  it  is  better  to 
make  use  of  real  names  as  far  as  possible 
rather  than  pseudonyms,  although  he  recog- 
nized that  there  are  many  considerations  en- 
tering into  the  question,  and  that  this  cannot 
always  or  perhaps  often  be  done. 

The  sudden  death  of  Dr.  Hodgson  altered 
entirely  the  situation  of  affairs.  In  May, 
1906,  the  authorities,  in  issuing  an  announce- 
ment of  the  proposed  dissolution  of  the  Ameri- 
can Branch  of  the  S.  P.  JR.,  made  the  following 
statement: 

"  The  Piper  records,  and  all  documents 
appertaining  thereto,  will  remain  in  charge  of 
the  Council  of  the  Society;  and,  as  promptly 
as  the  labor  involved  in  the  study  of  their  vo- 
luminous and  complicated  contents  will  allow, 
a  full  report  on  the  later  developments  of 
the  Piper  case  up  to  the  date  of  Dr.  Hodgson's 
death  will  be  issued  in  the  Proceedings. 


PREFATORY  EXPLANATIONS      93 

"  After  publication  the  Council  of  the  So- 
ciety will  allow  qualified  and  serious  students 
access  to  the  records;  but  only  on  terms  which 
will  ensure  that  all  private  and  intimate  matter 
contained  in  them  shall  be  handled  with  proper 
discretion  and  reserve,  and  that  all  confidences 
shall  be  respected." 

My  own  reports  were  included,  with  my 
consent,  in  the  mass  of  documents  which  were 
transferred  to  London.  As  I  am  not  now 
publishing  complete  records,  I  make  this  ex- 
planation to  show  that  I  have  made  some 
slight  contribution  to  the  files  of  the  English 
S.  P.  R.,  and  it  is  possible  that  the  person  who 
summarizes  the  contents  of  all  the  documents, 
or  the  "  serious  student  "  who  examines  them, 
may  find  in  my  small  portion  some  good  tests 
or  some  few  points  of  psychological  interest 
which  I  have  not  thought  best  to  reproduce 
in  this  volume,  my  special  object  being  to  offer 
the  running  conversation  rather  than  the  test 
with  its  detailed  explanation  and  corrobora- 
tion. 

The  reports  of  my  sittings  are,  therefore, 
the  property  of  the  S.  P.  R.,  and  I  have  no 
right  to  publish  without  the  permission  of  that 
society.  On  November  7,  1907,  the  Council 
of  that  body  voted  to  give  me  permission  to 
publish  extracts  from  my  own  reports  on  the 
understanding  that  I  should  publish  also  an 
acknowledgment   of   the   permission,   together 


94     BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

with  the  statement  that  the  Council  is  in  no 
way  responsible  for  anything  I  may  say,  and 
I  hereby  absolve  the  Council  of  the  Society 
for  Psychical  Research  from  responsibility  for 
any  and  every  word  which  I  publish. 

At  an  earlier  date,  September  26,  1906,  I 
received  what  purported  to  be  a  communica- 
tion from  Richard  Hodgson  himself,  as  fol- 
lows : 

"  If  you  wish  to  extract  anything  from  those 
reports  you  have  my  consent  to  do  so  and  I 
hope  the  consent  of  the  Council." 

When  scientists  first  undertook  the  study  of 
mediumistic  phenomena  the  particular  test  was 
considered  the  all-important  thing,  and  com- 
paratively little  attention  was  paid  to  anything 
else.  More  recently,  voluminous  and  charac- 
teristic talk  on  the  part  of  a  communicator 
has  been  considered  valuable  and  even  eviden- 
tial in  its  way.  Professor  James  H.  Hyslop 
in  his  work  entitled  "  Science  and  a  Future 
Life  "  [p.  269]  says:  "  What  we  must  have 
is  psychological  phenomena,  and  psychological 
phenomena  of  that  kind  which  represents  the 
systematic  mental  action  natural  to  the  person 
whose  existence  is  in  question." 

Still  more  recently,  even  descriptions  of  life 
on  the  Other  Side  of  the  Veil,  which  of  course 
cannot  stand  at  all  as  positive  proof  of  the 
truth  of  the  matter,  are  being  sought  after, 
and  I  have  been  told  by  a  leading  psychologist 


PREFATORY  EXPLANATIONS     95 

that  when  we  have  a  mass  of  non-evidential 
matter  it  will  sometime  have  a  bearing  on  the 
value  of  what  is  strictly  evidential. 

I  am  not  offering  my  communications  as 
M  evidence  "  in  the  strict  sense  of  that  word. 
I  am  offering  them  simply  for  what  they  are, 
expecting  that  each  reader  of  the  first  portion 
of  this  volume  will  peruse  or  omit  this  portion 
as  he  sees  fit,  and  that  each  one  will  judge  of 
it  for  himself.  I  realize  that  when  I  lock  my- 
self into  an  "  upper  chamber  "  with  one  other 
person  only  and  that  person  goes  into  a  state 
of  unconsciousness  and  talks,  what  I  bring  out 
as  a  record  of  that  talk  must  depend  much 
for  its  value  upon  whatever  reputation  I  my- 
self may  have  for  being  a  truthful  recorder, 
if  I  am  so  fortunate  as  to  have  any. 

It  should  be  understood  that  in  the  latter 
years  nearly  all  the  communications  coming 
through  Mrs.  Piper  are  in  automatic  writing. 
It  is  only  at  an  occasional  sitting  or  only  for 
certain  sitters  that  the  communications  are 
given  through  the  voice.  Many  prefer  the 
automatic  writing,  and  for  the  purpose  of 
scientific  experimentation  it  is  considered,  I  un- 
derstand, more  valuable.  The  writing  that 
is  produced  can  be  preserved  as  the  actual  com- 
munication and  cannot  be  disputed.  How- 
ever, the  writing  itself  is  not  by  any  means 
the  whole  story,  and  in  order  that  it  be  per- 
fectly  intelligible   all    questions    and    remarks 


96     BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

interjected  by  the  sitter  must  also  be  accurately 
recorded.  Nor  is  this  all.  The  story  is  not 
then  complete  unless  one  knows  how  to  make 
notes  of  and  interpret  more  or  less  correctly 
the  various  and  significant  gestures  of  the 
hand,  which  appears  to  be  sensitive  and  alive, 
as  if  an  actual  intelligence  were  seated  in  it. 
Therefore  I  cannot  see  why,  either  at  a  voice 
sitting  or  at  a  writing  sitting,  much  has  not 
to  be  trusted  to  the  person  who  does  the  re- 
cording, although  still  more  perhaps  must  be 
trusted  to  the  person  who  does  the  interpret- 
ing, in  cases  where  recorder  and  interpreter 
do  not  happen  to  be  one. 

I  have  a  great  mass  of  communications  ex- 
tending through  the  years,  and  can  only  pub- 
lish extracts  from  them.  I  have  decided  that 
it  is  best  to  confine  these  extracts  almost  en- 
tirely to  communications  from  one  personality, 
giving  continuous  talk,  which  in  a  voice  sitting 
has  much  fewer  breaks  than  occur  in  the  writ- 
ing. 

There  is  not  in  my  case,  as  exists  in  many 
cases,  any  special  reason  why  I  should  with- 
hold the  identity  of  the  one  who  has  been  my 
special  communicator  of  recent  years,  namely, 
Augustus  Pearl  Martin.  In  fact,  it  is  for  the 
very  reason  that  he  was  widely  known  in  both 
public  and  private  life  in  the  city  of  Boston 
that  I   am  speaking  openly  and   freely,   and 


PREFATORY  EXPLANATIONS      97 

offering  communications  which  purport  to  have 
come  from  him  since  his  passing  out  in  1902. 
I  am  also  desirous  of  making  my  offering  with- 
out further  delay,  and  before  his  strong  per- 
sonality shall  have  become  dim  in  the  memory 
of  his  large  acquaintance.  I  am  hoping 
thereby  to  interest  people  in  my  subject  who 
as  yet  know  little  about  it,  or  who  have  hith- 
erto taken  no  special  interest  in  it. 

I  do  not  consider  that  I  have  any  right  to 
publish  this  name,  however,  against  the  wishes 
or  without  the  express  consent  of  the  nearest 
surviving  relatives.  This  consent  I  have  ob- 
tained, as  will  appear  in  the  following  copy  of 
a  letter  written  by  the  widow  and  endorsed  by 
the  son. 

769  Morton  St.,  Dorchester,  Mass., 

May  10,  1908. 
My  Dear  Miss  Robbins:  I  have  no  objection 
to  your  publishing  the  name  of  my  late  husband  in 
connection  with  your  work  with  Mrs.  Piper,  if  you 
choose  to  do  so.  I  appreciate  the  great  assistance 
you  rendered  him  during  the  last  years  of  his  life, 
and  can  assure  you  that  his  friendly  feeling  for  you 
was  shared  not  only  by  myself  but  by  all  the  mem- 
bers of  my  family.  I  have  known  of  your  long-con- 
tinued interest  in  psychical  research,  and  if  he  were 
here  to-day  I  am  sure  he  would  trust  your  judg- 
ment in  any  matter  of  this  kind.  I  would  prefer 
not  to  have  details  concerning  myself  or  my  family 


98      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

published,  but  otherwise  you  are  at  liberty  to  use  the 
name  as  you  see  fit. 

Yours  sincerely, 

Abbie  F.  Martin. 
I  most  heartily  endorse  the  above. 

Everett  F.  Martin. 

There  have  been  anxious  inquiries  and  lov- 
ing messages  for  members  of  his  own  family, 
but  most  of  these  I  must  omit.  Many  refer- 
ences to  other  persons  also,  friends  and  rela- 
tives of  my  own,  must  be  omitted. 

Where  there  is  a  decided  change  in  the 
subject  of  the  running  talk,  if  it  is  something 
that  must  be  omitted  I  have  indicated  the 
omission  by  dotted  lines.  Omissions  of  single 
words  or  brief  phrases,  which  do  not  in  the  least 
affect  the  sense,  some  of  which  are  made 
merely  to  avoid  repetition,  I  have  not  indicated 
and  must  ask  the  reader  to  place  confidence 
in  the  discretion  I  have  tried  to  exercise  on 
these  points.  Some  personal  references  must 
be  omitted  in  any  case,  and  one  object  for 
adopting  the  method  of  abbreviating  here  indi- 
cated is  to  make  the  record  more  readable. 
The  technical  report  of  the  automatic  writing, 
with  all  its  confusions,  breaks  and  undecipher- 
able scrawls,  is  fascinating  reading  for  the 
student,  but  is  often,  by  reason  of  its  unin- 
telligible technicality,  unattractive  to  the  aver- 
age reader. 


PREFATORY  EXPLANATIONS      99 

Further  than  this  it  is  only  necessary  for 
the  uninitiated  to  remember  that  all  remarks 
enclosed  in  round  brackets  are  my  own.  All 
remarks  enclosed  in  square  brackets  are  not 
a  part  of  the  sitting  but  simply  my  explanatory 
notes.  All  of  the  remainder  of  the  record 
represents  what  is  said  by  the  communicating 
spirit. 

It  hardly  seems  necessary  for  me  to  make 
the  statement  here  and  at  this  late  day  that 
the  possibility  of  Mrs.  Piper's  seeking  infor- 
mation in  a  normal  way  to  give  out  in  her 
trance  was  years  ago  entirely  dropped  from 
the  consideration  of  her  case  by  those  familiar 
with  it.  She  of  course  must  be  more  or  less 
familiar  with  the  names  of  men  who  have  been 
in  the  public  eye.  She  had  only  the  very 
slightest  personal  acquaintance  with  my  com- 
municator when  he  was  living,  never  having 
met  him  more  than  once  or  twice  and  then 
only  casually.  She  has  never  seen  one  of  my 
reports,  nor  had  she  any  idea  up  to  writhin  a  few 
months  of  date  of  publication  that  I  intended 
to  publish,  at  which  time  I  obtained  her  full 
consent  to  publishing  whatever  relates  to  her 
in  this  volume. 


XI 

EXTRACTS  FROM   REPORTS  OF 
SITTINGS 

SITTING    OF    DECEMBER    23,     1903 

Rector  controlling 

Art  thou  here?     Art  thou  present? 

(I  am.) 

In  God's  holy  name  we  greet  thee  this  day 
and  this  hour.  We  sent  for  thee  to  return 
to  us  that  we  might  make  all  clear  to  thee, 
bring  messages  from  those  who  seek  thee  on 
our  side  and  teach  thee  the  divine  and  holy 
will  of  God.     Hearest  thou  me? 

(I  do.  I  am  glad  I  have  not  been  dropped 
from  the  fold.) 

Dropped,  friend?  Not  one  lamb  who 
cometh  unto  us,  who  seeketh  us  in  the  highest, 
who  have  faith  in  God,  will  depart  from  us 
or  will  we  allow  them  to  drift  from  the  fold 
unprotected  or  unguided.  Thy  friends  on 
this  side  hath  sought  thee  often. 

(Friend?) 

Friends.  They  have  sought  thee,  they  have 
called  us  to  seek  thee,  to  find  thee  out,  to  bring 
thee  unto  us  and  unto  them.  Hearest  thou 
me? 

(Yes.) 

100 


REPORTS  OF  Sn  UNO 

Friend,  oh  those  of  little  faith  know  not 
the  workings  of  the  Allwise.  ...  I  am 
Rector,  servant  of  God.  I  bring  to  thee  first 
thy  friend  known  as  Hiram. 

[My  old  friend  of  early  sittings,  who 
passed  away  in  1885,  known  in  old  reports  as 
"  H."  There  was  some  talk  here  which  I 
understood  to  be  by  Hiram  Hart,  but,  while 
in  the  earlier  years  he  talked  very  naturally, 
his  style  being  very  unlike  that  of  Rector,  at 
this  time  the  two  personalities  were  so  much 
alike  that  I  could  not  clearly  distinguish  when 
one  left  off  speaking  and  the  other  began.  It 
appeared  later,  however,  that  Rector  brought 
Hiram  Hart,  and  the  latter  came  to  introduce 
the  friend  who  had  never  before  made  his  ap- 
pearance.    For  he  said:] 

I  am  bringing  another  friend  who  seeks  you, 
who  knows  you  as  you  are.  He  would  speak 
also,  but  the  awakening  of  his  soul  was  the 
most  remarkable  I  have  ever  known.  I  sought 
him  and  found  him.  He  sought  me.  We 
found  each  other.  We  are  together.  We 
clasp  hands,  we  are  friends. 

(Yes.) 

They  call  him  on  our  side  "  General." 

(I  see.) 

I  know  not  his  other  name  so  well,  but  he 
is  known  by  this  and  we  call  him  this,  and  he 
is  happy  but  longs  to  meet  you.  Do  you 
hear? 


102      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

(Yes.) 

Now  here  comes  the  General.  Will  you 
speak  to  him? 

(Oh,  I  should  be  delighted.) 

[What  immediately  follows  I  understood 
to  be  the  first  words  that  came  from  the  later 
acquaintance,  who  passed  out  about  twenty-one 
months  previous  to  date  of  this  sitting.] 

The  General 

I  want  to  see  you.  I  want  everything  to 
be  understood  between  us,  and  until  it  is  I  do 
not  feel  satisfied.  Can't  you  help  me?  Can't 
you  see  the  obstacles  in  my  way? 

[A  few  brief  phrases  only  omitted  here.] 

Can't  you  see  that  God's  will  was  better? 
Oh,  you  are  not  so  weak  as  I  thought  in  your 
belief.  Why  didn't  I  know  better?  Well, 
because  I  was  grappling  with  the  world.  That 
is  it. 

(Is  this  Hiram  talking,  or  is  he  talking  for 
the  General?) 

No,  he  is  talking  for  the  General.  He  is 
quoting  the  General's  words.  You  remember 
the  little  poem, 

Tell  me,  ye  winged  winds 

That  round  my  pathway  roar, 
Do  ye  not  know  some  spot  — 

[Words  not  all  correctly  caught  here,  but 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        103 

these  are  the  first  lines  of  the  verse  he  was  try- 
ing to  quote.] 

You  remember  that? 

(Yet.) 

\  ou  remember, 

Some  lone  and  pleasant  dell, 
Some  valley  in  the  West, 

Where  free  from  toil  and  pain, 
The  weary  soul  may  rest? 

(General,  you  used  to  repeat  a  lot  of  po- 
etry, didn't  you?) 

Oh,  I  forgot, —  yes,  I  did.  I  have  found 
that  peace,  that  rest,  the  beautiful  awakening 
of  the  spirit. 

I  have  longed  for  a  talk,  with  you,  but  I  did 
not  understand  the  conditions. 

(Yes,  I  have  been  only  waiting  patiently 
for  you  to  come.) 

You  have  called  for  me  in  your  spirit.  I 
knew  it  and  felt  it,  but  I  could  not  reach  down 
until  the  conditions  were  arranged  for  it.  Do 
you  know  what  they  all  mean  ?  Perhaps  you 
know  better  than  I  do.  But  these  good 
priests  [who]  opened  the  way,  who  showed 
me  the  Light,  opened  the  door  for  me  and  here 
I  am.  Would  to  God  you  could  see  me  as 
I  am!  I  am  quite  the  man  that  I  was,  only 
my  ideas  are  all  changed.  They  are  more 
now  I  think  in  harmony  with  your  own. 


104      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

Oh,  it  is  beautiful,  it  is  ideal,  just  over  the 
river,  lift  the  Veil  and  you  know  all.  Tell 
me  something  of  yourself. 

But  oh,  why  was  I  so  blind?  It  was  be- 
cause of  the  thickness,  the  thickness  of  the 
flesh. 

(General,  do  you  know  what  I  am  doing?) 

Yes,  I  know  it  well.  Do  you  mean  the  na- 
ture of  the  work,  or  the  private  work? 

(I  mean  this  minute.) 

This  present  minute? 

(Yes.) 

Why,  aren't  you  registering  something? 

(Yes.) 

I  can  see  your  hand  move  and  I  can  see 
your  spirit,  too,  so  plainly,  and  the  spiritual 
hand  guides  the  material  hand,  and  it  seems 
as  though  it  was  registering  something.  Is 
it  what  I  am  saying? 

(Yes.) 

Well,  that  is  natural. 

(Well,  I  guess  so.) 

That  is  natural,  and  how  rapidly  you 
worked  with  that  for  me.  I  shall  never  for- 
get those  days. 

[This  of  course  refers  to  the  eight  years 
of  association  in  public  office,  and  especially 
to  the  first  five,  when  I  reported  hearings,  con- 
ferences, etc.,  at  which  he  presided,  and  also 
wrote  much  at  his  dictation.] 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        105 

And  do  you  remember  the  last  time  I  saw 
you  in  the  body  ? 

(Yes.) 

\ou  remember  what  you  said  to  me?  Do 
you  remember  saying  M  I  think  you  are  get- 
ting better?  " 

(I  think  I  said  that,  that  time.) 

[I  said  this  many  times  to  him  during  his 
illness,  and  probably  said  it  the  last  time  I 
saw  him.] 

Yes,  you  did.  You  were  so  hopeful  and 
you  helped  me  so  much,  but  I  could  not  tell 
you  all  I  felt.     Do  you  hear? 

(Yes.) 

[It  was  generally  understood  among  those 
who  were  near  him  that  my  hope  for  his  re- 
covery was  stronger  than  that  of  any  one  else, 
though  no  one  else  knew  the  ground  for  my 
hope.  Strong  prophetic  statements  had  been 
made  to  me,  regarding  future  work,  etc.,  which 
involved  his  life,  and  which,  it  seemed  to  me 
then,  could  not  possibly  reach  their  fulfilment 
if  he  died.] 

Can't  you  speak  to  me  and  tell  me  some- 
thing of  yourself? 

(I  will  speak  slowly  so  that  I  can  register 
it.) 

["  Register  "  is  a  term  used  from  the  Other 
Side,  which  I  adopted.] 

All  right.      Do  you  remember  coming  to  me 


106     BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

and  telling  me  about  your  belief,  and  do  you 
remember  I  said  I  would  like  to  accept  it,  but 
I  did  not  know,  I  did  not  understand? 

(I  knew  that  was  the  way  you  felt.) 

But  I  felt  that  all  through.  I  could  not 
understand  it.  I  do  now.  What  fools  we 
are !  But  those  few  who  seek  light  and  light 
is  given  them  are  blest,  aren't  they? 

(General,  do  you  remember  the  very  last 
words  that  you  said  to  me?) 

The  last  words  that  I  said  were  —  I  think 
I  said  —  didn't  I  say  I  should  see  you  again 
and  ask  you  to  come  out? 

["  To  come  out  "  is  exactly  the  right  ex- 
pression. His  home  was  in  the  suburbs  of 
Boston,  about  six  miles  from  the  centre.] 

(Well,  you  expected  me  out  the  next  day.) 

Oh,  I  said  good  bye  to  you.  I  said  "  good 
bye,  come  to-morrow,"  "  I  shall  see  you  to- 
morrow," or  something  —  I  can't  remember 
the  exact  words,  but  that  is  the  idea.  What 
were  they? 

(The  very  last  words  that  you  said  were 
"  good  night."  You  said  that  just  as  [nat- 
urally] as  though  you  were  perfectly  well.) 

Yes,  I  remember  saying  good  bye  to  you. 
I  remember  thinking,  looking  forward  to  see 
you  again.  Then  what  was  the  next  thing? 
Then  I  passed  over  — 

(Yes.) 

—  between  that  time  and  the  time  you  — 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        107 

did  not  come  again.  Tell  me  a  little  about  that. 
That  may  help  me  to  come. 

(Do  you  remember  you  used  to  sit  in  a 
chair?) 

Oh,  yes.  I  remember  one  thing,  I  remem- 
ber sitting  with  a  blanket  over  my  knees,  over 
my  body. 

[He  sat  that  way  nearly  all  the  time  day 
and  night  for  a  year,  not  being  able  to  lie 
down  during  the  greater  part  of  his  illness, 
and  he  was  rarely  without  a  blanket  over  his 
knees,  even  in  the  warmest  weather.] 

[There  is  a  little  further  talk  here  about 
the  conditions  of  his  illness.] 

(General,  do  you  remember — ) 

How  far  away  are  you  now  from  here? 
You  seem  quite  a  little  distance  away. 

[I  had  not  been  quite  close  to  the  psychic. 
I  moved  a  little  nearer  and  put  my  hand  on 
her  shoulder.] 

(My  hand  is  on  the  medium's  shoulder.) 

I  suppose  it  is  because  the  flesh  divides  us. 

(Do  you  remember  that  I  used  to  bring 
messages  through  this  same  channel?) 

Oh,  I  remember  there  was  a  friend  of  yours, 
a  lady  in  the  body  —  now  who  was  she?  I 
can't  think  what  her  name  was,  but  she  lived 
somewhere  in  some  other  town,  and  you  used 
to  go  and  see  her  and  then  come  and  bring 
me  messages  from  the  priests  who  are  helping 
me  now.     But  I  can't  remember  who  she  was, 


108      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

but  I  remember  the  messages  perfectly,  the 
nature  of  the  messages,  and  they  really  helped 
me.  They  gave  me  great  encouragement,  and 
that  is  all  I  needed,  was  encouragement,  until 
time  helped  me  over. 

[Arlington  Heights,  where  Mrs.  Piper  then 
lived,  is  about  eight  miles  from  Boston  centre 
in  an  opposite  direction  from  where  his  home 
was.] 

What  was  you  going  to  say  about  the  mes- 
sages? Oh  I  wish  you  knew  how  I  felt,  how 
light  I  am,  how  I  can  see,  how  I  can  read  and 
how  I  can  move  about,  how  free  I  am  from 
encumbrance,  how  clear  my  mind  is,  how 
really  supremely  happy  I  am.  You  would  be 
delighted  for  my  sake. 

(I  never  wanted  to  call  you  back.) 

Good!  You  knew  too  well  how  I  suffered. 
But  tell  me  about  the  children.  I  would  like 
to  know  a  little  something  about  the  children. 

[There  is  quite  a  little  conversation  here 
about  members  of  his  own  family  about  whom 
he  seemed  eager  to  hear,  and  he  asked  if  I 
had  been  out  to  his  home  since  he  passed 
away.] 

[About  six  months  after  the  General  died 
a  grandson  about  two  years  of  age,  who  was 
named  for  him,  passed  away.  Another  grand- 
son was  born  on  Dec.  16,  1903,  just  a  week 
previous  to  date  of  the  present  sitting.  I 
knew  only  of  the  fact,  did  not  know  what  the 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        109 

child  was  named,  or  whether  it  was  named 
at  all.  But  in  giving  him  information  about 
the  family  into  which  this  child  was  born,  I 
say,  referring  to  the  father  of  the  child:] 

(And  he  has  got  a  new  baby.  Did  you 
know  that?) 

Yes,  the  little  one  I  knew  about. 
It  is  just  the  little  details  of  the  material  life 
which  I  cannot  grasp  and  [in]  which  I  long 
to  have  you  help  me,  but  the  actual  life,  and 
the  actual  life  of  the  children,  and  all  that, 
is  well  known  to  me,  but  the  details  of  the 
material  life  I  cannot  see. 

(Do  you  remember  little  Augustus?) 

Oh,  yes.     Tell  me  about  him. 

(Do  you  know  where  he  is?) 

Well,  I  know  about  the  little  one  that  came 
over.  I  know  him.  He  is  with  me  and  we 
are  very  happy  together.  But  didn't  he  name 
the  other  — 

(I  don't  know  what  he  has  named  him 
yet.) 

Hasn't  he  called  him  Augustus?  He  has, 
I  am  sure,  one  of  the  two  names.  But  his 
first  one  is  with  me. 

(Now  I  don't  know  whether  he  has  named 
him  Augustus  or  not  — ) 

Well,  he  has. 

( — so  that  will  be  a  good  test  for  me.) 

That  is  one  of  his  names. 

(I  will  find  out  about  it.) 


no     BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

And  sometime  you  can  speak  with  me  about 
it,  but  meanwhile  I  know  it  is  true.  But  the 
little  fellow  followed  me  very  soon,  didn't 
he? 

(Yes.) 

I  knew,  and  I  was  so  glad  to  have  him  come, 
and  he  is  better  off  here,  much  better  off.  In 
fact,  it  is  all  right.  I  have  no  words  of  com- 
plaint to  offer. 

[I  ascertained  afterwards  that  the  new  baby 
was  named  William  Everett,  but  his  mother 
told  me  that  they  called  him  Augustus  nearly 
all  the  time.  He  seemed  to  take  the  place  of 
the  little  Augustus  whom  they  lost.] 

Are  you  getting  along  all  right  in  the  world  ? 

[I  do  not  reply  immediately.] 

(You  know  I  want  to  take  this  all  down, 
and  that  is  why  I  am  a  little  slow.) 

Oh,  I  see.  Well,  don't  hurry.  There  is 
no  hurry  in  this  world.  I  see  a  light  burn- 
ing, and  at  the  end  of  that  light  I  am  talking, 
and  when  the  light  begins  to  go  out,  of  course 
I  must  go.  That  is,  I  can't  talk  with  you, 
but  I  shall  be  with  you  just  the  same  and  you 
will  be  conscious  of  it.  Are  you  getting  along 
as  well  as  when  I  was  with  you  ? 

(Oh,  about  as  well.) 

Do  you  have  to  work  hard? 

(Well,  I  have  to  work  every  day.) 

But  not  any  harder? 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        in 

(No.) 

I  am  glad.  I  would  like  to  see  you  a  little 
free  for  a  few  hours  in  what  we  used  to  call 
day,  and  have  a  little  leisure  for  rest  and  read- 
ing up  on  subjects  concerning  the  advance- 
ments of  a  higher  life,  and  it  would  be  so  much 
better  if  you  could,  so  much  more  helpful. 
And  yet  the  body  has  to  be  fed,  I  know.  It 
has  to  be  clothed.  I  know  that  and  don't  for- 
get those  things  in  my  experience,  but  still 
there  is  a  great  deal  beside  that.  That  is 
nothing,  that  is  only  the  covering. 

(Well,  I  have  been  told  that  I  should  be 
free  some  time,  but  I  do  not  see  much  pros- 
pect of  it  now.) 

Yes,  I  do.  I  see  all  round  you  light,  which 
indicates  more  rest,  less  hard  work,  and  that 
is  the  reason  why  I  spoke  to  you, —  if  it  was 
not  very  near  you.  It  must  be,  I  can  see  it  so 
plainly. 

Will  you  tell  me  now  if  you  are  really  hav- 
ing any  rest? 

(A  little  in  the  evening,  that  is  all.) 

Work  all  day? 

(Yes.) 

Isn't  it  daytime  with  you  now? 

(I  got  off.     I  got  excused.) 

But  that  is  something  new  for  you. 

(Well,  I  managed  it.) 


ii2      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

I  mean,  it  isn't  a  thing  that  you  —  you  used 
to  stick  pretty  well. 

(I  would  not  get  off  for  anything  but  you, 
to  come  and  see  you.  I  would  give  up  every- 
thing for  that.) 

Oh,   yes.     Are  you  really  physically  well? 

(I  am  quite  well,  and  trying  to  be  very 
well.) 

[I  mention  some  slight  physical  ailment.] 

Well,  don't  you  know  you  must  be  out  in 
the  air  a  great  deal.  You  must  go  what  we 
used  to  call  walking,  and  be  out  in  the  air  a 
great  deal,  too.  You  can  get  out.  Don't 
confine  yourself  to  the  four  walls  of  your  room. 
Now  that  is  my  advice.  Can't  you  go  up  to 
the  library?  You  remember  the  library.  Go 
up  there  and  get  a  little  reading  matter.  Take 
the  walk  to  and  fro.  Go  back  and  read  a 
little,  take  in  a  little  study.  That  will  help 
us  in  the  work  and  that  is  all  you  need  to  do. 
Eat  slowly.  Don't  hurry  so.  Take  plenty  of 
time  and  be  careful  what  you  do  eat.  That 
is  my  advice  to  you.  I  am  a  little  weak  just 
now  and  my  thoughts  begin  to  tremble. 

(Are  you  speaking  through  the  medium,  or 
is  Hiram  interpreting  for  you  now?) 

Hiram  is  doing  it  for  me.  I  could  not  take 
possession  of  the  medium  yet. 

(Can  you  do  it  some  time?) 

Yes,  but  not  just  now.  I  am  trying  to  un- 
derstand the  laws  and  the  workings  of  the 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        113 

machine,  and  they  put  me  up  here  so  I  could 
see.  Just  like  a  schoolboy  being  sent  to  the 
board  to  figure  out  a  multiplication  table.  I 
am  set  up  here,  I  am  held  here,  and  there  are 
three  clergymen,  one  behind  me  and  one  on 
either  side  of  me,  holding  me  up  here  and  tell- 
ing me  to  talk,  and  I  am  talking  to  Hiram, 
and  Hiram  is  repeating  it  after  me,  and  I  am 
trying  to  do  a  sum  in  geometry.  That  is  just 
what  I  am  trying  to  do.  And  since  I  am  not 
fully  equipped  in  that  problem  perhaps  you 
can  understand  something  of  the  difficulty. 

(I  think  you  are  doing  wonderfully  well.) 

But  I  can  hear  you,  and  so  long  as  I  can 
hear  you  and  get  my  thoughts  over  the  line 
clear,  that  is  all  I  want. 

(General,  as  far  as  I  have  heard,  you  have 
done  wonderfully  well  for  the  first  time.) 

They  have  been  preparing  me  for  months 
and  months  to  make  me  understand  it.  They 
have  put  me  up  here  and  taken  me  away  again. 
They  have  held  me  up  and  showed  me  the 
Light,  and  said,  "  do  this  and  do  that,  and  see 
this  and  see  that,"  and  shown  me  the  details, 
and  the  ins  and  outs  and  the  whys  and  where- 
fores, and  why  shouldn't  I  learn  something 
after  having  it  hammered  into  me  all  that 
time.  Then  I  said,  well,  I  must  reach  her. 
It  is  an  utter  impossibility  for  me  to  [let  go?] 
until  I  do.  [I  will]  move  heaven  and  earth, 
but    I    must     reach     her.     And     they    said: 


ii4      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

11  Wait,  you  have  got  to  learn.  You  must  go 
here  with  us,  you  must  stand  on  this  side,  hold 
up  your  hands,  bow  your  head,  speak  in  this 
kind  of  a  way,  speak  slowly,  articulate  distinct- 
ly,"—  but  without  the  preparation  there  is  a 
good  deal  of  confusion.  But  they  are  very, 
very  good  to  me,  and  they  know  —  what  they 
don't  know  about  the  details  of  this  Light  is 
not  worth  knowing,  I  assure  you  that,  if  you 
can  grasp  me.  With  your  clear  mind  you  can 
grasp  it  pretty  well,  I  think. 

[There  is  some  talk  about  the  private  work 
and  he  expresses  himself  very  emphatically.] 

(General,  you  are  just  as  positive  as  you 
used  to  be,  aren't  you?) 

[The  psychic  seemed  to  smile.] 

Perhaps  you  would  not  recognize  me  if  I 
was  not.  Well,  I  have  retained  my  individ- 
uality, thank  God.  Do  you  know  where 
Poland  is,  Poland  [hesitating  only  a  moment] 
Springs? 

(Oh,  I  guess  I  do.) 

Do  you  remember  about  it? 

(Yes,  indeed.) 

Well,  I  don't  think  anybody  except  our- 
selves — 

(Why,  they  know  where  it  is,  of  course.) 

But  I  mean  I  had  an  interest  in  it.  I 
mean  I  loved  it. 

(I  know  you  loved  it  much.) 

You    might    go   there    some     time.     You 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        115, 

know  it  came  into  my  mind  as  soon  as  could 
be. 

[The  place  where  the  famous  Poland 
Spring  is  located  is  the  one  spot  on  earth  that 
he  loved.  He  was  born  about  three  miles 
from  the  hill  on  which  the  large  hotel  now 
stands.  He  was  always  supplied  with  the 
water  and  thought  it  the  finest  water  in  the 
world.  There  was  no  thought  of  the  place  in 
my  mind  when  he  made  reference  to  it.] 

Here  is  little  Augustus.  Don't  you  see 
him? 

(Is  he  here?) 

Yes,  as  happy  as  a  bee,  just  as  busy.  He  is 
a  dear  little  fellow. 

(Give  him  my  love  if  he  understands  it.) 

Well,  I  will.  He  will  be  glad  to  have  it. 
Do  vou  remember  rubbing  my  arms? 

(Yes.) 

Well,  they  don't  need  rubbing  any  more, 
thank  God. 

Now  before  I  get  too  weak  —  you  know 
this  is  quite  an  effort  for  me  for  the  first  time 
—  before  my  thoughts  begin  to  wander,  have 
you  got  any  especial  question  you  wish  to  ask 
me  about  my  life,  about  anything  — 

( Well,  General,  I  want  you  to  try  and  think 
up  some  of  the  details  of  the  last  moments,  or 
rather,  after  you  passed  out,  the  first  few 
days.) 

[I  referred  to    details    of    what    happened 


n6      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

with  me,  or  at  his  home,  but  my  question  is 
not  clear.] 

I  know  what  it  was.  When  I  first  passed 
out  my  mind  was  cloudy,  rather  confused.  I 
felt  as  though  I  was  going  into  space,  did  not 
know  where,  drifting  as  it  were,  for  a  few 
hours  —  that  was  all  —  and  then  I  felt  as 
though  there  was  a  strong  hand  grasped  me 
and  said  to  me:  "It  is  all  right,  it  is  all 
over."  And  I  said:  "What  is  over?"  I 
could  not  seem  to  understand  what  it  all  meant, 
and  after  a  little  while,  perhaps  an  hour,  pos- 
sibly an  hour  or  two,  I  saw  oh  such  a  light ! 
You  cannot  imagine  it,  cannot  conceive  what  it 
is  like.  It  is  the  most  brilliant  and  yet  the 
softest  moonlight  that  you  ever  saw,  and  I 
thought,  what  a  beautiful  light  it  was!  And 
all  of  a  sudden  I  saw  people  moving  about.  I 
saw  their  heads,  their  figures.  Then  they 
seemed  all  clad  in  white,  and  I  could  not  seem 
to  make  them  out.  They  were  moving  in  the 
air. 

And  I  said:  "What  is  this  place? 
Where  am  I  ?  What  am  I  ?  What  has  hap- 
pened?" It  was  all  such  a  puzzle  to  me. 
When  I  get  strong  I  will  tell  you  about  it.  I 
can't  tell  you  any  more.  Now  what  you  want 
me  to  do,  think  over  the  few  days  — 

(Before  I  come  again,  I  mean.) 

—  and  when  I  come  back,  to  tell  you  what 
my  experience  was.     I  tell  you  one  thing,  the 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS       117 

clergyman  who  is  talking  for  me  now  was  the 
best  friend  I  ever  had,  and  he  said:  "  Come 
along,  it  is  all  right,  I  will  show  you  the  way; 
it  is  all  right,  you  will  get  over  this  confusion 
in  a  minute,  and  I  will  help  you."  And  I 
said:  "Who  are  you?  What  are  you? 
What  are  you  here  for?  Where  am  I? 
Where  am  I  going?  What  am  I  doing? 
What  does  all  this  mean?"  He  said: 
"  Never  mind,  it  will  all  be  clear  to  you  in  a 
few  minutes.  Just  wait  patiently  and  come 
with  me."  And  he  stood  ready  to  welcome 
me. 

(Well,  who  was  he?) 

Well,  his  name  is  Hart. 

(Oh!) 

He  says :  "  I  know  who  you  know,  you 
know  who  I  know,  now  we  will  be  friends  to- 
gether, and  this  is  all  right;  I  have  had  ex- 
perience and  I  know,  and  I  will  explain  it  to 
you  in  a  few  minutes."  I  thought  I  saw  the 
doctor  bending  over  me  and  I  wanted  him  to 
get  away.  He  seemed  to  be  in  my  way  as  I 
was  going  out.  I  wanted  to  get  away  from 
him,  and  all  of  a  sudden  I  was  going  through 
this  misty,  cloudy  way,  and  then  I  went  past 
[possibly  "  fast,"  word  not  caught]  until  I 
got  to  this  light,  and  it  was  like  going  up,  up, 
up  in  the  air,  in  a  balloon  as  it  were.  You 
could  not  conceive  of  anything  more  strange 
and  beautiful,  in  a  sense  —  the  confusion  was 


n8      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

not  so  beautiful,  but  because  it  was  so  I  could 
not  seem  to  retain  my  consciousness  and  could 
not  seem  to  be  released  from  the  burden  that 
hung  over  me,  and  all  of  a  sudden,  the  moment 
I  realized  that  this  hand  was  on  my  arm,  then 
I  began  to  see  clearly;  and  from  that  moment 
I  have  been  advancing  and  going  on,  and  I 
have  seen  everybody  I  ever  knew,  and  I  have 
had  the  happiest  time  you  could  imagine.  I 
have  a  mansion  all  my  own  and  live  in  it  just 
the  same  as  you  live  in  your  place  there,  just 
the  same.  I  have  walls,  I  have  pictures,  I 
have  music,  I  have  books,  I  have  poetry,  I 
have  everything. 

(I  see.) 

It  is  not  a  fac  simile  of  that  life,  but  that  life 
is  a  miserable  shadow  of  what  this  really  is, 
and  when  I  get  strong,  as  I  become  stronger, 
and, —  that  is,  more  accustomed  to  using  this 
line,  I  can  tell  you  more  clearly  about  it. 

Well,  it  has  been,  oh,  I  can't  tell  you  what 
it  means  to  me  to  see  you.  I  can't  tell  you 
how  you  have  cleared  my  mind.  I  can't  tell 
you  what  you  have  done  for  me.  Now  I  am 
going  to  repay  it  all  back  by  turning  and  work- 
ing for  you. 

[It  was  early  morning  when  the  General 
died.  His  doctor  was  not  present.  Two  of 
his  sons  were  present  and  must  have  been 
bending  over  him,  for  as  they  were  helping 
him  back  into  his  chair  which  he  had  left  for 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        119 

a  few    moments    his    strength    gave  way    en- 
tirely and  he  passed  out  shortly  after. 

Hiram  Hart  was  not  a  clergyman  in  this 
life,  but  he  came  in  time  to  be  spoken  of  at  the 
sittings  as  such  and  I  was  told  that  he  had  be- 
come one.  Although  he  passed  out  nine  years 
before  I  became  acquainted  with  the  General, 
he  seems  to  have  been  the  latter's  guide 
through  the  misty  passage  that  separates  the 
two  worlds.] 

I  think  I  shall  have  to  go.  How  long  have 
I  been  here? 

(Nearly  an  hour.) 

An  hour  in  the  earthly  world?  Well,  I 
don't  know  how  long  that  is,  but  I  am  too 
weak  to  remain;  that  is,  I  am  afraid  I  can't 
use  this  Light  any  more. 

[A  few  words  of  farewell.  Then,  in  a 
most  natural,  persuasive  tone,  as  if  addressing 
a  child:] 

Come,  Augustus,  you  come  with  me,  dear, 
and  we  will  go  and  find  some  play  toys.  We 
will  have  a  good  time  together.  Come  with 
grandpa,  come  along. 

[Then  as  if  addressing  me:] 

He  is  going. 

Rector  returns 

It  is  I,  Rector. 

(I  am  glad  to  see  you,  Rector.) 


120     BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

I  have  returned,  friend,  because  our  Leader 
said  to  me  to  keep  the  passageway  clear  and 
keep  all  right.  Friend,  all  is  right  in  thy 
world  with  us  this  day.  Thou  hast  good  con- 
ditions for  us.     Art  thou  aware  of  it? 

(I  am  glad  to  know  that.) 

[I  had  a  long  talk  with  Rector,  during 
which  I  asked:] 

(Is  the  General  coming  here  much  through 
this  medium?) 

At  times  he  is.  He  is  a  marvelous  person- 
ality and  he  has  a  very  clear  mind,  and  he  has 
a  very  earnest  desire  to  work  for  God  and 
humanity. 

[It  must  be  remembered  that  the  spirit 
known  as  "  Rector,"  the  so-called  "  control," 
always  appears  at  the  opening  of  a  sitting  and 
again  at  its  close.  Sometimes  there  are  long 
conversations  with  him,  much  spiritual  advice 
and  help  is  given,  and  quite  often  messages  for 
other  persons  are  received  by  the  sitter,  or 
messages  from  other  persons  are  delivered  by 
the  sitter  to  the  trance  personalities.] 

Close 

SITTING  OF  MAY  24,  1904 

[Soon  after  the  opening  of  this  sitting  Rec- 
tor introduced  to  me  a  personality  purporting 
to  be  a  physician,  who  held  a  long  conversa- 
tion with  me  in  regard  to  my  health.     He  told 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        121 

me  that  he  formerly  lived  in  Boston,  that  he 
was  in  Paris  when  he  passed  out,  that  he  had 
been  gone  possibly  a  year  or  two.  I  after- 
wards ascertained  that  a  physician  by  the  name 
given,  one  with  which  I  was  not  familiar,  had 
lived  on  Beacon  St.,  Boston,  and  died  in  Paris 
early  in  the  preceding  September.  This  ex- 
plains reference  to  "  the  doctor  "  in  opening 
remarks  below.] 

The  General 

[Psychic  coughing] 

Well,  I  wonder  if  there  is  anybody  wishes 
to  see  me ! 

(Hiram?) 

No,  my  name  is  Martin.  I  want  to  see 
Miss  Robbins.     Is  she  present? 

(Is  this  you,  General?) 

It  is  ...  I  am  delighted  to  see  you, 
that  goes  without  saying.  Well,  how  are 
you? 

(Oh,  I  am  pretty  well.) 

You  look,  splendidly.  I  saw  the  doctor,  I 
met  him.  As  I  came  in  he  was  just  going  out. 
By  the  way,  I  want  to  give  you  a  bit  of  advice. 
Whatever  you  do  in  that  world,  don't  overdo. 
You  know  I  was  a  great  one  to  preach. 

(Well,  no,  I  don't  think  you  were.) 

Well,  that  makes  me  laugh.  You  know  I 
don't  think  I  did  preach  very  much,  but  I  am 
going  to  preach  now.      I  am  going  to  tell  you 


122      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

to  take  care  of  yourself  and  the  Lord  will  take 
care  of  you.     What  are  you  doing? 

(Now  I  want  to  take  down  every  word  that 
you  say  and  what  I  say.) 

Well,  you  can  do  it,  you  are  equal  to  it.  I 
will  try  to  be  as  slow  as  I  can.  Well,  are  you 
pretty  well  ? 

(Yes,  pretty  well,  I  am  going  to  be  better.) 

You  want  to  get  some  of  these  friends  over 
here  after  you.  I  have  been  studying  into  this 
thing,  studying  the  laws  of  our  nature  —  that 
is,  its  problems  on  our  side  —  and  I  am  per- 
fectly delighted  with  the  conditions.  I  am 
perfectly  delighted  with  the  thought  of  return- 
ing. I  seek  you  out  and  follow  you  night  and 
day.  I  am  often  standing  by  your  side  when 
you  don't  realize  it,  and  I  stand  there  and 
laugh  at  myself  to  see  how  utterly  unconcerned 
you  are  in  regard  to  my  presence,  but  I  say  but 
if  her  spiritual  eyes  could  open  and  she  could 
see  me  as  I  am  I  know  she  would  be  delighted. 
By  the  way,  haven't  you  a  sister? 

(Yes.)    m 

She  has  just  passed  through  some  sorrow  in 
the  earthly  world? 

(Yes.) 

What  has  been  her  sorrow,  her  loss,  has 
been  somebody  else's  gain.  Because  she  had, 
well,  I  think  it  is  a  husband  —     ... 

["I  have  a  sister  whose  husband  passed  out 
in  the  early    part   of  this    year,    only    a  few 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        123 

months  previously.  I  have  other  sisters,  but 
do  not  live  with  any  of  them.  This  particular 
sister  had  just  been  spending  some  months 
with  me.  My  communicator  had  met  her 
once  or  twice  only  in  life,  and  was  not  at  all 
well  acquainted.] 

[I  think  I  asked  at  this  point  if  he  was  talk- 
ing through  Rector,  my  question  not  being 
recorded.] 

Oh,  Rector  is  holding  the  Light.  I  could 
not,  they  would  not  allow  me  to  do  that.  Not 
quite  now,  but  I  may  be  able  to  later.  But 
they  have  to  support  the  Light,  some  friend 
has  to  look  after  it. 

(Do  you  want  me  to  tell  you  a  few  things, 
just  the  same  as  if  you  were  here?) 

Just  the  same.  How  is  Everett,  by  the 
way? 

[Everett  is  one  of  his  sons,  now  living.] 

(Everett  is  well.  I  saw  him  a  few  days 
ago  and  took  supper  with  him  and  his 
family  — ) 

[Interrupting] 

I  know  it.  I  know  about  the  children. 
You  know  there  is  a  little  one  over  here.  We 
are  very  friendly  with  each  other,  and  just  as 
near  to  each  other  as  we  ever  could  be. 

[There  is  more  talk  about  his  son,  and  I 
ask:] 

(When  do  you  think  it  would  be  well  to 
send  a  message  to  him?) 


i24      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

I  think  it  would  be  perfectly  safe  to  do  it, 
—  well,  we  will  say  in  a  few  months. 

[Further  talk  on  same  line] 

Don't  you  remember  the  talks  we  used  to 
have  together  about  this  thing?  And  then  I 
was  a  little  skeptical,  I  could  not  seem  to  take 
it  in.  But  I  have  taken  it  in  to  my  satisfac- 
tion. 

[I  relate  to  him  a  story  of  something  that 
transpired  during  his  last  illness,  of  which  he 
was  entirely  ignorant,  something  which  in- 
volved a  reference  to  a  number  of  his  old 
friends,  most  of  them  well  known  public 
men.] 

(Do  you  think  you  would  remember  any  of 
the  names  if  I  should  mention  them?) 

I  think  I  should.  Many  names  have  gone 
from  me,  naturally,  and  new  ones  have  come 
up  to  me.  Names  of  places,  names  of  people 
whom  I  knew  in  the  mortal  world,  have  gone 
from  me  to  a  certain  extent,  and  as  I  go  on 
they  go  still  farther  from  me,  but  I  shall  never 
forget  you.  I  remember  when  I  was  suffer- 
ing so,  I  remember  the  little  councils  we  had 
together,  and  they  have  lasted  in  my  memory 
and  will  to  the  end  of  all  life. 

(General,  it  seems  to  be  the  real  spiritual 
sympathies  that  you  remember  only  — ) 

Yes,  well,  those  are  the  vital  ones,  those  are 
the  real  ones.  And  when  you  understand 
better  the  conditions  of  life  and  the  conditions 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        125 

of  passing  from  that  life  to  this,  the  changes 
in  the  life  as  it  were,  you  will  understand  more 
clearly  what  that  means.  But  until  then  it 
will  be  difficult  for  you  to  understand  it 
fully.  I  have  got  to  go  out  a  moment  —  you 
will  excuse  me  —  I  must  go  for  a  little  change. 
My  thoughts  begin  to  wander,  and  if  I  stayed 
you  would  be  displeased  with  my  wandering 
thoughts,  so  I  will  just  go  out  and  get  re- 
freshed and  return  instantly. 

[Silence  for  perhaps  a  minute,  possibly  not 
as  long] 

Are  you  still  here? 

(Yes.) 

I  feel  better  now.  I  want  to  know  about 
the  help  to  my  family.  What  help  have  they 
now  ? 

[Some  talk  about  family  omitted.] 

(You  remember  that  you  thought  you  knew 
the  name  of  the  new  baby,  and  you  said  it  was 
Augustus;  well,  it  was  not  Augustus,  but 
the  mother  told  me  that  they  called  him 
Augustus  nearly  all  the  time  — ) 

Yes,  that  is  what  led  me  —  what  is  his 
name? 

(It  is  William  Everett.  They  call  him 
Augustus  when  they  speak  about  him.) 

I  heard  it  so  much  I  felt  sure  it  was  his 
name.  Now  I  want  to  know  how  you  are 
getting  on  and  what  you  think  about  our 
writing  that  book. 


126      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

[Immediately  reverts  to  family  again.] 

(General,  shall  I  tell  you  one  or  two  more 
things  before  you  speak  of  the  book?) 

Yes,  you  might. 

(There  was  a  man  in  the  State's  prison  — 
you  know  —  you  used  to  see  him  sometimes 
with  your  old  friend  Chase  — ) 

Oh  yes! 

( —  and  when  you  passed  away  he  found  it 
out  and  got  together  a  dollar  or  two  and  gave 
it  to  some  one  and  asked  him  if  he  would  buy 
a  rosebush  and  put  it  on  your  grave.  I  wrote 
him  a  letter  after  that  about  it,  and  now  he  is 
out  of  prison,  and  he  came  to  see  me  to  thank 
me  for  the  letter  and  express  his  admiration 
and  love  for  you.) 

That  is  very  beautiful,  very  beautiful.  I 
am  very  glad  to  hear  that.     Who  was  he  ? 

(Oh,  he  was  some  old  burglar  or  some- 
thing, nobody  that  you  cared  anything 
about — ) 

[I  apologize  to-day,  1909,  to  whom  it  may 
concern,   for  this  thoughtless  reply.] 

But  had  a  heart? 

(Yes,  had  a  heart.  Now  do  you  remember 
how  you  used  to  lecture  on  Gettysburg?) 

Oh,  yes,  I  do,  yes  I  do  very  well. 

(Well,  after  you  went  away  I  got  your 
speeches  and  put  them  together  and  made  a 
nice  good  complete  copy,  as  well  as  I  could, 
and  your  wife  has  one  of  them  and  I  have  one. 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        127 

Did  you  know  anything  about  it  when  I  was 
doing  it?) 

Well,  yes,  I  knew  the  outline,  but  the  work 
itself,  the  actual  work  as  it  was  going  on,  I 
could  not  fathom.  But  I  knew  the  work 
concerned  my  mortal  life  and  things  that 
transpired  in  it.  But  the  nature  of  it  I  could 
not  define.  We  know  generally  what  takes 
place  in  a  general  way,  but  if  we  were  to  define 
it,  condense  it  and  give  utterance  to  it,  it  would 
be  difficult.     But  such  is  the  law  of  this  life. 

Remember,  now,  if  you  could  see  me  you 
would  say  I  was  a  mere  film,  and  you  would 
say.  '  how  transparent  and  peculiar  and  how 
light  and  how  strange  you  look  to  me;  '  and 
you  would  say,  'where  is  your  body?  you 
look  like  a  shadow,  as  it  were,'  but  still  I  could 
talk  with  you,  we  could  converse  with  each 
other,  and  you  would  be  surprised  to  see  how 
real  I  am.  The  passing  out  is  really  beau- 
tiful, just  after  you  once  get  beyond  the 
border,  it  is  perfectly  beautiful.  You  know 
the  meaning  of  the  word  heaven?  Well,  it  is 
heaven  indeed.  But  the  coming  back  is  a 
little  confusing  at  first  and  we  have  to  learn. 

(I  think  you  are  good  to  come  back  from 
such  a  place.) 

Well,  I  have  attractions  and  you  seek  for 
me  and  I  find  you.  Don't  get  nervous,  keep 
calm,  we  shall  have  time  to  say  all  there  is  to 
say. 


128      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

(Did  you  know  anything  about  your  funeral 
at  the  time?) 

Yes,  I  knew  it  and  saw  the  body  and  saw 
the  flowers.  I  saw  the  way  in  which  it  was 
laid  out.  I  saw  —  don't  you  think  it  looked 
well  ?  I  looked  as  though  I  was  asleep,  don't 
you  think  so?  And  I  don't  think  the  face 
showed  suffering  —  that  is,  the  clay  did  not 
show  the  suffering,  the  body  itself  —  but  I 
felt,  oh,  I  was  so  pleased  to  be  out  and  away 
from  the  atmosphere,  I  felt  so  choked  and  so 
distressed  for  breath,  and  the  moment  I  was 
released  from  the  imprisoning  body  then  I 
could  breathe  perfectly.  I  felt, —  I  could  not 
describe  it  to  you. 

(Well,  you  had  a  beautiful  funeral  and  a 
large  one,  and  do  you  remember  your  old 
friend  Horton,  the  minister? 

[Rev.  Edward  A.  Horton,  who  conducted 
the  funeral  service.  They  were  familiar 
friends.] 

Yes,  yes,  very  well. 

(I  wrote  him  and  thanked  him  for  all  he 
said,  and  thanked  him  for  you,  too.  Was 
that  right?) 

Beautiful,  that  is  beautiful!  What  did  he 
say? 

(Oh,  he  wrote  me  a  very  nice  letter,  and  he 
said  if  I  was  satisfied  he  thought  it  must  have 
been  satisfactory  to  others,  because  I  was  so 
close  to  you  and  knew  you  so  well.) 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        129 

That  is  beautiful.  I  can  only  say  to  that, 
Amen. 

[Only  one  or  two  remarks  of  a  personal 
nature  omitted  here.] 

(Now  I  will  let  you  say  what  you  want  to.) 

I  want  to  say  this,  that  when  you  arc  work- 
ing I  sometimes  dictate  thoughts  to  you,  and 
it  is  surprising  to  me  to  see  how  clearly  you 
register  them,  and  I  think  sometimes  you  are 
surprised  to  think  that  you  have  done  what 
you  have,  and  if  you  just  stop  and  give  me  a 
thought  you  would  know  why  it  was  that  you 
did  those  things,  registered  those  thoughts. 
Sometimes  there  seems  to  be  a  barrier  between 
you  and  your  thoughts,  they  are  not  clear,  and 
they  seem  to  be  a  little  obscure,  and  then  they 
clear  up  [marvelously],  and  you  have  always 
attributed  that  to  the  condition  of  your  own 
brain,  and  now  if  you  just  give  me  credit  for  a 
little  bit  of  help  you  would  do  the  right  thing. 
Not  that  I  am  egotistic,  but  the  point  is  that  I 
am  really  with  you.  And  I  want  to  say  one 
thing,  that  you  have  not  grown  old  in  spirit 
and  not  in  the  flesh.  It  looks  so  clear  to  me, 
so  free,  so  bright  and  so  young,  and  I  think 
your  body  looks  the  same.  I  can't  see  much 
change.  Yes,  I  think  you  look  about  the 
same.  I  can't  see  the  body  so  clearly  as  I  can 
the  spirit. 

(Do  you  know  how  old  I  am?) 

[A    brief    talk    about    age    omitted.     He 


130      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

thought  me  older  than  I  then  was.  It  was 
evidently  the  comparison  of  ages  which  carried 
him  back  to  old  associations,  for  he  immedi- 
ately followed  it  by  saying:] 

You  remember  how  we  used  to  talk  in  the 
office  there?  Where  is  that  office  now?  Is 
it  there?     Is  the  building  gone  away? 

[Referring,  I  presume,  to  the  office  of  the 
Board  of  Police  in  Pemberton  square.] 

(Not  that  I  know  of.  You  mean  where  we 
were  so  long  together?) 

They  are  going  to  remove  it  and  put  another 
in  its  place. 

[This  matter  was  talked  of  as  long  ago  as 
when  he  was  there,  and  I  think  he  had  plans 
in  his  own  mind  for  a  new  building.  The 
particular  building  in  which  the  old  office  was 
located  has  not  yet  (1909)  been  replaced  by  a 
new  one,  although  new  large  buildings  have  re- 
cently gone  up  close  beside  it.] 

(They  had  to  get  another  lady  there, 
couldn't  get  along  without  the  ladies.) 

I  know  they  did.  That  is  very  funny.  Do 
you  ever  see  anything  of  Hanscom  ? 

(Oh,  why  yes, —  I  don't  see  him  often,  but 
he  has  a  good  place  there  and  is  well  and 
comfortable.  I  am  so  pleased  that  you  should 
think  of  his  name.) 

I  could  not  help  thinking  about  him.  All 
of  a  sudden  I  thought  of  him,  and  I  have  seen 
him  several  times  since  I  passed  over.     I  have 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        131 

seen  him  discussing  something  there  with 
another  man  in  the  office,  and  my  mind  re- 
verted back  to  the  office  and  the  conditions 
until  I  happened  to  think  of  him.  He  was 
not  well  at  one  time,  but  he  is  better  now  — 
that  is,  since  I  passed  over. 

(Perhaps  you  like  him  better  than  you 
used  to?) 

Because  I  see  his  principles. 

(I  don't  believe  you  quite  understood  him.) 

I  didn't. 

(But  I  did  better  than  you  did.) 

Yes,  .  .  .  but  I  did  not  understand 
what  his  active  principles  were.  If  you  have 
an  opportunity  I  wish  in  an  indirect  way,  if  not 
direct,  I  wish  you  could  mention  me  to 
him,  will  you?  Tell  him  that  you  have  met 
me. 

(Perhaps  I  might  have  him  call  on  me,  but 
I  don't  want  to  give  too  much  of  you  away, 
you  are  too  precious,  but  I  think  he  would  be 
pleased  to  hear  what  you  have  said  about 
him.) 

Well,  tell  him  that  I  appreciate  all  his  ef- 
forts and  everything  that  he  did  a  great  deal 
better  perhaps  now  than  ever.  And  I  would 
like  to  have  you  tell  him  that  for  me.  I  don't 
want  people  to  think  that  you  are  losing  your 
mind,  but  I  think  you  are  far  more  capable  of 
keeping  your  mind  by  finding  me  perhaps  than 
others,  than  some  of  those  who  perhaps  would 


132      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

not  listen  to  it.  So  we  will  keep  that  a  secret 
between  ourselves. 

(You  better  leave  that  to  my  discretion, 
about  seeing  him.) 

I  will. 

[Orinton  M.  Hanscom  was  formerly  one  of 
the  higher  officials  in  the  police  department. 
In  1888,  after  a  protracted  hearing  on  charges 
preferred  against  him,  and  a  decided  disagree- 
ment among  the  members  of  the  board  in 
regard  to  the  case,  he  was  discharged  from 
the  force.  I  have  memoranda  in  shorthand 
under  date  of  December,  1888,  to  the  effect 
that  Dr.  Phinuit,  the  early  control  of  Mrs. 
Piper,  predicted  to  me  that  Mr.  Hanscom 
would  sometime  go  back  to  his  old  position. 
In  March,  1889,  the  prediction  was  repeated, 
that  he  would  go  back  to  his  old  position  or  to 
his  old  surroundings.  He  was  out  of  the  de- 
partment six  years.  In  1894,  after  General 
Martin  became  chairman  of  the  board,  his 
case  was  reopened  and  he  was  reinstated  in 
the  department,  being  appointed  to  a  higher 
position  than  the  one  he  formerly  occupied, 
namely,  that  of  deputy-superintendent.  There 
had  formerly  never  been  more  than  one  deputy- 
superintendent,  but  now  two  more  men  were 
given  that  ranking,  Mr.  Hanscom  being  one 
of  them.  The  General,  therefore,  had  shown 
himself  very  friendly  to  Mr.  Hanscom,  but 
wrhen,  after  the  reinstatement,  they  came  to  be 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        133 

actively  associated,  I  think  there  was  a  feeling 
of  disappointment  on  the  part  of  the  General 
in  Mr.  Hanscom.  The  latter  was  a  man  of 
rather  broad  outlook,  with  ideas  of  reform, 
which  he  liked  to  discuss,  but  his  ideas  did 
not  always  seem  to  be  appreciated  by  his 
fellows  or  superiors.  The  General  wanted 
his  orders  put  into  effect  quickly,  even  though 
they  might  be  difficult  of  execution.  There 
was,  therefore,  this  lack  of  harmony  between 
the  two  men,  which  was  perfectly  apparent  to 
me  at  the  time.  Therefore  the  remarks  of 
my  communicator  given  above,  to  the  effect 
that  he  did  not  understand  his  active  principles, 
but  that  he  appreciated  all  his  efforts  now 
better  than  he  ever  did  before,  wishing  to  be 
remembered  to  Mr.  Hanscom,  are  extremely 
pertinent.  Some  time  after  date  of  this  sitting 
I  met  Mr.  Hanscom  accidentally  and  gave 
him  the  substance  of  the  message,  which  he 
received  with  the  courtesy  habitual  to  him, 
refraining  from  criticism.  Since  then  he  has 
himself  passed  away.  *] 

1  Since  the  above  was  written  Mr.  Hanscom  has  pur- 
ported to  return.  This  occurred  at  a  sitting  which  took 
place  on  Dec.  16,  1908.  The  communications  were  sud- 
denly broken  off  and  I  was  told  that  a  friend  wanted 
to  speak  to  me.  I  had  no  thought  of  any  one  but 
Hiram  Hart,  who  I  presumed  was  interrupting  for  a 
word  of  greeting.  Rector  stumbled  a  little  over  the 
name,  but  only  a  little,  calling  it  "  Hanson."  Not  till  that 
moment  did  the  thought  of  Hanscom  enter  my  mind.  I 
asked  Rector  to  get  the  name  exactly,  and  he  spelled  it 
out   easily  and   correctly:     "Hanscom  —  Orin.     Don't 


134      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

[In  conversation  about  my  private  work, 
where  it  would  be  best  to  spend  my  vacation, 
etc.,  I  say:] 

(Greenacre, —  don't  you  remember  I  used 
to  go  there?) 

I  should  approve  of  that  at  once,  and  sanc- 
tion it. 

[Reference  to  Greenacre  will  appear  in  a 
later  sitting.] 

Do  you  remember  a  woman  you  used  to 
talk  to  me  about  in  the  body  who  used  to 
have, —  the  spirits  used  to  speak  through 
her? 

(Yes.) 

[This  refers,  of  course,  to  Mrs.  Piper.] 

Well,  I  want  you  some  time  to  be  in  her 
surrounding  when  I  am  not  speaking  and  see 
if  I  can  reach  you,  see  if  the  thoughts  will  be 
clearer  to  you.  I  think  it  would  be  worth 
while  to  try  it,  because  I  often  reach  over  the 
line  when  I  don't  speak. 

(Do  you  mean  when  the  Light  is  not 
working?) 

you  remember  Orin?"  It  did  not  occur  to  me  until  after 
the  sitting  that  the  Christian  name  should  have  been 
"  Orinton  "  and  not  "  Orin."  I  do  not  know  whether  his 
intimate  friends  called  him  "  Orin  "  when  in  life  or  not, 
but  it  is  quite  likely  they  did.  There  was  a  very  brief  con- 
versation. He  said :  "  What  a  happy  ending  to  a 
blighted  career !  "  Mrs.  Piper,  in  her  normal  state,  faintly 
recalled  the  name  as  that  of  some  one  whom  she  had 
heard  spoken  of,  but  said  she  did  not  know  that  he  had 
passed  to  the  Other  Side.  His  death  occurred  in  No- 
vember, 1907. 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        135 

When  the  Light  is  not  working,  when  it  is 
closed. 

(We  were  together  a  while  ago  in  an 
evening,  but  then  there  were  a  good  many 
people  about.) 

I  mean  quietly,  when  there  is  nobody  about 
except  the  spiritual  intelligences  and  when  we 
are  not  actually  acting  upon  it,  and  I  think 
ideas  would  come  to  you  very  clearly. 

[I  cannot  say  that  any  special  experiment 
on  my  part  was  made  in  accordance  with  this 
request.  Opportunities  to  be  with  Mrs.  Piper 
alone,  when  not  in  trance,  were  rare  with  me.] 

I  have  got  to  go  out  to  get  my  breath.  I 
will  be  right  back  in  a  moment,  but  I  have  to 
refresh  myself. 

[While  the  General  is  apparently  out, 
Hiram  Hart  steps  in,  speaking  hurriedly  as  if 
he  had  only  a  moment,  and  saying  that  he  saw 
the  other  gentleman  "  going  out,"  so  thought 
he  would  "  come  in  "  and  say  "  how  do  you 
do."  As  he  appears  to  be  going  I  say:  "  Oh, 
have  you  got  to  go?"  He  replies:  "  Oh, 
they  have  kept  him  so  clear  I  want  him  to 
learn  what  I  know."  The  other  gentleman 
then  returns.] 

Well,  I  am  right  back  here  again.  I  met 
Mr.  Hart  and  he  told  me  he  just  wanted  to 
speak  to  you  a  moment  while  I  was  refreshing 
myself,  so  I  said  "  go  ahead  and  ask  Rector  if 
you  can  get  in."     Wasn't  he  a  clergyman? 


136      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

(He  was  not  here,  but  he  says  he  is  now.) 

Well,  he  is  preaching  and  praying  and  help- 
ing all  the  people  that  come  over  this  side  — 
or  the  spirits  —  and  he  is  a  wonderful 
preacher  and  he  has  done  a  great  deal  for  me, 
and  I  am  glad  to  know  him  because  he  was 
your  friend.  They  say  it  is  not  all  gold  that 
glitters,  but  there  is  a  great  deal  glitters  here 
that  is  gold. 

(Well,  he  seems  to  admire  you.  He  says 
you  are  very  handsome.) 

[Laughing] 

Well,  I  suppose  he  thinks  so. 

(You  used  to  be  here.) 

Oh,  you  think  so?  There  is  no  accounting 
for  tastes,  you  know.  But  we  have  to  accept 
those  things.  He  is  a  good  soul  and  I  like 
him.  He  has  done,  I  say,  a  great  deal  for  me, 
pointed  out  the  way  a  great  many  times. 

(Now,  General,  I  will  let  you  say  what  you 
want  to,  but  you  were  going  to  tell  me  some- 
thing,—  what  happened  just  after  you  went 
out,  either  on  this  side  or  on  your  side.  Give 
me  some  new  ideas,  will  you?) 

Yes,  I  will.  You  know  the  actual  passing 
out  of  the  body,  there  is  a  little  feeling 
of,  sort  of  depression,  as  it  were,  and  then 
when  I  passed  out,  just  as  I  passed  out, 
I  began  to  feel  uplifted.  I  felt  as  though 
the  air  was  filled  with  perfume,  and  I  was 
[soaring],    rising,    rising,    rising    above    my 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        137 

body  until  I  passed  behind  simply  a  veil. 
It  is  thin.  It  blinds  your  vision.  It  ob- 
structs the  vision  for  a  moment  from  the 
earthly  world.  Then  after  we  have  passed 
beyond  it,  why  the  music,  the  flowers,  the 
trees,  the  birds,  the  lakes,  the  rivers,  the 
hills,  the  gardens,  the  walks,  are  perfectly 
magnificent,  perfectly  magnificent,  and  nothing 
in  the  earthly  world  hardly  can  even 
correspond  to  them.  And  we  are  taken  up  by 
perhaps  a  priest,  or  man  that  acts  in  the  ca- 
pacity of  whaf  you  would  understand  as  a 
clergyman,  and  they  say:  "  This  is  a  state  of 
transition.  You  are  now  in  the  real  life,  in 
the  new  life.  You  will  not  see  the  face  of  the 
Father  for  many,  many  years,  but  He  will  give 
you  strength  and  power  to  go  back  if  you  wish 
and  see  those  whom  you  have  left  behind." 
And  the  feeling  of  ecstasy  is  beyond  descrip- 
tion, and  no  spirit  that  ever  returned  to  earth 
could  begin  to  describe  it  for  the  understand- 
ing of  the  mortal  mind. 

And  then  I  was  surrounded  by  friends,  by 
acquaintances,  by  old  war  veterans,  by  my  in- 
timate friends  whom  I  know,  members  of  my 
family  and  all,  surrounded  by  them,  wel- 
coming me.  Why,  I  felt  as  though  I  should 
be  enveloped  by  them,  the  delight  was  so 
great,  but  when  I  tried  to  call  them  by  name 
I  was  at  a  loss  to  do  so.  They  had  to  tell  me 
who  they  were.     I  knew  their  faces,  not  one 


138      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

failed  to  me.  I  knew  them  and  understood 
them  well.  I  saw  them  and  recognized  them, 
but  to  call  them  by  name,  believe  me,  I  could 
not.  And  when  I  tried  to  speak  I  found  in- 
stead of  it  being  an  effort  and  difficult  for  me 
to  speak,  I  found  that  my  thoughts  were  un- 
derstood, actually  understood,  and  their 
thoughts  were  returned  to  me.  There  was  a 
perfect  communion  between  us. 

And  then  I  was  taken  —  would  you  believe 
it  if  I  should  tell  you?  I  was  taken  to  an 
actual  mansion.  It  would  be  what  you  would 
call  a  palace.  There  is  a  garden,  walks  about 
it.  It  is  divided  into  rooms,  actual  compart- 
ments. I  was  taken  to  that  and  [they]  said: 
"  Here  is  your  home;  occupy  it,  live  in  it;  have 
what  friends  you  choose  with  you,  what  rela- 
tives you  choose  with  you,  and  as  those  whom 
you  have  left  behind  follow  you,  you  may 
welcome  them  to  this  home  as  you  may  see  fit." 
Do  you  understand  it? 

(Yes.) 

I  went  in  and  looked  about  me.  I  said: 
"Where  does  this  music  come  from?"  I 
walked  through  a  corridor  and  turned  into  a 
room  at  the  right  and  actually  walked  without 
fatigue,  without  effort;  I  simply  glided  in.  I 
saw  beautiful  pictures  upon  the  walls,  I  saw 
beautiful  flowers  that  we  called  in  the  body 
palms,  growing  about  me.  I  heard  this  beau- 
tiful music.      I  stepped  along  to  a  window  and 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        139 

looked  out,  and  under  the  window  there  were 
fifty  young,  beautiful  faces,  all  playing, —  an 
orchestra.  That  was  my  welcome,  that  was 
my  serenade,  as  it  were.  And  they  said: 
'  This  is  heaven,  this  is  the  spiritual  world. 
We  greet  you."  I  went  to  the  window  and  as 
I  looked  out  upon  the  orchestra  they  each  one 
bowed  and  waved  their  hands,  and  yet  the 
music  continued.  They  were  playing  upon 
instruments,  actual  instruments,  all  in  har- 
mony, and  I  never  heard  anything  like  it  in  the 
earthly  world.  The  music  was  divine.  I 
said:  "  I  would  like  to  go  elsewhere."  I  bade 
them  good-bye,  as  it  were, —  I  just  saluted 
them  and  passed  along  across  the  corridor 
back  through  the  room,  across  the  corridor 
into  the  opposite  side. 

I  said:  "  Now  I  would  like  to  see  if  it  is 
possible,  I  would  like  to  see  flowers  about  me." 
I  went  to  the  window,  and  would  you  believe, 
the  flowers  appeared  to  me  in  masses,  en  masse, 
I  might  say,  and  I  never  saw  such  flowers. 
There  were  lilies,  roses,  violets,  geraniums, 
carnations,  azaleas,  hyacinths,  tulips,  poppies, 
of  every  conceivable  description,  not  all  inter- 
mingled, but  each  one  in  its  own  place.  What 
could  you  find,  what  could  one  wish  for  bet- 
ter than  that? 

I  said:  "  Now  if  it  is  wise  and  right  that 
I  should  seek  it,  I  would  like  to  hear  some- 
thing that    sounds  like  the  voice    of  a  bird." 


140      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

They  said:  "  Come  this  way."  I  was  sur- 
rounded by  these  beautiful  friends  and  by 
clergymen  —  a  good  many  clergymen  there 
and  they  said  some  beautiful  things  —  and 
they  said:  "  Come  to  this  window  and  see." 
But  I  said:  "  May  I  not  hear  them  here?  " 
I  listened.  In  a  moment  the  air  was  filled 
with  the  music  of  the  different  birds.  Well, 
you  have  no  conception  of  what  that  melody 
was  like.  I  saw  the  birds.  The  birds  were 
just  as  distinct,  much  more  so  than  your  own. 
The  flowers  are  real,  and  as  I  go  back  to  the 
mortal  life  and  see  the  crudeness  of  it  and  see 
how  I  lived,  the  active  energy  and  the  active 
life  that  I  then  led,  the  energy  which  I  put  into 
that  life,  I  wonder  that  I  ever  existed  in  it  at 
all.  Now  you  are  not  living  in  the  real  life. 
You  are  living  in  a  dream,  as  it  were.  When 
you  waken  from  the  dream  you  will  live,  in  the 
eternal  life. 

[At  this  point  an  acount  is  given  of  his 
asking  to  know  something  about  Christ,  to 
know  whether  he  had  been  deceived  in  the 
earthly  world  in  what  he  had  been  taught 
about  Christ,  and  a  description  is  given  of  a 
certain  vision  that  was  vouchsafed  him.  I 
have  thought  best  to  omit  this  whole  passage, 
except  to  say  that  at  its  close  he  exclaims :] 

And  I  live  to  tell  you  of  it! 

I  walked  about,  I  felt, —  it  was  strange  I 
had  no  hunger,  no  thirst,  no  desire  to  eat,  no 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        141 

desire  for  food,  but  I  am  sustained  by  the  con- 
ditions of  the  elements.  The  condition  of 
the  elements  is  such  that  we  are  fed  and 
sustained  and  live  by  them.  You  can  under- 
stand it  perhaps  vaguely  if  not  clearly.  You 
have  a  wonderful  power  to  understand,  or 
used  to  have.  I  think  perhaps  you  can  picture 
me  and  picture  my  home  and  picture  my  sur- 
roundings. At  least,  I  make  it  as  clear  as  I 
can  for  your  understanding. 

Now  would  you  like  to  ask  me  any  ques- 
tions?    Interrupt  me  if  you  wish  to. 

(Well,  what  do  you  do  mostly  with  your 
time?) 

Well,  now  I  will  tell  you.  What  would 
correspond  with  your  morning  —  we  have  no 
morning, —  that  is,  it  is  all  morning  in  a  sense, 
in  a  way, —  there  is  no  daylight  and  darkness 
with  us,  it  is  all  daylight  —  and  what  cor- 
responds with  your  morning  —  I  find  that 
there  are  always  entering  into  this  life,  there 
are  spirits  entering  constantly  from  your  life, 
and  each  one  needs  help,  needs  to  be  shown  the 
way,  and  I  enter  the  multitude,  the  throng  out- 
side of  my  own  home;  I  pass  through,  I  see  the 
veil  uplifted,  I  see  a  spirit  passing  in,  perhaps 
millions  of  spirits.  And  I  was  told  when  I 
entered  it  that  I  must  make  this  life  here  useful 
by  helping  others  and  by  reverencing  God, 
offering  up  gratitude  in  a  prayerful  spirit  to 
Him    who    created    me    and    gave    me    the 


i42      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

privilege  of  this  life  here.  And  I  do  that 
through  the  so-called  day,  without  fatigue, 
with  perfect  delight,  assist  some  one  spirit  or 
more  who  have  left  the  body  and  entered  this 
life.  And  until  they  are  fully  conscious  and 
realize  where  they  are  —  some  are  taken  from 
us,  we  are  not  allowed  to  see  them  at  all,  they 
are  taken  into  another  sphere;  those  are  passed 
beyond  us,  we  have  nothing  to  do  practically 
with  them  —  but  there  are  spirits  that  enter  our 
own  sphere,  and  we  each  lend  a  hand,  show 
them  their  homes,  settle  them  in  it,  go  back 
and  help  another,  and  we  are  constantly  doing 
that. 

And  then  I  feel  sometimes  that  I  would 
like  to  help  in  something  that  corresponds 
with  your  writing.  I  find  in  my  home  every- 
thing for  which  I  ask.  If  I  wish  pencil,  what 
corresponds  with  your  pencil,  I  have  it.  If 
I  wish  to  write  my  thoughts  I  can  write  them, 
if  I  wish  to  speak  them  I  can  do  so,  and  every 
thought  is  granted,  every  desire  is  granted. 
And  if  I  wish  to  lecture,  as  I  often  do,  I  can 
do  so  without  fatigue,  and  it  is  helpful  to 
those  who  enter  this  life.  If  I  wish  to  write 
I  can  write,  if  I  wish  to  walk  I  can  walk,  if 
I  wish  to  sing  I  can  sing,  if  I  wish  to  speak  I 
can  speak.  That  makes  the  life,  as  you  would 
understand  it,  perfect.  It  is  a  perfect  life. 
And  in  order  to  live  this  perfect  life  you  have 
got  to  live  in  that  imperfect  life,  and  the  more 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        143 

you  undertake  to  prepare  for  this  life  the  less 
you  have  to  go  through  when  you  pass  it  and 
the  clearer  your  thoughts  become  when  you 
enter  it.  Have  you  got  the  idea  ?  Would 
you  like  to  ask  me  anything?  There  arc  in- 
struments all  about  me,  everything  you  can 
think  of  —  harps,  violins,  bugles,  trumpets, 
horns,  pianos,  spinnet  —  do  you  remember 
what  a  spinnet  is?     All  those  instruments. 

(They  are  just  the  same  as  our  instruments, 
only  better?) 

Only  better.  Everything  is  beautiful,  and 
it  is  in  a  way,  each  article,  object,  as  well  as 
spirit,  is  luminiferous.  If  the  eye  was  opened 
to  the  spiritual  and  you  could  see  me  as  I 
stand  .here  talking  with  you,  you  could  see 
every  gesture  I  make,  which  is  copied  by 
Rector.  He  imitates  me  as  I  speak  with  you. 
You  could  see  me  and  see  my  home,  you  could 
see  everything  that  I  have  in  it. 

(Then  what  do  you  do  in  the  afternoon?) 

Then  in  the  afternoon  sometimes  I  write  a 
lecture,  I  go  out  and  look  at  my  flowers,  enjoy 
them;  I  go  and  visit  others,  they  visit  me.  I 
learn  to  play  on  the  instruments,  the  different 
instruments.  I  am  absorbed  in  music  and  I 
love  the  flowers  and  the  birds. 

Then  I  feel  as  though  I  would  like  to  take 
up  some  intellectual  pursuit,  and  then  I  begin, 
and  I  am  studying  with  those  who  have  been 
here  longer  than  myself  the  actual  conditions 


i44      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

of  this  life  and  what  go  to  make  up  the  life 
here,  and  as  I  learn  I  give  it  out  to  others, 
interpret  my  knowledge  to  others.  Therefore 
our  intellectual  capacity  is  unlimited  in  a  sense, 
and  constantly  being  educated.  And  it  is  a 
beautiful  idea,  is  it  not?  And  then  all 
through  what  you  would  call  evening,  during 
the  evening,  what  would  correspond  with  your 
evening,  there  is  chiefly  music  going  on,  en- 
tertainment and  music.  Then  after  that 
passes,  what  corresponds  with  your  early 
morning  or  late  in  the  night,  there  are  lectures 
and  concerts  of  all  kinds  and  descriptions  go- 
ing on,  so  that  our  lives  are  completely  filled. 
And  then  during  the  later  hours  of  the  morn- 
ing, before  what  would  be  your  daylight,  ev- 
ery single  spirit  on  my  side  of  the  spirit  life 
where  I  am  [is]  bowed  in  prayer  for  what 
would  be  at  least  two  or  three  hours  corres- 
ponding with  your  time,  perfect  devotion  and 
a  prayer. 

(Then  you  don't  have  to  sleep  the  way  we 
do?) 

Have  no  sleep,  no  rest.  What  corresponds 
with  your  rest  is  activity  on  our  part.  And 
then  after  the  devotional  exercises  we  are  ready 
for  what  would  correspond  with  your  day  for 
our  work  again.  Can  you  conceive  of  any- 
thing more  beautiful  or  more  perfect,  or  more 
to  the  liking  of  a  man  with  my  tastes  and 
my  ideas? 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        145 

(No.) 

But  man  should  live  his  allotted  time  in 
the  earthly  world  to  prepare  to  live  and  to 
live  in  this  world,  but  if  he  takes  his  life  in- 
tentionally or  otherwise  he  remains  in  a  sense 
like  a  little  child  here,  or  a  germ,  and  he  has 
to  develop,  unfold,  bud  and  flower,  and  he 
must  necessarily  do  so.  Ask  me  anything  you 
wish.  I  am  so  glad  to  tell  you  this  because 
I  want  you  to  get  some  conception  of  what  I 
am  and  what  I  am  doing.  This  is  not  an 
idle,  useless  life  here, —  ah,  no,  not  at  all. 

(How  long  does  it  take  for  you  to  come  to 
me?) 

[I  meant  at  any  time  when  I  might  think 
of  him  or  call  him,  but  I  evidently  did  not 
make  my  meaning  clear.] 

I  would  seem  some  distance  from  you  if 
you  could  see  me  as  I  am.  When  you  have 
a  desire  to  speak  with  me  —  there  are  spirits 
here  who  know  every  mortal  on  the  face  of 
the  earth;  that  is,  the  same  one  does  not  know, 
but  the  different  ones  know  every  mortal  — 
and  they  say:  "Here  is  a  friend,  I  think 
she  is  a  friend  of  yours;  there  the  Light  is 
beginning  to  burn,  it  is  open;  we  have  attached 
the  ethereal  cord  and  we  will  remove  the 
spirit  from  the  Light,  take  it  to  our  world  or 
out  on  the  cord,  attach  the  cord  to  the  shell, 
as  it  were,  fill  it  with  our  ethereal  light,  and 
you  can  enter  into  it  and  see  if  it  is  your  friend, 


146      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

and  if  so  follow  Rector,  follow  those  that  are 
used  to  the  cord  and  go  to  the  end  of  it  and 
speak  over  it  to  Rector,  who  is  actually  within 
the  shell  himself,  and  he  will  transmit  your 
messages  to  your  friend."  It  takes  in  all,  I 
suppose,  of  your  time  five  or  ten  minutes  per- 
haps for  me  to  reach  you. 

[There  is  a  brief  talk  about  relationships, 
and  I  say:] 

(You  choose  your  own  friends  there,  as 
here,  don't  you?) 

Just  the  same. 

It  has  been  a  perfect  pleasure  for  me  to  see 
you  again.  Good-bye.  God  bless  you. 
Come  and  see  me  again.  May  God  watch 
over  you. 

Close 

SITTING   OF   DECEMBER   20,    I9O4 

[During  the  morning  hours  of  the  date 
given  above,  while  my  sitting  was  going  on, 
another  of  Mrs.  Piper's  sitters  underwent  a 
surgical  operation  of  some  sort.  I  had  not 
been  told  that  an  operation  was  to  take  place, 
nor  do  I  know  to-day  who  this  person  was. 
Rector  explained  to  me  that  Imperator  was 
obliged  to  be  absent  from  the  sitting,  that  he 
had  left  Prudens  in  charge  while  he,  Impera- 
tor,  was   "  over  and  around  the  cot  "   of  a 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        147. 

member  of  the  circle.  Near  the  close  of  the 
sitting,  which  lasted  two  hours,  I  was  asked 
to  take  a  message  to  Dr.  Hodgson  to  the  ef- 
fect that  the  operation  had  gone  on  well.  I 
noted  the  exact  time  when  this  was  told  me 
and  sent  the  message  to  Dr.  Hodgson  by  tel- 
egram at  the  earliest  possible  moment.  I  af- 
terwards learned  that  the  operation  had  gone 
on  well,  and  that  the  person  operated  upon 
was  much  gratified  on  being  told  at  an  early 
hour  what  came  from  the  Other  Side  of  the 
Veil  in  regard  to  himself,  communicated  first 
to  me,  by  me  to  Dr.  Hodgson,  and  by  the  lat- 
ter to  the  person  concerned.] 

Rector 

[During  the  course  of  Rector's  remarks  I 
say:] 

(Rector,  wait  a  moment.  Through  whom 
is  my  friend  going  to  talk  now?) 

He  will  try  and  speak  direct  to  thee,  if  this 
be  possible;  if  not  I  shall  remain,  as  it  were, 
a  non-entity,  giving  his  messages. 

(You  have  allowed  him  to  do  that?) 

Yes,  I  have,  through  the  advice  and  com- 
mand of  our  Leader. 

(Now,  Rector,  my  friend  is  really  and  truly 
here  almost  exactly  the  same  as  if  he  were  in 
his  own  body,  is  he  not?) 

Almost  the  same,  and  if  thy  spiritual  eyes 


148      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

could  open  thou  wouldst  see  him  standing  here 
beside  the  ethereal  cord,  waiting  his  turn  to 
enter  into  the  Light  upon  the  cord. 

The  General 

Are  you  here? 

(Yes.) 

I  am  here  to  meet  you.  Oh  how  happy  I 
am! 

(Who  is  it?     Don't  be  offended,  will  you?) 

[Rattles  off  some  lines  of  poetry,  evidently 
some  of  the  same  words  which  came  on  the 
occasion  of  his  first  return,  Dec.  23,  1903. 
I  afterwards  found  the  verse  which  he  was 
quoting,  which  is  by  Charles  Mackay,  and 
runs  as  follows :  — 

Tell  me,  ye  winged  winds 

That  round  my  pathway  roar, 
Do  ye  not  know  some  spot 

Where  mortals  weep  no  more; 
Some  lone  and  pleasant  dell, 

Some  valley  in  the  West, 
Where  free  from  toil  and  pain, 

The  weary  soul  may  rest? 

This  bursting  out  into  some  language  which 
was  rythmical,  especially  when  he  was  happy, 
was  most  characteristic  of  him  in  life.] 

Yes,  the  answer  comes  to  me  in  the  spirit, 
I  have  found  it.  I  have  found  the  rest,  the 
life,  the  peace,  hope,  everything  I  hoped  to 
find.     .     .     .     Now  you  know  who  it  is? 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        149 

(Oh,  I  know  any  way,  only  I  thought  I 
would  just  ask  you  that.) 

Well,  if  you  should  say  "  General  "  I  should 
be  pleased  to  hear  it. 

(When  I  first  knew  you  I  could  not  get  used 
to  calling  you  "  General,"  but  after  I  did  get 
accustomed  to  it  I  could  not  call  you  anything 
else,  because  that  seemed  to  be  the  right  name 
for  you.) 

You  thought  it  applicable? 

(Yes.) 

Well,  that  is  pleasant.  .  .  .  Remem- 
ber that  the  laws  of  vibration  are  very  won- 
derful, very,  very  great,  and  my  thought 
reaches  you  and  vice  versa.  Therefore,  for 
what  more  could  I  ask?  [Something  about 
his  family  doing  well]  My  friends  are  loyal 
and  I  am  happy,  and  the  mere  fact  of  my  re- 
turning and  speaking  with  you  is  an  inspiration 
beyond  description. 

( Well,  it  helps  me  more  than  anything  else 
I  do.) 

These  good  saints  have  helped  me  to  under- 
stand the  laws  of  communication,  and  I  am 
not  so  much  of  an  idiot  that  I  should  laugh  at 
it  or  pooh-pooh  at  it  further. 

(Well,  you  would  better  not.) 

How  can  I?  The  reality,  it  is  a  stern  real- 
ity, and  such  a  reality  that  it  is  the  only  thing 
which  God  hath  given  us  to  enable  us  to  un- 


i5o      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

derstand  the  laws  of  the  eternal  life.  Is  not 
that  beautiful? 

(Yes.) 

Is  it  not  beautiful?  And  it  is  the  only 
way.  So  the  casting  off  of  the  mere  body, 
the  shell,  is  nothing,  it  is  nothing;  it  goes  to 
waste,  but  my  spirit  lives  to  speak. 

(General  — ) 

Without  the  wires  I  could  not  communicate 
so  easily,  but  with  the  wires  my  thoughts  are 
registered  clearly,  are  they  not? 

(Yes.     General — ) 

Yes? 

(You  are  taking  Rector's  place  to-day, 
aren't  you?) 

For  the  first  time  I  am,  yes.  Dear  creature, 
he  is  here  to  help  me,  he  stands  beside  me 
watching  me  to  see  that  no  harm  comes  to 
the  instrument  over  which  I  speak. 

(Well,  it  is  not  so  very  hard,  is  it?) 

No,  not  hard,  but  if  you  were  to  question 
me  one  question  after  another  it  might  con- 
fuse me,  but  you  ask  your  questions  so  clearly, 
so  slowly  and  in  moderation,  that  I  can  under- 
stand them  and  reply.  But  if  you  were  to 
fire  questions  at  me,  so  to  speak,  volley  after 
volley,  it  would  confuse  me  so  I  should  be 
obliged  to  go  out.     You  understand? 

(Yes.) 

You  look  so  well.  ...  I  see  your 
spirit  so  clearly.     I   see  what  I   did  not  use 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        151 

to  see.  I  saw  the  physical  and  not  so  much 
the  spirit.  I  see  the  spirit  and  the  physical 
both  combined.  They  both  seem  clear  to  me 
and  beautiful.  I  am  glad  you  followed  out 
my  instructions.  I  saw  you  in  the  place  which 
I  designated. 

(Do  you  know  where  that  is  now?  What 
do  you  mean?) 

I  saw  you  in  a  place  with  a  lady,  a  very 
beautiful  character,  a  very  interesting  charac- 
ter. 

(Do  you  know  who  that  is,  or  when  it 
was?) 

It  is  what  we  used  to  call  summer,  and  it 
was  in  a  green  place,  in  a  green  place,  and 
everything  so  beautiful,  so  peaceful. 

[I  spent  several  weeks  during  the  preced- 
ing summer  at  a  place  called  "  Greenacre," 
in  the  town  of  Eliot,  state  of  Maine.  It  is 
sometimes  called  "  Greenacre-on-the-Piscata- 
qua."  Summer  conferences  have  been  held 
there  for  a  number  of  years  past,  a  large  as- 
sembly-tent is  erected  on  the  greensward  in- 
dicated by  the  name,  and  representatives  of 
all  religions  are  welcomed  to  the  open  plat- 
form.] 

I  saw  you  attending  something  seemed  like 
lectures.  I  saw  you  conversing  with  an  oc- 
casional gentleman,  and  I  saw  you  sitting  — 
it  looked  like  a  tent  — 

(Yes.) 


152      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

—  and  saw  you  walking  about. 

(Yes.) 

I  saw  you, —  was  it  in  a  hammock?  Some- 
thing swinging. 

(Yes,  once  or  twice.) 

And  I  saw  you  sitting  there  thinking,  as  it 
were,  alone,  and  it  seemed  as  though  the  shad- 
ows of  night  had  fallen,  and  it  was  in  the 
evening. 

(Oh,  yes.) 

[I  think  it  was  at  this  point  that  I  recalled 
a  special  evening.     See  explanation  later.] 

And  I  came  and  stood  beside  you  and  put 
my  hand  on  your  shoulder,  and  I  heard  you 
say,  "how  peaceful,  how  perfectly  delightful 
it  is."     Do  you  remember  it? 

(Yes.) 

Do  you  remember  seeing  the  moon?  The 
heavens  seemed  dark  and  then  the  moon  ap- 
peared. It  was  early  in  the  evening.  And 
then  I  saw  you  get  up,  somebody  came  and 
spoke  to  you  and  you  got  up,  walked  about  a 
little  and  went  inside  a  building. 

(I  was  in  this  hammock,  I  think  twice,  but 
one  night  a  long  time,  and  I  even  fell  asleep 
there.) 

Yes,  that  was  the  time  when  I  put  my  hand 
on  your  shoulder  and  had  the  beautiful  mes- 
sages of  peace  from  your  spirit. 

(Well,  I  went  to  sleep,  oh  very  easily  and 
beautifully,  and  I  woke  up  and  thought  how 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        153 

beautiful  it  was  to  sleep  there  under  the 
stars  — ) 

Yes,  stars,  that  is  what  I  mean. 

( —  and  I  even  got  locked  out  of  the 
house.) 

Yes,  yes,  I  know  there  was  some  difficulty 
in  your  getting  in.  I  know  that.  And  then 
I  remember  the  surprise  which  came  over  you 
when  you  [recovered]. 

(Yes,  I  was  surprised.) 

And  I  was  with  you  all  through  that  little 
sleep,  talking  with  your  spirit.  Do  you  re- 
member what  a  peaceful  wave  came  through 
you? 

(Yes.) 

It  was  I  who  sent  it,  who  brought  it. 

(When  I  sleep  like  that  it  seems  as  if  I 
was  off  somewhere;  I  am  perfectly  unconscious 
of  this  world,  and  where  am  I  then?) 

The  spirit,  your  spirit,  goes  out  upon  an 
ethereal  cord,  just  the  same  as  the  spirit  of  the 
Light  here  departs.  Now  I  see  the  spirit  of 
a  woman  going  out,  and  it  is  the  same  in  sleep, 
and  I  talk  with  your  spirit  just  the  same  as  I 
am  talking  with  you  now.  Sometimes  I  al- 
most feel  that  you  will  remember  it,  but  when 
the  spirit  becomes  active  and  fully  possessed 
of  the  body  and  mind,  then  it  forgets. 

(Yes.  Do  you  mean  that  is  so  always 
in  sleep,  or  only  in  those  occasional  sleeps?) 

Under  certain  conditions,  only.     The  sleep 


154      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

might  be  disturbed  if  the  spirit  communicated 
with  it  always,  but  upon  certain  occasions  and 
under  certain  conditions  we  are  able  to  talk 
with  the  spirit  very,  very  clearly.  The  spirit 
understands  and  answers  — 

(You  mean  the  earthly  spirit?) 

Yes,  just  the  same  as  you  answer  me  when 
I  speak  with  you  now.  Why,  to  know  that 
I  can  follow  you,  to  know  that  I  can  see  you 
in  certain  places  and  under  certain  conditions 
—  and  do  you  remember  the  tent? 

(Yes,  yes!) 

Well,  I  saw  you  under  the  tent  and  sat  be- 
side you  several  times,  and  there  was  another 
lady  with  you.  Who  was  that  lady?  She 
was  a  beautiful  spirit,  a  bright,  beautiful  look- 
ing woman,  a  very  clear  mind  and  beautiful 
spirit.     Is  her  name  Sarah? 

(Wait  a  moment.  You  know  I  am  taking 
this  all  down,  don't  you,  General?) 

I  do  not  see  what  you  are  actually  doing. 
I  see  your  thoughts  are  busy,  very  busy. 

(I  want  to  preserve  every  word.  And  it 
is  so  delightful  to  think  that  I  can  write  down 
in  shorthand  just  wThat  you  say,  just  exactly  as 
I  used  to  do  when  you  were  here.) 

Oh,  yes,  I  remember,  that  is  what  you  are 
doing.  Well,  I  do  not  actually  see  the  writ- 
ing going  on,  or  the  motion  of  your  hand,  or 
the  —  paper,  is  it?  But  I  see  you,  your  gen- 
eral outline,  and  I  see  you,  as  it  were,  in  the 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        155 

light.  You  look  as  though  there  was  a  light 
all  about  you. 

(Well,  now  let's  be  slow.) 

That  is  the  reflection  of  the  spirit  about 
you. 

I  My  spirit?) 

Yes,  your  own  spirit.  There  is  a  reflec- 
tion, as  it  were,  all  about  you.  It  is  very 
clear  and  very  beautiful  to  me. 

(Do  you  mean  Sarah  Farmer?) 

I  should  not  wonder.  That  sounds  some- 
thing like  the  name  I  heard  her  called  by. 
She  was  not  actually  with  you,  but  I  saw  you 
with  her  and  saw  you  talking  with  her,  and 
she  has  a  very  large  spirit,  a  very  broad  spirit, 
and  a  very  large  and  beautiful  mind.  Was 
that  not  so? 

(Miss  Farmer  is  the  person  who  started 
that  place  and  who  has  charge  of  it  and  has 
gotten  all  the  fine  speakers  there,  etc.,  and 
she  is  considered  a  very  advanced  spirit.  Do 
you  think  it  was  she?) 

Yes,  it  was  she  whom  I  saw. 

(You  know  she  was  not  a  special  friend  of 
mine,  though  I  know  her.) 

But  I  saw  another  lady,  but  I  saw  another 
lady  with  you  — 

(Well,  General,  wait  a  minute,  wait  a  min- 
ute. How  did  you  know  her  name  was 
Sarah?) 

I  heard  several  ladies  in  a  large  room  one 


156      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

—  you  would  call  it  evening  again  —  calling 

—  one  spoke  to  her  very  intimately  and  called 
her  Sarah,  and  I  was  within  —  I  was  perhaps 

—  let  me  see  —  where  is  your  hand? 

[The  psychic  takes  my  hand  and  holds  it 
about  a  foot  from  my  face.] 

I  was  within  that  distance,  the  distance  that 
your  hand  is  from  your  face,  from  her,  when 
the  name  was  called,  and  we  can  hear,  and 
we  can  see  and  understand  names  as  they  are 
spoken  in  the  body  if  we  are  attracted  to  any 
one  individually. 

(I  see.) 

And  oftentimes  the  names,  if  we  are  in- 
terested, register  themselves  upon  our  mem- 
ories and  we  never  forget  them.  But  to  go 
back  to  this  evening.  Then  you  got  in,  didn't 
you  — 

(Yes.)  i 

—  all  right,  but  that  was  the  time  when  I 
saw  you  very  clearly. 

(Yes.) 

[All  the  incidents  referred  to  in  the  pre- 
ceding conversation  about  Greenacre  are  al- 
most literally  true,  though  I  am  aware  that 
some  of  them  are  simply  things  which  one 
would  naturally  do  during  a  summer  outing. 
The  sleep  in  the  hammock,  however,  was  an 
unusual  one,  and  I  have  rarely,  if  ever,  had 
one  just  like  it.  The  fact  is  that  I  dislike  the 
motion  of  a  swinging  hammock  and  seldom 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        157 

lie  in  one.  The  evening  in  question  was  one 
of  those  still,  balmy  evenings  when  it  seems 
a  sin  to  sleep  under  other  canopy  than  the 
starry  blue.  I  do  not  remember  the  moon, 
think  there  was  none,  or  not  until  very  late. 
I  found  an  empty  hammock  a  few  rods  from 
the  Inn  and  appropriated  it.  I  remember 
thinking  how  delightful  it  was  to  lie  there  fac- 
ing the  stars,  entirely  free  from  contact  with 
the  earth,  a  part  of  the  atmosphere  around 
me.  I  believe  I  even  felt  that  I  had  been  in 
error  all  my  life  thus  far  in  not  overcoming 
my  dislike  to  the  motion  of  a  hammock.  I 
fell  easily  into  a  sleep  which  must  have  been  a 
deep  one,  and  woke  surprised  to  find  from  the 
general  appearance  of  the  Inn  that  it  was 
late.  I  spoke  with  a  gentleman  who  was  pass- 
ing, and  as  I  remember  I  addressed  him  first. 
We  went  on  the  veranda,  where  there  was  one 
other  person,  and  found  that  the  Inn  was 
closed  for  the  night  and  we  were  locked  out. 
Fortunately  a  parlor  window  was  easily 
opened  and  then  the  door  unlocked  from  the 
inside.  I  do  not  remember  that  I  did,  and 
think  I  did  not,  dream  anything  in  the  sleep 
which  I  could  afterwards  recall.  I  seldom 
heard  Miss  Farmer  called  Sarah,  though  that 
is  her  name.  I  was  not  specially  with  her, 
but  probably  spoke  with  her  once  or  twice 
during  my  stay.  I  remember  going  to  Green- 
acre  one  summer  several  years  before  the  Gen- 


158      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

eral  passed  away,  returning  and  telling  him 
about  the  place.  That  he  ever  heard  Miss 
Farmer's  Christian  name  spoken  is  very  doubt- 
ful. He  knew  very  little  about  her  when  liv- 
ing-] 

(Now,  General,  why  can't  I  learn  to  go  out 
that  way  in  sleep  at  will,  almost?) 

Well,  it  sometimes  is  not  wise,  sometimes 
it  is  not  healthful,  and  it  rests  with  the  divine 
power  as  to  when  those  conditions  are  suita- 
ble. Perhaps  you  can  better  understand  that. 
I  have  learned  a  great  deal  about  the  condi- 
tions since  I  have  been  here,  and  it  has  been 
my  one  thought  to  study  into  the  conditions 
and  understand  them  for  your  sake,  that  I 
might  be  able  to  help  you.  I  now  see  what 
a  clear  beautiful  mind  you  had  and  why  you 
were  so  interested  in  things  which  seemed  to 
me  rather  absurd. 

(Well,  I  am  glad  to  hear  you  say  that.  All 
things  come  to  him  who  waits.) 

Yes,  that  is  very  true,  but  in  the  material 
life,  in  the  mortal  life,  it  seemed  that  I  was 
unable  with  my  peculiar  make-up  to  grasp  any- 
thing which  I  could  not  see. 
(Yes.) 

Therefore  perhaps  you  will  excuse  me  for 
not  accepting  your  theories,  but  I  lived  to  learn 
and  understand  for  myself.  It  was  a  happy- 
day  when  I  came.  The  awakening  was  some- 
thing beyond   description.       I   never  can   tell 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        159 

you  how  I  felt  when  I  woke,  and  as  my  spirit 
passed  up  from  that  imprisoning  body,  through 
the  cool  ether,  and  the  ethereal  veil  parted 
and  my  spirit  passed  through  it  into  this  beau- 
tiful world,  the  sensation  and  the  light  [de- 
light] of  it  all  is  beyond  my  power  to  ex- 
plain, and  could  I  explain  it  in  earthly  words 
your  mind  could  not  really  grasp  it  or  under- 
stand it. 

( Yes.  General,  you  say  that  you  could  not 
accept  things  unless  you  could  see  them,  but  I 
thought  you  had  a  very  fine  and  highly  de- 
veloped spirit,  otherwise  you  would  not  have 
gone  so  quickly  into  the  right  conditions  there 
and  understood  how  to  come  back  here,  and  be 
taken  in  by  Imperator  and  Rector,  etc.,  would 
you?) 

You  realized,  I  think,  that  my  desire  was 
for  the  advancement  of  mind,  and  you  remem- 
ber how  I  used  to  love  poetry,  and  that  I  had 
a  vein  of  sentiment,  as  you  used  to  express  it. 
Well,  all  that  is  fine  spiritual  perception;  and 
it  is  really  beautiful  to  me,  now  when  I  realize 
that  I  possessed  that  at  all  when  in  the  physi- 
cal body,  and  it  has  been  a  great  benefactor 
to  me  in  this  life.  You  understand  what  I 
mean. 

(Yes.) 

It  has  been  a  great  help,  a  great  help  to 
me,  the  mere  fact  of  my  growing  in  spirit  in 
the  body,  and  I  really  loved  the  beautiful. 


160      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

(General,  don't  you  remember  how  a  beau- 
tiful woman  used  to  impress  you?  Wait  a 
moment  —  a  friend  of  yours  said  once,  old 
Mr.  Clapp,  that  he  did  not  know  any  man 
who  took  in  the  soul  of  a  beautiful  woman 
any  more  quickly  than  you  did.  We  laughed 
over  it,  but  I  knew  it  was  so.) 

You  understood  it? 

(Yes.) 

Well,  that  is  very  beautiful,  very  kind  in 
him  to  have  said  it.  But  I  really  think  that 
I  do,  and  know  now  that  I  did,  I  know  that  I 
understood  women  and  the  beautiful  side  as 
few  men  did  in  my  environment  or  among 
my  associates.  And  all  those  things  appealed 
to  me,  and  it  was  that  that  was  highest  and 
best.  All  that  appealed  to  me  most.  And  I 
was  very  happy  in  my  earthly  life  in  a  way. 
I  loved  life  for  what  life  gave,  and  I  loved  the 
pleasures,  and  I  loved  the  physical  and  all 
that  the  physical  gave,  but  still  I  was  large 
enough  in  heart,  I  feel,  and  in  spirit  not  to 
allow  the  physical  temptations  to  drown  my 
soul. 

(Yes.). 

[This  is  a  very  good  characterization  of 
himself.] 

(I  am  of  course  very  greatly  blessed  and 
privileged  to  have  your  continued  friendship 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        161 

and  to  be  allowed  to  come  here  and  talk  with 
you.) 

Well,  there  are  so  many  restrictions.  This 
great  spirit,  this  man  here  who  leads,  he  is 
the  noblest  spirit  I  know,  and  there  are  so 
many  restrictions, —  he  understands  the  condi- 
tions so  well,  and  he  has  his  everlasting  eye 
open  watching  constantly  that  no  harm  shall 
befall  anything  or  anybody  connected  or  as- 
sociated with  the  Light  or  the  spiritual  influ- 
ences who  work  through  it.  Why,  it  is  really 
marvelous. 

(You  mean  Imperator?) 

Yes.  He  is  not  present  at  the  moment  be- 
cause he  is  away  on  a  mission,  but  all  those 
whom  he  does  call,  remember,  really  are  priv- 
ileged. 

[See  note  at  opening  of  this  sitting.] 

(Yes,  indeed,  they  are.  Now  I  want  to 
ask  you  to  watch,  and  if  you  think  you  are  not 
going  to  have  any  more  opportunities  to  come 
to  me  through  this  Light,  then  I  want  you 
to  get  one  final  chance  if  possible  and  tell  me 
that  you  cannot  come  more.  Will  you  try 
to  do  so?) 

Will  you  repeat  that  once  more  for  me? 
You  mean  that  I  must  return  here  —  and  tell 
you  before  — 

[Think  I  replied  yes.] 

Oh,  yes, —  well,  I  am  going  to  tell  you 
something.      We   call   them   the   saints;   they 


i6i      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

told  me  before  I  came  here,  before  I  asked 
them  if  I  might  speak  with  you,  they  told  me 
that  —  the  leader,  the  head  spirit  —  he  said 
that  the  conditions  were  low,  but  he  said: 
"  I  will  not  go  into  explanation,  but  abide  by 
what  I  say;  the  conditions  are  such  that  I 
must  exert  all  my  influence  and  power  to  hold 
the  conditions  in  a  sufficient  state  of  clearness 
to  enable  you  to  return  to  your  friends  on  the 
earthly  side  at  all."     Do  you  hear? 

(Yes.) 

And  he  also  said:  "  By  so  doing,  by  doing 
this,  you  will  be  enabled  to  return  through  the 
Light  occasionally  for  an  unrestricted  time  — " 

(Well,  well,  well,  that  is  beautiful.) 

— "  and  only  under  those  conditions  will 
you  be  permitted  to  return  at  all  through  the 
present  Light."  Therefore  he  has  taken  up 
the  Light  and  is  specially  administering  unto 
it  to  keep  it  for  those  who  really  need  light 
and  help.     Do  you  understand? 

(Yes.)< 

Well,  if  you  do  not  perhaps  Rector  could 
make  it  clearer  to  you. 

(I  do.) 

This  was  a  private  conversation  between 
Imperator  and  myself,  and  he  notified  all  the 
communicators  who  return  through  this  Light 
of  the  conditions,  and  were  it  not  for  him  and 
his  wonderful  power  I  perhaps  should  not  be 
able  to  return,  but  so  grateful  are  we  to  him 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        163 

that  we  offer  up  our  blessings  daily  and  al- 
most hourly  to  him  for  his  guidance  and  help. 
I  wish  you  could  see  him. 

[A  few  brief  sentences  only  omitted  here.] 

I  know  one  thing,  I  know  that  they  all  on 
our  side  can  see  and  have  predicted  the  ab- 
sence of  the  Light  on  the  other  side  of  the 
water. 

[It  must  be  remembered  that  it  was  after 
the  date  of  this  sitting  that  Dr.  Hodgson 
passed  out.  Mrs.  Piper  spent  the  winter  of 
1906-7  abroad.] 

[In  speaking  of  a  prediction  made  concern- 
ing myself  he  says:] 

Perhaps  you  had  better  ask  Rector  about 
that,  as  he  is  very  clear  and  understands  that 
very  well;  or,  better  still,  George  Pelham. 
Perhaps  you  know  him  ?  He  has  been  a  great 
help  to  me,  a  great  help  to  me;  although  he 
is  not  so  near  the  earth  and  the  conditions 
surrounding  the  Light  as  I  am  at  the  present 
time,  he  really  is  a  great  help. 

(Is  he  in  another  sphere,  so  called?) 

Yes,  he  is  in  the  last  sphere,  what  you  would 
speak  of  as  heaven;  the  last,  seventh  sphere. 

(What  sphere  are  you  in?) 

I  am  in  the  third  now.  We  have  to  pass 
through  the  third  sphere  in  order  to  return, 
one  might  say,  and  therefore  I  could  not  re- 
turn immediately  directly  I  passed  out  of  my 
body. 


1 64      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

(Oh,  that  is  the  reason,  is  it?) 

Yes.  It  is  just  like  going  from  one  room 
to  another.  [Illustrated  by  change  of  loca- 
tion in  the  material  world]  We  advance 
until  we  feel  that  we  have  perfected  ourselves 
according  to  God's  will  and  idea,  and  then  we 
are  satisfied  with  ourselves,  and  not  until  we 
have. 

(Well,  when  you  first  passed  out  did  you  go 
into  the  first  sphere,  or  do  you  call  this  the 
first  sphere  where  I  am?) 

Entering  the  material  life  is  one  sphere  of 
life;  that  is  the  first,  because  life  comes  with 
the  creation  of  the  mortal  body;  life  comes, 
it  is  the  breath  of  God,  and  you  are  a  branch 
of  His  great  tree,  you  understand,  and  then 
the  spirit  grows,  advances.  Sometimes  it  does 
not  advance  in  the  mortal  because  it  is  ham- 
pered by  physical  ill,  etc.  If  not,  it  is  re- 
moved after  a  time  and  enters  our  life  and 
then  begins  to  develop  and  grow. 

(Well  then  do  you  think  every  one  leaves 
here  just  when  it  is  right  for  him  to  go, 
whether  he  is  young  or  old?) 

Yes,  yes,  yes,  that  is  all  in  the  hands  of  God, 
and  although  we  never  see  God  —  I  have 
never  seen  Him  and  never  hope  to  —  He  rules 
us  all  and  reigns  over  us  all,  and  we  are  a 
part,  a  branch  of  Him,  and  your  question  will 
make  that  clear  to  me. 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        165 

(When  any  one  dies,  as  we  call  it,  whether 
he  is  thirty  or  eighty  years  old,  it  is  the  right 
time  for  him,  do  you  think,  or  is  death  merely 
an  accident,  the  time  of  death?) 

Oh,  it  is  not  an  accident.  It  is  ordained  by 
God.  I  could  not  understand  when  I  was  in 
the  body  why  certain  things  [happened],  why 
certain  deaths  took  place,  and  so  on,  but  God 
knows  what  their  lives  are  and  what  they  are 
to  be  should  they  live.  Therefore  He  re- 
moves them  perhaps  through  disaster,  perhaps 
through  accident,  perhaps  through  fire,  per- 
haps through  loss  of  a  vessel,  and  all  that 
sort  of  thing,  and  He  removes  many  at  a  time. 
But  every  spirit  that  enters  this  life,  there  is 
a  home  prepared  for  it  and  a  place  prepared 
for  it.  Perhaps  you  know  that  in  the  earthly 
Bible,  the  material  Bible,  "  In  my  Father's 
house  there  are  many  mansions;"  do  you  re- 
member that? 

(Yes.) 

That  has  a  literal  meaning.  .  .  .  The 
spirit  really  never  suffers,  never  knows  a  mo- 
ment's pain  or  anguish  of  any  kind.  I  know 
this  from  the  —  pure  experience  and  study. 

(But,  General,  you  are  not  always,  you  over 
there,  perfectly  developed,  and  does  not  your 
happiness  depend  on  your  inner  development 
there  as  it  does  here,  your  degree  of  happi- 
ness?) 


1 66      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

Well,  yes,  to  an  extent,  but  we  never  suffer 
as  suffering  is  expressed  and  understood  by 
you. 

(Yes,  I  see,  I  see.  How  about  age  there? 
How  old  are  you  compared  with  Imperator? 
What  is  the  standard  of  measurement?) 

Well,  Imperator  is  —  in  fact,  no  spirit  is 
ever  old,  there  is  no  such  thing  as  age  with  us. 
We  enter  this  life  according  to  our  acts  in  the 
mortal  life.  If  we  have  advanced  and  grown 
we  have  gained  so  much  when  entering  this 
life,  but  if  we  are  hampered  by  physical  ills 
or  physical  infirmities,  or  perhaps  some  may 
inherit  imbecility  or  something  of  that  kind, 
when  the  spirit  leaves  the  body  it  enters  this 
life  and  grows,  in  a  sense,  as  a  child.  It  rests, 
it  is  released.  The  moment  it  is  released  from 
its  body  it  assumes  a  condition  of  happiness, 
as  it  were.  There  is  a  peacefulness  about  it 
that  permeates  the  whole  spirit,  and  a  certain 
power  of  understanding,  and  then  it  advances 
and  grows  until  we  are  —  we  might  put  the 
age,  for  your  understanding,  to  fifty,  and  we 
are  never  older  than  that  in  spirit. 

(You  mean  never  older  than  about  what 
we  think  of  as  fifty?) 

Yes.  The  body  grows  old  simply  but  the 
spirit  never  grows  old.  The  spirit  remains 
young  and  beautiful  always.  No  matter 
whether  the  man  has  passed  from  the  earthly 
life  through  senile  decay  or  through  accident 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        167 

in  youth,  that  makes  no  difference;  the  spirit 
is  young  always.  But  the  conditions  of  the 
spirit  and  its  happiness  does  [do]  depend 
somewhat  upon  his  advancement  and  growth 
and  understanding  and  desires  of  right  and 
wrong  in  the  physical  life. 

(Well,  supposing  I  have  a  friend  now  who 
goes  over  there,  who  did  not  think  much  of 
spiritual  development  here,  could  he  be  where 
he  could  see  and  talk  with  you,  for  instance, 
or  would  he  be  in  a  lower  plane?) 

Well,  he  would  be  —  for  your  understand- 
ing —  he  would  be  in  a  somewhat  lower  plane 
upon  entering  this  life,  but  if  he  has  a  great 
desire  to  reach  me  there  are  certain  conditions 
through  which  he  must  pass  in  order  for  that 
desire  to  be  accomplished,  and  if  he  lives  ac- 
cording to  the  restriction  and  the  laws  which 
are  mapped  out  for  him  here,  then  he  might 
be  able  to  see  me  in  what  you  might  term  a 
few  days.  Then  his  desire  would  be  fulfilled 
and  he  would  be  made  happier  in  consequence. 

(Now,  General — ) 

Yes,  I  hear  every  word  you  say,  and  you 
have  the  faculty  of  speaking  slowly  and  dis- 
tinctly. 

(Yes.  When  you  went  away,  before  your 
body  was  put  in  the  earth,  I  was  called  by 
the  Light  known  as  Mrs.  S.  I  went  there 
after  your  body  was  put  away,  but  she  told 
me  —  that  is,  her  control,  her  spirit  guide  told 


168      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

me  —  that  the  day  you  died  —  you  passed  out 
in  the  morning  of  our  day  here,  and  she  said 
that  you  might  have  been  around  that  day  but 
she  was  so  busy  she  did  not  notice  you,  but 
at  night  you  were  there  and  you  had  on 
such  an  anxious  face  that  she  had  to  listen 
to  you,  and  you  kept  saying,  "  Send  for  Anne, 
send  for  Anne."  Then  when  I  went  a  few 
days  later  and  talked  with  her  she  talked  as 
if  you  were  really  there.  Well,  she  said  of 
course  you  did  not  put  it  in  words,  but  she 
expressed  the  feeling.  Now  do  you  know 
anything  at  all  about  that,  or  were  you  around, 
or  could  you  have  been  around,  or  could  you 
have  called  me  in  that  way?  This  is  a  Light 
to  whom  you  went  once  with  me  when  in  the 
physical  body.) 

[The  psychic  known  as  Mrs.  S.  sent  for  me 
as  explained  above,  asking  if  I  would  like  a 
sitting,  feeling  that  she  ought  to  comply  with 
the  request  of  her  control,  though  she  had 
never  before  offered  me  a  sitting  simply  because 
her  control  desired  it,  and  never  has  since.  Al- 
though she  had  seen  in  the  papers  an  an- 
nouncement of  the  death  of  my  friend,  she 
assured  me  that  up  to  that  time  she  did  not 
know  that  I  had  been  associated  with  him  in 
business,  having  the  impression  that  my  spe- 
cial work  was  to  assist  Dr.  Hodgson.  On  the 
occasion  when  the  General   accompanied  me 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        169 

to  a  sitting  with  her,  several  years  before  his 
death,  she  was  not  told  who  he  was  and  was 
not  acquainted  with  him.] 

Well,  I  remember  after  leaving  my  body, 
the  first  thing  I  thought  of  after  leaving  the 
body,  after  passing  through  this  ether  which 
I  described  and  beyond  the  veil  —  that  is,  on 
our  side  of  the  veil,  into  this  world  —  the  first 
thing  I  thought  of  was,  "  Where  is  Anne?  I 
will  go  and  find  her."  I  turned  immediately 
and  looked  back  into  the  physical  world,  into 
the  material  world,  looked  at  the  physical 
body,  saw  it  like  so  much  earth,  and  I  saw 
you  terribly  distressed,  as  it  seemed  to  me,  and 
your  spirit  seemed  very  downcast  and  de- 
pressed, and  I  tried  to  reach  you  and  was  very 
anxious  to  do  so  and  very  anxious  to  make 
myself  understood  by  you,  and  if  she  saw  me 
she  was  probably  true  in  saying  it,  because 
that  was  the  first  thing  I  remember  of  doing; 
and  the  first  thought  that  crossed  my  mind 
was,  M  I  will  go  and  find  Anne  wherever  she 
may  be  and  tell  her  that  I  am  still  living  and 
going  on  into  the  eternal  life."  Therefore  I 
cannot  contradict  or  disclaim  her  veracity. 

[It  was  not  his  habit  to  call  me  "  Anne  " 
when  living,  though  it  is  the  habit  of  returning 
spirits  to  call  their  friends  by  their  Christian 
names.] 

(Now  will  you  come  to  me  as  well  as    you 


170      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

can  whenever  I  go  to  see  her,  and  do  you  think 
it  would  be  well  for  me  to  go  there  occa- 
sionally?) 

Yes,  once  in  a  while,  but  I  have  learned 
from  Imperator,  who  knows  all  there  is  to 
know  and  prepares  his  messengers  to  give  such 
light  as  he  deems  that  they  are  fitted  to  give, — 
he  says  too  frequent  communication  on  our 
side  is  not  wise,  and  it  is  wiser  for  the  spirit 
to  store  up  its  knowledge  and  learn  all  the 
conditions  of  its  life  and  then  return  occa- 
sionally, imparting  that  knowledge  to  his 
friend  on  the  earthly  side  occasionally,  but  not 
too  frequently,  as  the  spirit  loses  by  too 
frequent  communication. 

(I  see.) 

And  it  is  not  well  for  his  best  development. 

[I  tell  him  something  about  his  old  home.] 

(I  am  going  out  there  the  evening  preceding 
the  fourth  Sabbath  from  now,  if  I  can.  I  am 
going  to  listen  to  the  sound  of  your  voice 
through  the  phonograph  — ) 

A  speech? 

(Yes.  Do  you  remember  the  phono- 
graph?) 

Yes,  I  do. 

(There  were  some  of  your  talks  preserved. 
There  was  the  remarks  of  Colonel  Ingersoll 
at  the  burial  of  his  brother,  there  was  George 
Eliot's  "  Choir  Invisible,"  there  was  Bryant's 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        171 

11  Flood  of  Years."  Now  I  am  going  to 
listen  to  that  for  the  first  time  since  you  went 
away,  and  I  want  you  to  stand  right  beside  me 
all  the  time,  and  then  when  I  come  here  again 
you  can  tell  me  about  it.) 

I  shall  be  delighted.  That  will  give  me 
greater  happiness  than  anything  you  could  ask 
me. 

[Unfortunately  the  phonograph  was  out  of 
order  when  I  made  my  visit.] 

(Can  you  stay  a  while  longer?) 

Yes,  I  am  listening. 

[There  is  a  little  talk  here  about  a  sister  in 
the  body.] 

You  have  a  sister  here  in  this  world  whom 
I  have  met. 

(What  is  her  name,  do  you  know?) 

No, —  Hiram  knows;  at  the  moment  I 
could  not  tell  you,  but  he  knows,  and  perhaps 
Rector  will  tell  you  what  her  name  is.  I  re- 
member I  was  introduced  to  her  some  time 
ago,  and  she  is  a  beautiful  spirit. 

[This  refers  to  an  older  sister,  named 
Laura,  who  died  in  1881,  thirteen  years 
before  I  became  acquainted  with  my  com- 
municator.] 

Then  I  have  met  your  father.  He  was  a 
peculiar  man,  wasn't  he? 

[Brief  talk  about  my  own  family] 

I   like  your  father.     He   is  a   very  strong 


172      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

individuality,  and  he  made  his  mistakes  like 
other  men  in  the  earthly  world,  but  he  is  a 
true  spirit  and  he  loves  you  all  dearly. 

[My  father  was  "peculiar,"  a  "strong  in- 
dividuality," and  "  made  mistakes."  He 
passed  out  four  years  before  I  knew  my  com- 
municator.] 

(Was  your  mother  your  guiding  spirit  all 
through  your  life  here?) 

Yes,  and  a  dear  one  she  was. 

(Did  you  recognize  her  as  soon  as  you  saw 
her?) 

She  helped  me,  she  showed  me  the  way,  she 
stood  at  my  chair,  the  chair  I  used  to  sit  in, 
she  stood  beside  me  when  I  passed  out. 

(Does  she  know  me?) 

Yes,  you  may  rest  assured  that  if  I  have 
had  anything  to  do  about  it  she  does  know 
you. 

•  ••••• 

[In  speaking  of  my  private  work,  I  say:] 
(You  must  not  get  discouraged  if  I  get  dis- 
couraged, will  you?) 

Not  at  all.  That  is  not  like  me,  is  it? 
Didn't  I  have  courage  to  the  last?  Ask  me 
all  you  wish.  My  thoughts  keep  clear,  as 
you  ask  your  questions  so  clearly  and  beauti- 
fully that  they  are  not  confusing  to  me.  If 
you  were  to  say,  "  Now,  General,  I  want  you 
to  find  a  name  for  me,  get  it  now  if  you  can," 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        173 

—  in  searching  for  that  name,  or  switching 
my  thoughts  from  the  track  on  which  they  are 
flowing  at  the  present  time,  over  which  they 
are  flowing,  it  would  confuse  me  so  that  I 
should  lose  the  whole  thread  of  my  individ- 
uality and  thought. 

The  moment  I  entered  this  life  I  was  told 
by  Imperator:  "  You  have  just  opened  your 
life  and  your  life  is  in  the  beginning.  You 
have  much  to  do  with  a  friend  whom  you  have 
in  a  sense  left  behind."  .  .  .  Then  it 
dawned  upon  me  what  he  meant.  I  said: 
"  I  know  what  you  mean;  you  refer  to  the 
actual  truth  of  a  vague  idea;  it  is  going  to  be  a 
reality," — an  idea  which  crossed  my  mind  be- 
fore my  illness.  It  passed  through  my  mind, 
the  thought,  before  my  illness,  as  I  loved 
poetry,  reading  books,  like  yourself,  every- 
thing,—  it  crossed  my  mind  many  times,  and 
the  desire  that  I  might  be  qualified  to  write. 
When  I  entered  this  life  Imperator  pointed 
those  things  out  to  me.  He  made  it  clear  to 
me  that  it  was  possible  for  me  to  return  and 
help  you  and  that  we  might  do  this  thing 
together. 

Now  of  course  I  cannot  say  how  long  the 
Light  will  remain  in  the  body,  or  what  the 
conditions  are  surrounding  the  Light,  but  I  do 
know  this,    that    conjointly    and  together  on 


i74      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

earth  they  have  prayed  and  are  praying  and 
giving  peace  and  restriction  to  the  Light  for 
a  few  who  are  privileged  to  use  it  and  receive 
messages  through  it.  Therefore  I  am  one 
who  is  privileged,  for  which  I  am  most 
grateful. 

(Of  course  I  do  not  want  this  wholly  for 
my  selfish  pleasure.  I  want  it  to  be  of  some  use 
to  the  world,  my  coming  here  to  see  you.) 

It  should  be,  and  if  others  would  think,  like- 
wise there  would  not  be  such  a  vague  mystery 
about  it  all,  as  I  used  to  think  when  I  was  in 
the  body;  there  was  a  vague  sort  of  unknow- 
able mystery. 

(The  time  is  passing.  I  must  not  keep  you 
too  long.) 

I  must  not  remain  too  long,  but  Rector 
stands  here  ready  to  take  me  away,  to  assist 
me  out,  that  no  harm  may  befall  the  instru- 
ment through  which  I  work. 

Tell  me  about  little  Augustus. 
(Augustus?     Which  one?) 
I  mean  the  little  fellow,  the  one  they  called 
—  it  is  not  really  his  name. 

(Oh  he  is  all  right,  very  pretty.) 

But  they  call  me  now  and  I  must  go.  I 
must  not  abuse  my  privileges.  God  bless  you 
and  be  with  you. 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        175 

(Good-bye.) 

You  know  I  am  Martin? 

(Oh,  yes!) 

Close 

SITTING  OF  MARCH    1 3,    I9O5 

[There  is  very  little  that  can  be  quoted 
from  this  sitting.  It  is  a  mixture  of  advice, 
prophecy,  encouragement  and  reproof,  on  the 
part  of  both  Rector  and  my  communicator, 
relating  to  the  carrying  on  of  my  work  and  to 
my  condition  of  mind  generally.  Some  of 
the  remarks  of  my  communicator  are,  how- 
ever, so  characteristically  vigorous  that  I 
cannot  refrain  from  giving  a  few  of  them  as 
disconnected  extracts.] 

The  General 

Well,  well,  well!  Will  wonders  ever 
cease !     Is  that  you  ? 

(Why,  yes,  don't  you  know  me?) 
Well,  I  guess  I  do. 
(Is  this  you,  General?) 
Yes,  that  is  right. 

I  seem  sometimes  to  see  your  fits  of  dis- 
couragement. 

(Yes.) 

I  do  not  like  it.  I  passed  through  life,  I 
think,  with  a  brave  and  a  stout  heart.     Many 


176      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

disappointments  and  trials  came  to  my  life, 
but  I  never  relinquished  my  hold,  the  hold 
upon  my  faith  and  trust  and  hope,  all  through 
my  life,  did  I  ? 

(No,  I  think  not.) 

[He  had  a  faith  of  some  kind,  which 
carried  him  through  to  the  very  end  without 
complaint.] 


Now  I  called  upon  these  helpers  and  these 
holy  fathers  to  bring  you  here  that  we  might 
clear  up  some  of  these  little  cobwebs  in  your 
brain. 

(Well,  clear  them  up,  I  wish  you  would.) 

I  dislike  the  sort  of  discontented  thoughts. 
I  dislike  the  feeling  that  there  is  no  time,  and 
a  waste  of  energy,  a  waste  of  life,  a  waste  of 
material,  a  waste  of  everything.  Now  that  is 
not  true  at  all. 

I  thought  you  were  an  idiot,  in  a  sense,  be- 
cause you  believed  in  the  eternal  life,  but  how 
dense  my  mind  was,  how  weak,  how  unchari- 
table !  But  you  will  forgive  me,  you  do  for- 
give me? 

(Yes.) 

You  understand,  but  it  was  you  that  were 
wise  and  I  was  weak,  yet  I  was  your  friend. 

(I  know  that,  General.) 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS         177 

I  am  your  friend  to-day.  I  look  the  same, 
and  if  your  spiritual  eyes  could  be  opened  you 
would  see  me  standing  here  registering  my 
thoughts  through  the  ether  with  which  this 
receptacle  is  filled. 

I  can't  have  any  thoughts  of  discourage- 
ment. Life  is  too  serious,  it  is  too  beautiful, 
too  strong,  too  great  a  thing  to  allow  the 
thoughts  of  discouragement  to  enter  such  a 
brain  as  yours.  I  am  astonished!  I  am 
astonished!  "  Oh,"  I  said,  "if  I  only  get 
hold  of  her  again  I  shall  picture  life  as  it  really 
is  and  not  as  she  thinks."  What  do  you  sup- 
pose you  were  created  for?  What  do  you 
suppose  you  were  put  into  the  earthly  life  for? 
You  have  not  half  carried  out  your  mission. 
It  is  only  in  the  beginning,  and  it  is  a  useless 
waste  of  thought  for  you  to  think  otherwise. 
Are  you  going  to  profit  by  what  I  am  telling 
you? 

(Yes,  indeed.) 

I  don't  know  whether  I  was  a  good 
preacher  or  not,  but  however,  I  know  one 
thing,  you  usually  profited  by  my  advice,  and 
I  think  you  will  do  it  now.  In  any  case  I 
shall  watch  you  and  I  shall  reach  you  now  by 
sending  you  a  message  and  you  will  know  how 
things  are  turning. 


178       BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

[In  omitted  portion  he  speaks  of  his 
intention  of  sending  a  message  occasionally 
"  through  that  gentleman  that  comes  here," 
meaning,  of  course,  Dr.  Hodgson.] 

Why,  the    idea    of    a  physically 

well  woman  of  your  years  and  experience 
getting  into  such  a  state  of  mind !  Why,  it  is 
dreadful,  and  if  there  was  no  charity  in  the 
world  there  would  be  no  love,  and  if  there  was 
no  love  there  would  be  no  life,  do  you 
know  that  ?  And  without  —  do  you  remem- 
ber somewhere  in  the  book  we  used  to  call  the 
Bible  it  says  unless  ye  have  charity? 

(Yes.) 

Can  you  quote  it? 

("  Unless  ye  have  charity  ye  shall  be  as 
sounding  brass  and  tinkling  cymbals,"  I 
think.) 

Yes,  now  register  that  in  your  mind. 

(Do  you  suppose  you  will  be  able  to  come 
here  again  this  season?) 

Oh,  yes,  I  think  so.  The  time,  I  don't  know 
about  that.  You  will  have  to  ask  them,  and 
they  will  give  you  some  definite  idea.  That 
is  not  in  my  hands.  I  only  know  that  when 
the  Light  is  burning  and  I  see  the  Light,  and 
the  ether  from  our  world  is  sufficiently  clear,  I 
know  I  can  enter  it  and  speak  with  you,  which 
is  a  perfect  delight.     That  makes  our  life  on 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        179 

this  side  complete  and  perfect.  You  under- 
stand that.  Now  I  want  you  to  talk  to  me, 
but  I  did  feel,  oh  if  I  could  only  reach  you 
once  more. 

(Yes.  Wait  a  minute.  You  know  that 
the  time  has  got  to  be  short  this  morning, 
don't  you?) 

Short?     What  do  you  mean? 

(Why,  we  can  only  have  about  half  the  time 
that  we  usually  have,  because  the  Light  has 
not  been  in  a  good  condition  in  the  physical, 
and  —  is  Rector  there  by  you?) 

Yes,  what  shall  I  say  to  him?  You 
can  see  that  the  hands  are  always  going  out 
to  us  in  touch.  We  are  never  left  alone, 
I  am  never  left  alone  when  I  am  speaking 
with  you.  Imperator  comes  and  goes,  keeps 
coming  and  going,  to  see  that  all  is  going  on 
well,  and  Rector  or  Prudens  ,  some  of  them 
stand  here  and  watch  me  to  see  how  I  get 
along,  and  if  I  fail  for  words  or  light  they 
supply  it.  It  comes  over  a  line.  Say  what 
you  want  to.  I  think  it  is  a  pity  to  have  you 
distressed  about  the  time,  but  I  don't  know 
about  these  conditions  so  much,  about  the 
earthly  side,  but  you  will  have  to  ask  them,  I 
think. 

(Well,  now  I  have  been  ordered  to  tell 
Rector  that  three-quarters  of  the  time  has  gone 
and  he  will  have  only  sixteen  minutes    more 


i8o      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

and  then  I  shall  have  to  leave,  and  if  I  do  not 
I  will  not  be  allowed  to  come  again.  Do  you 
understand  that?) 

You  mean  to  say  that  I  must  go  now? 

(No,  but  I  want  you  to  tell  Rector,  who  is 
there,  just  what  I  have  said,  will  you?) 

I  will  speak  to  him  —  just  one  minute. 

[Very  brief  pause.  Evidently  speaking  to 
Rector.     Lips  moving  slightly.] 

Well,  what  do  you  think  he  says? 

(I  don't  know.) 

Why,  he  says  he  does  not  see  how  he  can 
open  and  close  the  Light  in  so  short  a  time  as 
that. 

[I  explain  a  little  further  the  necessity  for 
being  brief,  and  there  is  a  little  more  talk.] 

(Well  now,  General,  I  am  afraid  you  will 
have  to  go.) 

[Still  more  talk] 

(Now  you  will  have  to  go,  you  will  have  to 
go, —  good-bye.) 

Don't  say  good-bye  to  me!  I  am  going 
out  and  I  wTill  stand  aside  right  here. 

[Rector  returns  for  a  few  moments.] 

Close 

SITTING  OF  APRIL   1 9,   1905 

[This  sitting  was  largely  taken  up  with 
matters  pertaining  to  my  own  family,  one 
member  of  my    family   being    very  ill    at  the 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        181 

time.  I  had  clear  communications  from  my 
father  and  from  my  sister  Laura,  mentioned 
in  sitting  of  Dec.  20,  1904.  It  seemed  to  me 
that  Laura,  for  the  first  and  only  time,  spoke 
directly  through  the  machine,  so  called, —  that 
is,  spoke  directly  to  Rector,  who  repeated  her 
words.  For  she  seemed  surprised  at  the  ease 
with  which  communication  could  be  carried  on, 
and  said:  "  I  want  to  tell  you  how  clear  I 
am,  and  what  a  perfectly  clear  line  I  am  work- 
ing over.  I  can  see  so  much  better  than  I 
ever  did  before."  Upon  this  Rector  imme- 
diately interjected  the  following  remark:  "  I 
am  going  to  say  this,  that  I  have  never,  I 
think,  seen  the  Light  clearer  than  it  is  this 
day."  When  I  addressed  my  sister  saying: 
"Now,  Laura,"  she  interrupted  with:  UI 
hear  your  voice  like  a  trumpet."  When  I 
asked  her  to  take  a  message  to  my  father,  she 
said:  "I  don't  know, —  if  I  could  turn 
round  and  go  out  just  a  little  distance  on  this 
cord  I  could  bring  him  here.  I  will  go  and 
see."  And  then  my  father  himself  seemed  to 
speak  a  few  words  directly.  Other  communi- 
cators were  somewhat  crowded  out  by  relatives 
on  this  occasion.] 

The  General 

[In    speaking    about    my    coming    summer 
vacation,  I  say:] 

(How  about  Poland  Spring?) 


182      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

Oh!  [apparently  laughing]  Well,  could 
you  go  there? 

(I  could  go  there  for  a  short  time.  I  think. 
I  will  try  and  arrange  to  go  to  Greenacre  a 
short  time  and  then  go  to  your  old  stamping 
ground,  Poland  Spring,  where  the  water  is, 
and  the  woods.) 

And  the  Poland  Spring  House,  you  re- 
member? 

(Yes.) 

Oh,  I  know  so  well.  These  old  haunts  last 
in  my  memory  even  in  the  spiritual  world. 
The  only  thing  I  regret  is  the  absolute  im- 
becility on  my  part  of  the  truth  of  an  eternal 
life,  but  sometimes  we  have  not  the  keenest 
spiritual  perception  into  the  higher  things 
while  in  the  mortal  body,  especially  when  the 
mind  is  troubled  and  disturbed  with  all  that  the 
earthly  world  places  before  us,  and  while  life 
[lasts]  we  have  not  the  time,  perhaps,  or  the 
keen  appreciation,  and  I  may  say  apprehension, 
of  the  possibilities  of  the  future.  Therefore  I 
made  my  mistakes  in  that  line, —  not  exactly 
mistakes,  but  I  lost  a  great  deal. 

(Yes.) 

But  my  life  was  a  busy  one,  as  you  know. 
Tell  me  about  —  how  is  little  Gus,  and 
Everett,  and  the  children  and  all?  They  are 
doing  splendidly,   aren't  they? 

(Well,  I  think  they  are.) 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        183 

(Do  you  think  I  will  not  be  able  to  come 
again  this  season?) 

Well,  I  am  not  so  sure.  They  said: 
11  Now  if  you  want  to  talk  with  your  friend 
again  we  shall  give  you  the  privilege  of  doing 
it  and  the  opportunity  will  present  itself  imme- 
diately," and  then  they  said:  "We  will  ap- 
point the  third  day,"  and  so  on,  and  then  they 
made  it  known  to  somebody  in  the  body,  and 
they  said:  "Because  we  cannot  at  the 
moment  see  the  probability  of  it  again."  But 
if  it  is  possible  and  you  are  called  for,  you 
know  you  have  got  to  come. 

(I  gave  up  a  good  deal  this  time  to  come.) 

Yes,  I  know,  but  it  could  not  be  avoided, 
and  it  was  better  so,  as  you  can  see.  And 
haven't  you  found  them  very    clear  to-day? 

(Yes,  very.) 

And  I  myself,  the  only  thing  I  regret  is  that 
I  have  to  cease  to  speak.  .  .  .  Now  I  am 
going.  I  am  not  going  to  say  good-bye,  be- 
cause I  hate  the  word. 

Close 

SITTING  OF  JUNE  21,   1905 

What  is  life  is  love,  and  what  is  love  is  life, 
and  what  is  life  and  love  is  spirit.  I  have 
called  you  here  again.  I  have  felt  that  I 
could  not  allow  the    Light    to  close    without 


i84      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

meeting  you  once  more.  .  .  .  You  have 
freed  me,  did  you  know  it?  Nothing  on  the 
earthly  side  hampers  or  troubles  me  in  the 
least.  I  am  as  free  as  it  is  possible  for  a  spirit 
to  be. 


Your  father  sends  a  great  deal  of  love  to 
you,  and  also  your  sister.  She  is  so  much 
freer  since  the  last  conversation  with  you  here 
that  she  is  the  happiest  girl  you  ever  saw. 
You  have  helped  them  greatly  by  coming 
here.  You  have  no  idea  of  the  relief  to  the 
spirit  these  communications  give. 

(Give  my  love  to  them  both.) 

I  understand  that  they  are  going  to  make 
better  conditions  after  they  return. 

["  They "  means  the  spirits  in  charge. 
"  After  they  return  "  means  after  the  vaca- 
tion season.] 

I  understand  that  Imperator  has  made 
special  arrangements  —  do  you  know  what 
they  call  an  hour? 

(Yes.) 

They  are  going  to  prolong  it  an  hour  and  a 
quarter  at  the  very  least,  and  they  are  going 
to  make  the  earthly  friend  sign  to  their  ar- 
rangements — 

["  Earthly  friend  "  is  the  expression  which 
was  commonly  used  by  the  trance  personalities 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        185 

in     referring    specifically  to   Dr.    Hodgson.] 

—  because  right  in  the  middle  of  conversa- 
tion, sometimes  when  the  best  sentiments  are 
to  be  given,  the  Light  is  shut  off,  and  this  is 
not  quite  right.  I  lose  the  counts  of  time, 
only  that  the  man  who  has  charge  — 

(Hodgson?) 

—  Hodgson,  he  keeps  talking  about  hours 
and  fifteen  minutes,  hours  and  three-quarters, 
and  so  on,  and  that  keeps  it  fresh  in  the  mem- 
ories of  the  controls. 

(Tell  Rector  that  there  are  fifteen  minutes 
—  the  rule.) 

Who  says  that? 

(Hodgson  says  that.) 

[Meaning  that  I  had  been  directed  to  bring 
the  sitting  to  a  close  at  a  certain  time.] 

Does  he?  Well,  he  is  a  good  fellow.  He 
receives  much  help.  I  will  tell  you  a  secret  — 
he  is  inclined  to  be  jealous,  a  little  bit  hostile 
if  he  cannot  have  his  way,  but  they  manage 
him  over  here  beautifully.  He  knows  that 
whatever  they  say  is  right  and  he  must  obey,  if 
we  return.  Do  you  know  that  I  feel  some- 
times it  is  possible  that  we  may  not  get  at  this 
Light,  and  then  what  shall  we  do?  Impera- 
tor  has  been  trying  to  make  rules  and  regula- 
tions that  when  the  Light  is  dim  and  unsatis- 
factory he  will  only  see  those  who  really  de- 
serve and  let  the  testing  go,  fearing  that  the 


i86      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

Light  may  give  way  entirely.  But  at  the 
present  time  through  his  prayers  he  has  kept 
it  very  well  and  done  well.  Does  not  that 
in  itself  show  the  power  of  spirit? 

Close 


SITTING  OF  DECEMBER  20,   1905 
The  General 

Well,  are  you  really  here  again?  I  see,  I 
hear,  I  understand.  Your  spirit  looks  clearer 
to  me.     Are  you  not  happier? 

(This  is  the  General,  is  it  not?) 

Yes,  and  no  one  else. 

(I  want  you  to  understand,  and  Rector  and 
all  of  them,  that  I  fully  and  most  thoroughly 
appreciate  the  privilege  of  coming  here  to 
see  you.) 

Divine  Providence  governeth  all  things 
well,  and  as  I  must  say,  in  harmony  with  these 
good  friends  here,  that  if  you  have  faith  and 
trust,  all  things  are  mapped  out  for  good  and 
will  be  seen  by  yourself  as  being  managed  by 
the  Unseen,  in  the  main. 

(Yes.) 

You  understand? 

(Yes.) 

And   what    is    God's   will,    will    be    done. 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        187 

Therefore  your  coming  here  is  a  privilege  to 
us  as  well  as  to  yourself,  and  it  is  in  obedience 
to  His  will. 

["  Obedience,"  stumblingly,  first,  then 
"  obevance  "  or  "abeyance  "] 

(Yes.) 

How  can  we  manage  it  otherwise?  What 
can  we   do  when  you  are  summoned? 

(You  may  be  sure  I  shall  be  on  hand.) 

And  the  way  will  be  opened  for  you.  Let 
me  speak  on,  because  we  are  limited  on  our 
Light.  That  is,  the  power  gives  out. 
I  am  very  anxious,  since  I  have  learned  so 
much  about  this  beautiful  life  and  realize  the 
truth  and  reality  of  it  by  having  the  actual  ex- 
perience, that  the  world  should  through  your 
hand  and  brain  be  made  cognizant  in  part  of 
the  unfoldment,  of  the  true  development  of 
the  soul  after  it  leaves  its  environment;  that  it 
is  an  active  consciousness,  that  it  is  in  the  state 
of  higher  development,  that  it  is  able  to  reach 
the  physical  plane  and  act  through  such  voices 
as  your  own,  we  would  say,  to  give  expression 
and  utterance  to  the  truth  and  reality  of  in 
part  what  this  life  contains.  Is  that  clear  to 
you? 

(Yes.  Well,  of  course  I  cannot  know 
about  your  life  except  as  you  give  it  to  me.) 

But  through  your  own  unfoldment,  as  you 
say,  you  receive  constantly  help  and  impres- 
sions from  me  in  this  life. 


188      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

(Yes.) 

You  cannot  work  alone  without  this  help 
which  you  receive  perhaps  unconsciously  to 
yourself,  yet  not  unconsciously  to  —  your  sub- 
conscious mind  receives  the  impressions  which 
I  give  you  and  they  are  unfolded  through  the 
conscious  mind.  Therefore  you  give  expres- 
sion to  the  very  things  which  I  impress  your 
mind  with. 

•  ••••• 

Tell  me  about  the  boy. 

(Well,  what  do  you  see  about  him?) 

[I  have  in  mind  a  nephew  of  mine,  who 
lives  in  California,  in  regard  to  whom  I  have 
had  many  communications,  but  his  reply  in- 
dicates that  he  is  inquiring  about  his  own  boy, 
and  I  say:] 

(Do  you  mean  my  boy  or  yours?) 

I  mean  mine.  ...  In  regard  to  your 
boy,  he  is  a  long  distance  in  the  earthly  world, 
is  he  not? 

[This  thought  was  evidently  suggested  by 
something  which  was  said  about  his  own  boy 
being  nearer  to  me.] 

And  is  that  not  his  child? 

(What  child?) 

Has  he  not  a  child  or  two? 

(He  has  one,  or  has  had  one.) 

Is  this  not  his? 

(Where  is  it?) 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS       189 

Why,  isn't  it  here?  Isn't  this  Max's  boy? 
His  name  is  Plumb. 

[My  nephew's  name] 

(Well,  that  is  his  child,  yes.) 

Well,  I  wanted  to  tell  you  about  him,  be- 
cause he  came  up  to  me,  and  as  I  found  him  I 
said,  M  Why,  this  child  certainly  belongs  to 
my  friend  in  the  body,"  because  he  was  so  con- 
stantly —  do  you  remember  a  spirit  named 
Laura  ? 

(Yes,  my  sister.) 

Yes,  with  her. 

(Well,  is  it  my  sister,  or  some  one  else 
named  Laura?) 

Yes,  it  is  another,  it  is  somebody  else,  but  I 
told  you  about  her,  did  I  not? 

(I  think  it  must  be  some  relation.  I  wish 
you  could  see.) 

Well,  they  are  both  here,  the  lady  and  the 
child.  And  the  child  leaving  the  body  was  a 
great  disappointment  to  him,  but  it  was  better 
for  the  child  and  infinitely  better  for  him  and 
for  the  mother. 

(Why?) 

Because  the  developments  would  have  been 
very  painful.  God  knows  best,  and  to  un- 
fold His  truths  would  take  me  a  long  time. 

(Well,  we  won't  try  now.  Is  that  my 
grandmother  who  has  the  baby?) 

Yes,  it  is  your  sister's  grandmother  —  that 


190      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

would  be  yours,  of  course,  certainly  —  well, 
you  know  we  look  at  the  connections  here. 
She  is  an  elderly  lady,  an  elderly  lady,  but  in 
the  spirit  no  one  is  elderly.  Perhaps  you  can 
understand  contradictory  statements,  if  pos- 
sible.    Her  name  was  Laura. 

(Yes,  that  is  it.) 

She  is  very  much  attached  to  that  child. 

(Well,  I  have  heard  through  another  Light 
that  this  grandmother  of  mine  had  this  child. 
Now  have  you  seen  me  with  that  Light  lately 
at  all?) 

Yes,  yes — [quite  eagerly] — what  Light 
was  that?  I  have  been  trying  to  give  you  a 
password. 

(At  that  time?) 

Yes.  You  did  not  seem  to  understand  it 
some  way. 

[This  child;  a  babe  of  nine  months  whom  I 
had  never  -seen,  died  Sept.  25,  1905,  three 
months  previous  to  date  of  this  sitting,  no 
sitting  with  Mrs.  Piper  having  taken  place  in 
the  interim,  and  this  is  the  first  reference  by 
her  to  it.  On  Dec.  8  of  this  same  month,  less 
than  two  weeks  previous  to  date  of  this  sitting, 
I  had  a  sitting  with  the  psychic  known  as  Mrs. 
S.,  who  told  me  that  this  child  was  with  my 
grandmother,  and  that  my  grandmother  and 
my  communicator  were  acquaintances  and 
friends.     I  took  it  to  be  my  mother's  mother, 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        191 

as  my  father's  mother  died  when  I  was  a  mere 
child.  My  mother's  mother  I  knew  well,  as 
she  did  not  pass  away  until  I  had  grown  to  be 
a  young  woman.  She  was  a  reader  of  books 
on  Spiritism  and  was  much  interested  in  the  sub- 
ject, though  she  had  few  sympathizers  among 
her  own  friends.  She  is  the  grandmother  who 
would  be  most  likely  to  have  the  child,  and 
her  name  was  Laura. 

It  will  be  seen  that  when  my  communicator 
asks:  "Do  you  remember  a  spirit  named 
Laura,"  I  immediately  reply:  'Yes,  my 
sister,"  the  sister  being  the  first  thought  in  my 
mind.  This  positive  reply  might  well  have 
switched  my  communicator's  ideas  oft  the  right 
track,  but  when  I  say:  "  Is  it  my  sister,  or 
some  one  else  named  Laura,"  he  replies: 
"  Yes,  it  is  another,  it  is  somebody  else,  but  I 
told  you  about  her,  did  I  not?"  I  do  not 
know  to  what  this  "  I  told  you  about  her  " 
can  possibly  refer,  unless  it  means  that  my 
communicator  was  actually  present  at  my 
sitting  with  Mrs.  S.  two  weeks  before,  and 
that  he  was  the  one  who  impressed  it  upon  the 
psychic  to  assure  me  that  the  child  was  with 
my  grandmother.] 

But  I  wanted  to  tell  you  that  this  little  child 
is  very  happy  and  is  in  a  home  of  its  own  with 
these  people  and  that  they  are  taking  good 
care  of  it,  and  that  there  is  nothing  lost. 


192      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

(You  tell  both  those  Lauras  that  I  am  much 
pleased  to  know  that  the  child  is  with  them 
and  will  so  report  to  the  parents.) 

That  is  right. 

Why,  spirit,  spirit  travels,  remains  con- 
scious, feels  out  to  its  friends,  reaches  them 
on  the  earthly  side,  but  there  are  some  things 
which  its  memory  cannot  and  does  not  wish  to 
retain.  There  are  pages  in  every  book,  of  life 
which  the  spirit  when  it  leaves  closes  that  book 
in  the  mortal  life,  it  would  like  to  forget,  and 
so  it  does.     Therefore  it  is  happier. 

(General,  are  you  in  a  sort  of  zone  around 
the  atmosphere  of  this  earth,  and  can  you  go 
to  other  planets  and  stars  if  you  wish?) 

Yes,  certainly,  and  now  there  is  a  case  here 
which  has  been  very  peculiar  and  perhaps  has 
been  commented  upon  in  the  mortal  body  — 
doubtless  it  has,  because  I  have  seen  this  man 
struggling  here  and  then  I  have  seen  him  de- 
part suddenly.  He  would  come  to  the  Light 
and  the  Light  would  not  be  open,  and  he 
would  take  his  departure  and  go  way  off  to 
another  country.  His  name  is  Myers,  or 
Myer. 

[I  think  my  communicator  in  life  knew 
nothing  about  F.  W.  H.  Myers,  of  England, 
who  died  in  1901,  the  year  preceding  that  in 
which  my  communicator  died.] 

And  he  comes  here,  he  finds  the  Light   un- 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        193 

open  —  a  very  active,  brilliant,  fine  man,  keen 
perceptions,  finest  type  of  mind  —  and  he 
comes  here,  he  finds  the  Light  not  burning,  he 
departs,  he  goes  and  looks  after  his  family  — 
he  has  a  family  in  the  mortal  body  —  he  goes 
to  find  them  and  remains  with  them,  and  often- 
times when  the  Light  is  burning  he  fails  to  ap- 
pear, but  you  can  understand  that  because  of 
his  absence  from  the  Light  and  being  among 
those  he  loves. 

( Well,  does  he  go  to  other  worlds?) 

He  goes  to  other  worlds  and  other  planets. 
He  is  constantly  studying  —  he  is  a  great 
student  —  he  is  studying  the  conditions  and 
the  changes  and  the  whys  and  the  wherefores 
of  communication,  and  the  laws  of  life  in  the 
spirit,  in  the  body,  and  the  ways  of  God  and 
the  ways  of  man  and  spirit  in  general. 

(Now  I  am  afraid  you  will  have  to  go.) 

Shall  I  have  to  go  ?  — 

(Tell  Rector—) 

—  but  with  you   I  shall  be  — 
(Tell  Rector—) 

—  the  way  will  be  open  when  I  can  return 
again  soon  and  finish  my  conversation,  for  I 
have  much  to  tell  you  which  I  cannot  utter 
to-day. 

Close 

Note.  This  sitting  took  place  on  the  morn- 
ing of  the   day  on   which   Richard   Hodgson 


194      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

died.     His  death  occurred  in  the  late  after- 
noon or  early  evening. 

SITTING   OF'  APRIL    1 7,    1906 

[This  sitting  took  place  in  my  own  private 
room,  near  Copley  square,  Boston.  The 
"  earthly  friend  "  means  Dr.  Hodgson.] 

The  General 

Hello,  hello,  hello!  Well,  well,  well! 
What  have  you  got  to  say  to  me  ? 

(Who  is  this?) 

Well,  well,  well !  Hello,  Anne!  Where 
did  you  come  from?  Where  did  you  come 
from?  I  should  like  to  know  where  we  are, 
where  you  are,  where  we  all  are,  where  I  am. 
Well,  well,  well!  I  am  the  General.  Oh, 
dear!  Oh,  dear!  And  you  did  not  know  me, 
did  you?  Well,  I  never  thought  the  time 
would  come  when  you  would  not  know  me. 

(Well,  wait  a  minute,  General.) 

What  are  you  doing,  writing? 

(Yes.) 

Oh,  I  see.  Well,  well,  well  you  were  al- 
ways writing.  Were  you  ever  doing  anything 
else? 

(Now,  General — ) 

Yes,  yes! 

Tell  me  not  in  mournful  numbers, 
Life  is  but  an  empty  dream, 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        195 

And  the  soul  is  dead  that  slumbers, 
And  things  are  not  what  they  seem. 
Life  is  real,  life  is  earnest, 
And  the  grave  is  not  its  goal; 
Not  enjoyment  and  not  sorrow, 
Was  not  —  no  — 
Dust  thou  art,  to  dust  returnest, 
Was  not  spoken  of  the  soul. 

(You  have  not  forgotten  your  poetry,  have 
you?) 

No,  and  I  never  shall. 

(General  — ) 

Yes? 

It  matters  not  how  straight  the  gate, 
How  charged  with  punishments  the  scroll; 
I  am  master  of  my  fate, 
I  am  captain  of  my  soul. 

That  is  not  original,  but  I  love  it. 

(Now,  General,  do  you  knowr  you  spoke  so 
much  like  the  earthly  friend  when  you  first 
came  — ) 

Well,  he  was  right  beside  me,  and  he  was 
so  determined  that  he  would  speak  first,  I  was 
trying  to  see  if  I  could  not  get  him  to  give  his 
consent  to  let  me,  without  him,  and  he  first  en- 
tered and  then  he  stepped  aside  and  let  me 
enter,  and  that  was  how  that  happened  to  be. 

(Then  that  is  the  reason  I  did  not  quite 
recognize  you  at  first.) 

Well,  I  forgave  you  long  ago.      I  don't  lay 


196      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

that  up  against  you.  I  know  it  is  difficult  be- 
cause you  cannot  see  me.  You  see,  being  a 
spirit,  I  am  so  fine,  my  ethereal  body  is  fine  and 
so  finely  constructed  and  all,  that  you  cannot 
see  it  with  your  mortal  eye,  but  with  your 
spiritual  eye  you  could  see  me  plainly.  Are 
the  children  all  well?  Are  you  well?  Busy? 
Busy  as  a  bee. 

(Well,  wait  a  moment,  General.  I  am 
sorry  I  cannot  talk  faster  — ) 

Talk  and  write  too?  Well,  the  body  has 
its  limitations,  you  know. 

(Yes,  I  guess  that  is  so.  Now  you  said, 
"  where  are  we  all."  Now  I  want  to  know  if 
you  know  where  you  are,  actually  are,  in  this 
spot  this  moment.) 

At  the  present  moment? 

(Yes.) 

Well,  may  I  look  around  a  bit  and  see  ? 

(Yes.) 

Well,  now  just  give  me  time. 

[Fingers  of  hand  touch  my  face,  rest  a 
moment  over  my  own  hand,  then  find  cabinet 
size  photograph  of  my  communicator  in  gilt 
frame  which  stands  on  table  within  easy  reach. 
This  occupies  only  a  minute  or  two.  Then 
emphatically:] 

Ha !  ha.  You  can't  fool  me !  I  am  in 
your  room !     That  is  myself,  that  is  myself/ 

(Yes.) 

I  am  in    your    room.     Well,    I  am    more 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS       197 

pleased  than  I  can  say.  This  is  an  unexpected 
pleasure  and  a  perfect  delight  to  me.  Well, 
I  must  say  I  am  happier  for  it.  How  does  it 
happen?  Perhaps  you  need  not  take  the  time 
to  explain,  perhaps  somebody  else  will  do  it 
for  me,  but  I  am  just  a  little  bit  in  a  quandary 
to  know  how  it  happened.  Oh,  what  a  fool 
I  was!  I  did  not  know,  I  did  not  realize  that 
I  should  live  again,  and  of  all  things  I  least 
expected  to  return. 

(The  daughters  of  the  Light  were  ill,  and 
so  the  Light  has  remained  away  from  them, 
and  the  meetings  have  been  in  this  room  of 
mine  for  some  little  time  past.) 

That  is  the  reason  why  I  was  so  attracted 
here  that  I  begged  Rector  to  arrange  for  me 
to  speak  to  you. 

(I  see.) 

I  had  all  I  could  do  to  keep  from  inter- 
rupting each  time  lately. 

(Yes.) 

Well,  that  accounts  for  it.  lou  see  that 
helps  me  to  understand.  Thank  you  very 
much. 

[This  was  the  first  private  sitting  of  my 
own  which  took  place  after  the  passing  out  of 
Dr.  Hodgson,  although  I  had  attended  many 
sittings  during  the  winter  as  assistant  and  re- 
corder, and  had  been  recognized  by  the 
Hodgson  personality,  for  it  must  be  under- 
stood that  Dr.  Hodgson  purported  to  return 


198      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

through  Mrs.  Piper  very  soon  after  his  death. 
That  is  a  matter,  however,  which  I  am  leaving 
for  others  to  present.  But  his  manner  of 
salutation  was  something  like  what  appears  in 
the  opening  remarks  of  this  sitting.  In  fact, 
the  two  personalities  seem  to  be  blended,  prob- 
ably indistinguishably  so  to  the  reader  to 
whom  both  men  were  strangers  when  in  life, 
though  the  peculiar  characteristics  of  each  are 
quite  apparent  to  me.  The  profusion  of  ex- 
clamatory greetings  is  Hodgsonian,  while  the 
irrepressible  bursting  into  rythm  is  Mar- 
tinian.] 

Now  haven't  you  got  anything  to  say  to  me  ? 
I  want  you  to  say  lots  of  things  to  me. 

(You  will  let  Hodgson  come  a  few  moments 
before  — ) 

Oh,  he  is  coming,  you  cannot  get  rid  of  him 
so  easy.  You  know  this  is  a  great  big  tele- 
phone and  I  am  speaking  into  it. 

(Explain  it  more,  will  you?) 

Yes,  I  will.  The  telephone  is  filled  with 
ether  from  our  world,  and  it  is  a  receptacle,  a 
vessel,  and  we  blow  into  it  just  exactly  as  you 
would  blow  a  bellows,  the  air  through  a 
bellows  to  an  open  fire,  into  an  open  fire,  and 
then  we  attach  a  cord,  an  ethereal  cord,  to  that 
and  talk  right  over  that  cord  right  into  the  ma- 
chine, and  make  this  machine  utter  our 
thoughts. 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        199 

(I  see.) 

•  ■ 

(Now,  General, — ) 

Hodgson  is  coming! 

(Tell  him  to  wait  a  moment.) 

Yes,  good  fellow, —  I  am  glad  to  know  him. 

[Dr.  Hodgson  and  my  communicator  were 
not  acquainted  during  life,  though  each  knew 
something  about  the  other.] 

There  is  a  lot  more  I  wanted  to  say,  but  I 
am  afraid  I  won't  have  the  strength. 

(Well,  the  time  is  very  nearly  up,  and  I 
suppose  I  must  speak  with  Hodgson.  At  any 
rate,  I  want  to.) 

Well,  he  is  going  to,  but  I  am  going  to  see 
you  again  sometime.  ...  I  suppose  I 
must  step  aside.  .  .  .  This  is  the  most 
wonderful  thing  in  the  world  to-day. 
I  must  step  aside  and  let  this  gentleman 
speak.  Good-bye.  It  is  au  revoir,  not  good- 
bye. 

(Good-bye,  General.) 

["  This  gentleman  "  means  Dr.  Hodgson, 
with  whom  I  hold  a  brief  conversation,  which 
I  have  thought  best  not  to  insert.] 

Subliminal 

[When  Mrs.  Piper  is  coming  out  of  trance 
there  are  brief  remarks  and  broken  utterances, 


200      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

some  of  them  very  clear,  some  of  them  in  a 
whisper,  some  of  them  quite  indistinct  and 
wholly  unintelligible.  The  appearance  is  as  if 
she  were  taking  a  last  look  at  spirits  standing 
near,  and  as  if  these  spirits,  while  she  is  re- 
turning to  her  body,  were  impressing  upon  her 
mind  words  and  messages  for  her  to  repeat 
to  the  sitter.  Some  of  her  broken  utterances 
also  indicate  her  returning  perception  of  her 
surroundings  in  the  room  where  the  sitting  has 
taken  place.] 

Getting  dark.    They  are  all  going  away. 

[Muttering  something  unintelligible] 

I  wonder  what  Martin  has  his  hand  in  it  — 
General  Martin  is  —  I  don't  know  you  — 

[Looking  up  inquiringly] 

I  can't  hear  you  — 

[Making  great  effort  to  hear] 

What?  I  am  happier  for  it.  She'll  un- 
derstand. It  is  all  right  with  me.  I  hope  it 
is  with  her. 

[It  will  be  noted  that  "  I  am  happier  for  it  " 
is  the  same  phrase  as  that  used  by  my  com- 
municator through  the  trance,  as  if  he  were 
repeating  to  Mrs.  Piper's  returning  spirit 
some  of  the  same  language  used  to  me  while 
she  was  unconscious  of  what  was  being  trans- 
mitted through  her  organism.] 

Close 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS       201 

SITTING  OF  JUNE  6,   1906 

[Permission  had  been  given  for  my  sister 
Grace,  Mrs.  Moore,  to  accompany  me  on  this 
occasion.  She  was  present  at  the  opening  of 
the  sitting  and  at  its  close.] 

The  General 

(I  have  copies  of  all  that  you  have  said  to 
me  here,  and  I  do  not  think  it  will  all  be  pub- 
lished by  the  Society,  so  that  leaves  the  coast 
clear  for  me  to  publish  something  in  my  book, 
and  I  propose  to  do  that,  and  speak  of  your 
life  in  Boston.) 

Very  good.  I  should  like  that  very  much 
indeed,  because  I  do  not  care  now.  I  lived 
to  know  the  truth,  to  understand  the  truth 
and  to  speak  the  truth,  and  the  truth  will  live, 
and  I  am  not  ashamed  of  my  name  or  any- 
thing associated  or  connected  with  it,  and  the 
truth  will  bear  its  weight  throughout  the  uni- 
verse, and  I  think  it  is  better  to  be  frank  and 
open  and  honest  with  the  name. 

I  heard  a  little  music  in  your  room  the  other 

evening    and    I    heard    an    instrument    being 

played,  and  I  sat  in  a  large  chair  right  near 

the  table.     You  were  apparently  reclining. 

(Was  somebody  else  making  the  music?) 

Yes,    yes.     It    was    your    sister,    I    think. 


202      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

And  you  were  reclining,  and  I  was  sitting  in 
the  large  chair  and  listening. 

(That  was  lovely.) 

And  I  heard  it  all.     And  then  I  heard  — 

(Do  you  want  my  sister  to  come  in  the  room 
now?) 

I  am  afraid  it  will  interrupt  me.  I  heard 
"  Old  Oaken  Bucket  "  plainly. 

(Was  my  sister  playing  that  or  was  I?) 

You  were  playing  it. 

(Well,  that  is  one  of  my  favorites.) 

Well,  I  don't  know  it  at  all.  I  know  I 
heard  it.  I  heard  you  play  it.  I  caught  the 
air.  Then  I  heard  her  play  a  religious  thing, 
religious  piece. 

(Now,  General,  wait  a  moment.  My  sis- 
ter is  just  outside.  I  think  I  will  call  her  in, 
but  you  need  not  speak  to  her  unless  you 
wish.) 

I  am  afraid  it  will  interrupt  me.  I  thought 
it  might  interrupt  my  thoughts. 

(When  I  am  alone  in  my  room  I  sometimes 
sit  down  and  play  a  little  bit,  and  often  play 
"The  Old  Oaken  Bucket.") 

Yes,  yes,  I  hear  that.  Well,  I  heard  that. 
Then  I  heard  another  little  one  that  sounded 
like  "The  Suwanee  River." 

(I  did  not  play  it.) 

No,  your  sister.  She  played  a  few  bars  of 
it.     And  then  I  heard  a  waltz,  a  waltz  being 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS        203 

played.  I  think  she  has  a  very  pretty  touch, 
and  I  think  she  sings  a  little,  doesn't  she? 

(Oh,  yes.) 

But  why  doesn't  she  sing?  I  heard  her 
humming  but  not  much  singing  to  it. 

(Well,  her  throat  troubles  her  a  little  now.) 

She  is  not  well,  but  the  spirit  will  improve 
the  flesh. 

[I  do  not  play  much,  and  do  not  play  often, 
but  probably  play  the  "  Old  Oaken  Bucket  " 
oftener  than  any  other  one  piece.  I  did  not 
play  it  on  the  evening  referred  to.  This  sit- 
ting took  place  on  Wednesday.  On  the  pre- 
ceding Friday  evening  I  was  in  my  room  with 
my  sister,  Mrs.  Moore,  who  was  then  visiting 
me,  though  she  had  not  been  with  me  for 
nearly  a  year  prior  to  this  visit.  A  friend  of 
hers  called,  and  during  the  evening  my  sister, 
who  is  very  musical,  sat  down  at  the  piano. 
I  betook  myself  to  a  couch,  decidedly  reclin- 
ing. The  friend  sat  in  a  small  rocker,  and 
the  Morris  chair,  the  largest  chair  in  the  room, 
which  stood  near  the  centre  table,  was  unoc- 
cupied. My  sister's  playing  is  noted  among 
her  friends  for  its  remarkably  pretty  touch, 
and  she  has  a  way  of  humming  at  times  when 
she  does  not  feel  able  to  sing.  As  I  remem- 
ber this  evening  she  sang  in  a  low  tone  at  first, 
and  finally  sang  one  or  two  songs  in  her  nat- 
ural manner.     She  tells  me  that  she  played 


2o4      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

just  a  few  strains  of  the  "Suwanee  River"  on 
the  evening  in  question,  though  I  did  not  re- 
member it  and  could  not  have  told  that  she 
did  play  it.] 

Close 

SITTING   OF   SEPTEMBER    26,    1906 

[There  is  on  this  occasion  quite  a  long  con- 
versation with  Dr.  Hodgson.  This  and  Rec- 
tor's talk  occupy  the  larger  portion  of  the 
hour.] 

The  General 

Here  I  am.  I  am  delighted  to  see  you. 
How  are  you? 

(I  am  fine.     Don't  you  think  so?) 

Good.  Isn't  that  splendid!  Yes,  I  think 
you  are.  I  never  saw  you  better.  Did  you 
ask  your  sister  about  that  music? 

(Yes.) 

Well,  wasn't  I  right? 

(Yes,  you  were.  She  played  the  "  Suwanee 
River  "  that  night,  but  I  did  not  know  it.) 

Yes,  and  you  often  play  the  "  Old  Oaken 
Bucket?" 

(Yes.) 

Do  you  know  that  I  am  with  you  when  your 
body  is  in  repose  and  your  spirit  is  floating 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS       205 

around  conversing  with  me?  Do  you  re- 
member it  when  you  wake?  What  are  you 
doing?     Are  you  writing? 

(General,  I  have  to  write  down  every 
word.     I  wish  I  did  not.) 

Why  don't  you  split  the  difference  and  di- 
vide your  mind? 

(Well,  I  will.  It  hinders  me.  I  think  I 
will  drop  it  now.) 

I  wish  you  would.  You  lose  the  person- 
ality. 

[Which  means  that  I  discard  paper  and 
pen,  sit  close  to  Mrs.  Piper,  and  have  an  easy, 
natural  conversation  with  my  communicator.] 

Close 

SITTING  OF  AUGUST  5,   I9O7 

[The  date  of  this  sitting  is  a  little  out  of 
season.  Mrs.  Piper  had  just  returned  from 
England  and  gave  a  few  sittings  before  leav- 
ing Boston  again  to  spend  the  remainder  of 
the  summer  in  the  country.] 

The  General 

Little  rills  make  wider  streamlets, 
Streamlets  swell,  the  rivers  grow; 

And  they  join  the  ocean  billows, 
Onward,  onward,  as  they  go. 

Does  that  sound  natural? 

(Yes.     Will  you  say  that  once  more?) 


206      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

[Verse  repeated] 

(All  right,  that  is  natural.  How  do  you 
do,  General?) 

Well,  how  do  you  do?  I  do  as  I'm  a  mind 
to  most  of  the  time. 

Do  you  realize  that  even  though  I  go  on  in 
life,  progressing  in  this  life,  and  go  step  by 
step,  my  spirit  is  improving,  I  still  look,  back, 
and  never  a  step  forward  do  I  go  that  I  do 
not  look  back  and  live  in  pleasant  memories 
always  of  the  old,  olden  days.  ...  I 
have  enough  sentiment  in  my  nature  which 
has  become  a  part  of  myself  and  my  spirit 
here  that  if  I  sound  or  seem  sentimental  you 
must  overlook  it,  because  it  is  a  part  of  the 
spirit. 

(You  cannot  be  too  sentimental  for  me.) 
I  know  your  nature,  but  I  say  that  senti- 
ment is  a  part,  and  a  finer,  higher  part,  of  the 
spiritual  life  and  its  existence.  And  life  is  love 
and  love  is  life,  and  life  is  love,  therefore  it  is 
universal. 

[In  speaking  about  the  mediumistic  power 
of  another  psychic,  he  concludes  by  saying:] 

Well,  ask  Hodgson.  He  will  tell  you. 
He  has  been  a  great  help  to  me  over  here,  and 
he  has  been  helping  Myers  all  during  the 
burning  of  the  Light.  Perhaps  you  don't 
know  what  has  been  going  on? 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS       207 

(Not  much.) 

Well,  perhaps  it  is  just  as  well  if  you  don't. 
I  don't  know  very  much  about  it  myself,  only 
I  know  we  are  very  pleased  on  this  side. 

[This  doubtless  refers  to  the  work  of  the 
season  just  closed.  See  Proc.  S.P.R.  Part 
LVII,  Vol.  XXII,  October,  1908.] 

[Toward  the  close  of  the  hour  my  com- 
municator says:] 

But  I  am  going  to  ask  Hodgson  what  part 
of  his  reports  he  wants  you  to  have  and  he 
will  tell  you. 

(The  time  is  up.) 

I  must  let  him  come. 

(The  time  is  up.) 

Well,  he  has  got  to  speak  to  you,  I  can't 
help  it.     It  is  not  good-bye,  only  an  revoir. 

[A  brief  talk  with  Dr.  Hodgson  follows, 
at  the  close  of  which  he  says :  "  God  bless 
you,  and  stick  to  it.  That  is  the  advice  of 
your  old  friend  R.  H."] 

Close 

SITTING  OF  NOVEMBER  20,    1907 

[There  is  very  little  that  can  be  quoted  from 
this  sitting.  I  held  conversations  with  three 
communicators,  and  my  old  friend  Hiram 
Hart  sent  a  brief  message  of  remembrance. 
More  than  twenty-four  years  have  elapsed 
since   he  passed  away.     This   is  the  occasion 


2o8      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

on  which  my  communicator  says  that  "  delays 
are  dangerous  "  and  he  now  wishes  me  to  push 
my  work  along  as  rapidly  as  possible.  While 
advising  and  urging  me,  he  says:] 

The  General 

You  are  a  little  bit  stubborn,  do  you  know 
it?  You  get  an  idea  and  you  want  to  carry 
that  idea,  you  analyze  it,  you  say  it  over  in 
your  mind,  and  you  are  inclined  to  go  back  to 
the  first  idea.  Sometimes  the  broadest  and 
most  reasonable  minds  are  willing  to  add  an 
idea  to  their  oldest  idea,  and  have  two  ideas 
instead  of  one. 

(Well,  I  hope  I  am.) 

[Further  on  he  says:] 

Imperator  calls  you  one  of  his  children.  I 
suppose  you  must  be. 

(I  am  glad  to  know  that.) 

Well,  he  watches  over  you  with  his  all-see- 
ing eye  and  does  not  want  you  to  fail  or  fall 
into  error. 

•  ••••• 

Close 

SITTING  OF  JUNE   17,    I908 

The  General 

You  have  heard  of  pearly  gates  and  streets 
of   pearl?     Those   were   as   real   as   any   ex- 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS       209 

pression  which  you  may  use  in  the  physical 
life.  More  real.  It  is  a  fact, — there  are 
streets  of  pearl,  gates  of  pearl. 

(Just  like  our  pearl?) 

It  is  similar.  Yes,  the  comparison  is  so 
near  that  you  could  not  mistake  it  for  a  mo- 
ment. And  our  castles,  our  homes,  are  real. 
They  are  as  real  to  us  as  yours  are  to  you. 
Yours  is  simply  the  imitation,  ours  is  the  real. 
We  have  streets,  we  have  gardens,  we  have 
homes,  we  have  rivers,  we  have  lakes.  If  we 
bathe  in  the  river  our  garments  are  not  wet, 
but  still  we  are  purified,  we  are  cleansed.  But 
the  natural  hair  —  but  entering  it  does  not 
saturate  our  garments,  and  it  does  not  wet 
what  you  call  the  hair.  We  come  out  and  it 
is  light  and  dry,  the  garments  are  dry,  but 
the  soul  is  purified  by  bathing  in  the  waters. 
Is  that  clear  to  you?  We  walk  about  the 
lakes,  we  walk  in  the  gardens,  we  meet  friends, 
we  commune  with  friends,  we  hear  music,  we 
hear  sermons,  and  we  pass  our  time  glorifying 
God  and  living  in  His  presence,  in  a  sense, — 
understanding  what  His  hand  hath  created 
and  what  He  has  blessed  us  with,  eternal  life. 

(When  you  go  out  of  your  mansion  and 
look  up  toward  what  would  be  our  sky,  what 
do  you  see?) 

We  see  above  us,  we  see  our  world  radiant, 
filled  with  light,  a  beautiful,  soft  moonlight, 
difficult  for  you  to  comprehend  because  it  is  so 


210      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

clear,  so  beautiful,  so  light.  We  do  not  see 
what  you  see  —  stars  —  but  we  see  this  beau- 
tiful moonlight  above  us,  all  round  us.  The 
air  is  scented  with  the  most  delicious  perfume. 
It  is  so  exquisitely  delicate  that  it  seems  almost 
a  part  of  our  own  existence,  it  is  so  beautiful, 
so  delicate,  and  so  real.  And  we  see  above  us 
this  beautiful  light,  and  it  is  what  you  would 
call  in  your  world  the  heavens.  It  is  above 
us,  far  above  us,  and  we  see  at  times,  we  see  — 
a  face  appears.  It  grows  lighter  at  times, 
especially  when  we  are  in  a  particularly  happy 
state.  The  face  appears  over  us  and  we  know 
it  is  the  face  of  Christ.  We  hear  the  swishing 
of  the  garment,  as  it  were,  and  then  it  passes 
off  and  some  one  else  receives  the  vision. 

(Do  you  ever  see  any  other  face  like  that 
in  the  heavens  except  that  of  Christ?) 

We  see  what  you  would  call  —  there  are 
saints  administering  to  those  who  need  help, 
or  perhaps  have  just  passed  over,  have  not  un- 
derstood the  conditions,  and  these  saints  appear 
to  give  them  courage  and  to  give  them  faith 
and  to  show  them  that  this  is  everlasting  and 
eternal  life.  I  am  not  very  good  at  preach- 
ing. 

(Then  you  do  not  have  our  beautiful  firma- 
ment of  stars  at  night?) 

We  have  what  corresponds  to  your  stars. 
There   are  rays,   as   it  were,   little   flickering 


REPORTS  OF  SITTINGS       211 

rays  all  through  the  firmament,  all  through  the 
heavens.  We  see  these  little  rays  all  about 
us,  this  beautiful  figure  passing,  we  see  another 
face  and  then  another  as  it  passes.  Why  do 
we  not  come  into  closer  proximity  with  them, 
as  we  say  ?  Because  they  are  superior  even 
to  ourselves,  they  have  progressed,  they  have 
gone  on  to  a  higher,  even,  sphere  than  our 
own.  That  is,  they  are  the  controlling,  the 
ruling  forces,  and  govern  our  own  life  and 
our  own  world.     Do  you  understand? 

(Yes.) 

A  word  of  command,  simply  a  hand  is 
raised  —  we  know  its  meaning,  we  understand 
it,  we  sense  it  as  a  little  child  would  sense 
danger,  or  a  sensitive  animal  would  sense 
danger. 

•  •  .  •  •  i«j 

Subliminal 

[I  have  not  exact  notes  of  what  Mrs.  Piper 
said  on  this  occasion  while  coming  out  of 
trance,  but  I  have  a  memorandum  that  she 
mentioned  the  names  of  nearly  all  my  special 
friends  on  the  Other  Side,  as  if  she  were  see- 
ing them: — Hiram  Hart,  the  General,  my 
sister  Laura,  my  father,  the  baby,  my  grand- 
mother, Pickett.  My  grandmother  holds  the 
baby  up  and  the  baby  sends  love  to  its  mother, 
and  just  then  the  General  picked  a  rose  and 


212      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

handed  it  to  the  baby,  and  the  baby  was  pick- 
ing it  to  pieces.  The  psychic,  gradually  re- 
turning to  consciousness,  calls  this  one  of  the 
most  beautiful  sights  she  ever  saw.] 


And  the  End  is  Not  Yet.     September,  igog. 


PART  III 


SUGGESTIVE    THOUGHTS    ON    THE 
ATTAINMENT  OF  SPIRITUALITY 


As  I  have  previously  said,  I  have  no  System 
of  Philosophy  to  present,  and  possibly  nothing 
which  ought  to  be  dignified  by  the  name  of 
Philosophy  at  all.  I  have  not,  however,  been 
able  to  divorce  my  psychical  research  from  my 
religious  feeling,  nor  do  I  see  how  any  religion 
can  be  worthy  of  the  name  which  does  not 
enter  as  a  continual  inspiration  into  the  daily 
life.  Among  the  many  definitions  of  religion 
which  I  have  seen  I  like  that  best  which  makes 
it  mean  the  right  relation  of  mind  and  heart 
toward  our  fellow-creatures  and  our  environ- 
ment, and  the  right  attitude  of  the  soul  toward 
the  Incomprehensible  and  the  Unknown.  It 
need  have  no  specific  name,  nor  is  it  of  great 
importance  that  one  be  identified  with  some 
particular  religious  sect,  but  it  does  devolve 
upon  each  individual  person  to  ascertain  to  the 
best  of  his  ability  what  attitudes  and  relations 
are  right,  and  to  constantly  enlighten  his  un- 
derstanding on  these  matters  as  he  progresses 
along  the  pathway  between  birth  and  the 
grave.  We  love  the  man  who  walks  in  our 
midst  with  his  head  among  the  stars,  but  we 
smile  a  little  at  his  lack  of  mental  balance  if 
he  does  not  make  sure  that  his  feet  are  tread- 
ing solid  ground.  I  believe  we  may  walk  on 
solid  ground  and  at  the  same  time  lift  the  eye 
to  the  most  distant  star  whenever  we  may  wish. 
215 


216      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

I  have  ventured  to  offer  a  few  ideas  upon 
the  varied  relationships  in  life.  If  they  shall 
be  found  to  be  old,  that  will  matter  little,  since 
every  one  is  privileged  to  appropriate  from 
out  the  treasure-house  of  the  Past,  to  recast  old 
ideas  into  new  moulds  of  his  own  thinking, 
and  to  nourish  himself  thereby.  It  may  be 
that  many  of  my  readers  will  choose  to  pass 
by  these  pages  altogether,  yet  deep  down  in 
my  heart  I  am  assured  that  among  those  who 
peruse  them  there  will  be  found  at  least  a  few 
other  hearts  in  which  they  will  awaken  an  an- 
swering thought  and  a  responsive  feeling. 


SELF-DISCIPLINE 


The   best    is   near,    already   ours, 
If  we  would  wisely  use  the  powers 

Of  mind  and  heart 

And  do  our  part. 

Complete  and  fair  the  earth  will  be 
For  him  whose  inner  majesty 

Crowns  ever)'  sight 

With  its  own  light. 

In  any  place  we  find  the  thing 

That  in  our  hearts  the  power  we  bring 

To  see  and  use, 

All  else  we  lose. 

—  Victor  E.  Southworth. 


217 


SELF-DISCIPLINE 

/TTvO  EASILY  ignore  one's  own  personality 
•1  is  an  attainment  that  must  be  striven  for, 
a  power  that  must  be  gained,  but  it  is  after  all 
a  mere  preparation  for  that  which  follows,  a 
mere  opening  at  the  door  to  the  Vastness  which 
is  outside  of  personality. 

DEATH  of  the  lower  means  the  birth  of 
the  higher.  The  suppression  of  a  vice 
means  the  nourishment  of  a  virtue.  The  dy- 
ing of  the  selfish  means  the  living  of  the 
charitable.  The  extinction  of  the  ignoble 
means  the  blossoming  of  nobility. 

SOUL  culture  certainly  does  not  come  from 
the  reading  of  many  books  or  from  the 
forming  of  a  large  acquaintance,  nor  is  it 
measured  thereby.  Yet  it  may  depend  some- 
what upon  the  nourishment  one  is  able  to  ex- 
tract from  his  reading  and  upon  the  society 
of  those  of  his  acquaintance  who  themselves 
are  cultured. 

ONE  who  is  extremely  sensitive  and  at  the 
same  time  self-repressed  —  the  first  con- 
dition generally  being  the  cause  of  the  second 
—  is  the  possessor  of  a  temperament  suffi- 
ciently at  war  with  itself  to  cause  any  amount 
of  mental  anguish  until  the  temperament  is 
understood  and  the  unhappiness  resulting  from 
219 


220      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

it  is  outgrown.  Yet  this  same  sensitiveness 
when  once  understood,  when  it  serves  and  does 
not  master,  brings  to  its  possessor  the  percep- 
tion and  enjoyment  of  untold  things  which  the 
person  lacking  it  or  possessing  it  in  small  de- 
gree cannot  appreciate  at  all.  Slowly  in  early 
life  we  begin  to  apprehend  the  great  truth 
that  as  surely  as  the  cause  of  our  unhappiness 
lies  within  ourselves  just  so  surely  do  we  pos- 
sess the  power  within  ourselves  to  remedy  ills, 
to  dispossess  ourselves  of  misery  and  to  take 
possession  of  bliss. 

T  UNDERSTAND  the  philosophy  of  Spi- 
■**  noza  to  make  a  distinction  between  neces- 
sity and  external  compulsion.  We  are  of  neces- 
sity, in  the  nature  of  things,  bound  to  do  cer- 
tain actions,  to  follow  certain  lines  of  conduct. 
That  is,  we  need  not,  unless  we  choose,  but 
we  must  in  order  to  attain  our  highest  good. 
That  is  all. 

THE  giving  up  of  the  selfish  quest  for  hap- 
piness so  dignifies  and  ennobles  the  soul 
that  one  ceases  to  grope  with  downcast  eyes; 
one  looks  up,  takes  the  hand  of  God  and  walks 
with  Him  as  a  companion,  a  friend.  Then 
there  is  work  in  plenty  to  do,  for  one  is  a 
co-worker  with  God.  Just  as  a  grown-up 
daughter  takes  the  arm  of  her  earthly  father 
and   walks   joyously,    confidingly,    companion- 


SELF-DISCIPLINE  221 

ably,  sharing  his  schemes  and  his  outlook,  yet 
recognizing  all  the  while  the  superior  age,  the 
superior  knowledge,  the  superior  power. 

THE  person  who  is  delicately  sensitive  to 
spiritual  influences  receives  impres-sions 
in  many  ways  and  is  more  or  less  swayed  by 
them,  and  it  is  particularly  desirable,  indeed 
imperative,  that  such  person  should  cultivate 
strength  and  self-control. 


M 


Y  own  nature  is  my  law.     That  law  in 
its  purest  meaning  must  be  obeyed. 


•  ET  us  never  forget,  in  the  analysis  of 
-*— '  self,  that  the  great  desideratum  is  the 
power  to  turn  one's  face  immediately  and 
wholly  in  the  opposite  direction  from  that  of 
our  sensations,  our  emotions,  our  personal  de- 
sires; to  be  and  to  do  as  if  they  were  not;  to 
fling  from  us  the  encumbrance  of  self-analysis 
itself,  and  to  stand  erect  as  free,  pure  spirit. 

'IT/HEN  one  accepts  the  theory  that  the 
▼»  haps  and  the  mishaps  in  his  particular 
environment  take  place  for  the  purpose  of  de- 
veloping character  in  him,  to  understand  their 
significance  and  their  special  bearing  upon  the 
end  in  view  becomes  a  fascinating  intellectual 
game. 


222      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

TO  control  one's  nerves  or  be  ruled  by  them 
—  that  is  the  question.  The  one  thing 
leads  to  life,  the  other  to  death.  "  Self- 
stayed,  serene  and  high,"  the  poet  says.  It 
seems  to  be  an  inversion  of  the  natural  order 
of  things  that  mere  nerves  should  have  pos- 
session of  the  field,  frightening  all  else.  Yet 
the  nerves  are  like  the  finest  magnetic  needle, 
indicating  the  slightest  change  in  the  atmos- 
phere, the  least  deviation  in  our  course.  They 
should  be  of  the  greatest  aid  to  the  spirit,  like 
the  dainty,  delicate  servitors  that  they  are. 

SELF-POISE  is  a  marvelous  thing.  Its  in- 
fluence ramifies  through  every  part  of 
mind  and  body,  affecting  each  tiny  cell.  A 
new  cleavage  has  as  it  were  been  made  and 
all  primal  elements  in  the  nature  strike  a  new 
attitude  toward  the  centre  of  control. 

CHECKING  the  "vagaries  of  thought," 
relaxing  the  tensions  of  the  body,  breath- 
ing deeply  of  God's  pure  air,  ignoring  the  im- 
portance of  the  Ego,  steadily  pushing  the 
activity  of  the  whole  being  in  the  direction 
in  which  one  wishes  it  to  move,  are  rules  which 
when  followed  closely  and  when  working  har- 
moniously are  sufficient  to  introduce  one  into 
a  new  world;  aye,  a  world  so  large  as  com- 
pared with  the  treadmill  narrowness  of  a  small 


SELF-DISCIPLINE  223 

life  and  purposeless  thinking  that  it  may  well 
be  called  a  universe.  This  glorified  world 
awaits  him  who  seeks. 

DESPONDENCY  is  an  insult  to  the  Crea- 
tor. It  cripples  all  the  faculties  He  has 
given.  It  should  be  rooted  out  of  one's  na- 
ture as  any  other  vice.  It  should  be  subli- 
mated into  cheer. 

THE  soul  will  plod  on  in  certain  directions 
blindly  if  it  must,  but  when  the  lamp  of 
intelligence  is  lighted  it  walks  boldly  without 
wavering  or  fall. 

WE  hear  about  the  art  of  forgetting.  It 
is  more  than  an  art.  It  is  a  positive  es- 
sential in  one's  mental  equipment  if  one  would 
make  progress  in  the  spiritual  life. 

THE  art  of  forgetting  one  thing  is  the  art 
of  remembering  another.  The  thing 
which  we  wish  to  forget  must  be  supplanted 
in  our  minds  by  the  definite  thing  upon  which 
we  wish  to  concentrate  the  attention.  Thus 
it  happens  that  the  mastery  of  physical  weak- 
nesses and  temperamental  defects  and  the  gain 
in  mental  power  are,  after  all,  brought  about 
by  cultivation  of  spiritual  qualities.  It  is  only 
as  spiritual  qualities,  positive  and  strong,  sup- 


224      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

plant  the  things  in  ourselves  which  we  wish 
to  forget  that  the  desideratum  is  attained, 
namely,  the  control  of  all  our  forces  and  the 
enjoyment  of  our  lives. 

THE  secret  of  working  easily,  without  tir- 
ing, is  an  intelligent  understanding  and 
adjustment  of  the  mutual  relation  of  spirit, 
mind,  nerve  and  muscle.  These  are  all  sep- 
arate and  distinct  things  and  yet  they  are  one. 
The  body  should  be  in  such  a  position  that 
the  life  fluids  may  flow  through  it  without  ob- 
struction. No  muscles  should  be  taut  except 
those  required  for  the  particular  work  that  is 
being  performed.  The  nerves  should  be 
steady,  not  jumping  erratically  because  of  ag- 
itation in  the  mind.  The  mental  powers  must 
be  concentrated  upon  the  work  in  hand,  and 
the  soul  must  be  without  rebellion. 

ONE  may  travel  the  world  over  in  search 
of  peace  and  never  know  it  until  he 
makes  it.  Let  him  make  use  of  the  mighty 
sceptre  which  God  has  given  him  and  com- 
mand the  elements  at  war  within  his  own 
breast. 

THE  downpour  of  water  from  the  skies 
is  essential  to  the  life  of  the  trees.  The 
rain  of  sorrow  in  our  lives  must  be  drawn  into 
our  life-blood,   else  we  too  shall  wither  and 


SELF-DISCIPLINE  225 

perish  and  fail  of  the  growth  we  were  born 
to  accomplish.  Living  according  to  the  laws 
of  nature  we  expand  day  by  day  as  inevitably 
and  unconsciously  as  do  the  trees. 


THAT  in  your  temperament  which  you  rec- 
ognize as  your  greatest  weakness  may 
become  not  only  your  greatest  strength  but 
the  source  of  your  greatest  enjoyment,  since 
by  means  of  mastering  a  weakness  you  learn 
the  law  which  brings  to  you  its  opposite  good. 

REAL  goodness  is  not  so  common  a  thing 
in  this  world.  It  may  even  be  said  to  be 
rare.  It  is  not  a  subterfuge  into  which  one 
flees  because  he  lacks  ability  or  will.  Rather 
is  it  ability  and  will  only  which  can  acquire 
the  actual  good. 

LAW  prevails  in  the  so-called  lower  as  well 
as  the  higher.  It  is  for  us  to  choose 
whether  we  will  live  under  the  preponderating 
influence  of  laws  which  bring  about  a  lesser 
degree  of  happiness,  or  under  laws  which 
mould  us  into  creatures  of  a  finer  fibre,  capable 
of  seeing  in  our  environment  that  to  which 
we  were  formerly  blind,  capable  of  enjoying 
that  which  formerly  conveyed  no  meaning  to 
us. 


226      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

THE  unspeakable  relief  which  comes  to  a 
person  who  struggles  with  an  unhappy 
temperament  when  one  day  he  suddenly  turns 
his  back  upon  it  all,  is  only  to  be  understood 
by  those  who  suffer  the  miseries  of  such  an 
existence  and  into  whose  hearts  at  last  the 
floods  of  spiritual  light  are  poured.  The  in- 
stant the  spirit  is  thus  freed,  light-heartedness 
springs  into  being  at  a  bound,  involuntarily, 
necessarily,  for  it  is  the  struggle  itself  which 
makes  the  heavy  heart.  The  joy  which  is  the 
accompaniment  of  vigorous,  energetic  action 
then  supplants  the  heaviness  of  lackadaisical, 
paralyzing  struggle. 


THE  Divine  Will  reveals  to  its  devoted 
followers  more  and  more  of  its  purport 
and  wisdom.  Follow  not  the  Will  and  you 
may  become  blind. 


NO  one  should  feel  that  because  he  is 
locked  in  his  own  chamber  for  the  hour 
he  may  give  free  play  to  unworthy  thought 
and  ignoble  feeling,  he  may  safely  indulge  in 
melancholy  or  despair.  This  does  not  mean 
that  he  may  not  occasionally  be  "  off  guard," 
as  it  were.  If  it  did,  privacy  would  contrib- 
ute little  toward  the  recuperation  of  our 
powers.     But  when  alone  one  may  entertain 


SELF-DISCIPLINE  227 

the  angel  of  his  better  self  even  more  charm- 
ingly perhaps  than  when  in  the  presence  of 
others. 


I  IFE  may  be  glorious  every  day.  The 
**— '  spirit  may  wrap  itself  round  in  cloud- 
like airiness,  so  light,  so  beautiful,  so  pene- 
trating, that  all  which  is  ugly  is  softened  by 
it  and  disappears  from  our  view. 


THE  healthful  discipline  that  comes  from 
daily  work,  when  one  takes  pleasure  in  it 
is  valuable  beyond  computation.  The  power 
to  direct  the  mental  faculties  undisturbed  by 
the  turmoil  of  surroundings  is  of  the  greatest 
imaginable  good,  and  this  power  acquired  in 
daily  discipline  will  be  of  service  wherever 
one  goes.  The  contact  with  our  kind  in  gen- 
eral, high  and  low,  superiors  and  inferiors, 
refined  and  coarse,  brings  to  the  surface  the 
shining  beauty  of  true  character,  as  stones 
rubbed  together  only  polish  and  make  brighter 
the  beauty  of  the  priceless  gem.  Why  then 
need  the  worker  complain  of  his  lot?  Rather 
let  him  glory  in  it.  Daily  work  is  many  a 
soul's  salvation.  Daily  work  may  grow  for 
us  wings  instead  of  forging  for  us  fetters. 


228      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

44  A  BATEMENT  of  thought"   expresses 

**■  tersely  a  mental  process  which  should 
be  within  the  power  of  all.  Rather,  it  expresses 
an  action  of  the  spirit  upon  the  mind,  causing 
it  to  refrain  from  working  at  will.  No  one 
who  has  not  acquired  the  ability  to  abate  the 
thought  to  a  greater  or  lesser  degree  knows 
the  highest  spiritual  peace  which  he  is  capable 
of  attaining.  It  may  be  that  the  thought  can 
never  wholly  cease  while  life  lasts,  as  the 
body  may  not  stop  its  breathing.  But  surely 
it  is  that  when  riotous  thought  abates,  peace 
and  joy  roll  over  the  kingdom.  I  remember 
the  beautiful  words  of  P.  Ramanathan  —  I  do 
not  know  whether  he  himself  was  quoting  — 
that  "  Thoughts  are  the  warp  and  woof  of 
the  veil  which  hides  from  us  the  face  of  God. 
Lift  the  veil  and  God  is  there." 


HAPPINESS 

Kncw'st  thou  the  truth,  thou  wouldst  not  pray: 
Lord  to  thy  child  send  joy  this  day. 
Thou  art  deceived:  joy  is  within, 
And  never  pain  nor  grief  nor  sin 
Can  take't  away.     God  put  it  there. 
Nor  comes  it  nearer  thee  for  prayer. 
Joy  is  of  thy  true  self  a  part  — 
Why  shouldst  thou  pray  for  what  thou  art: 
—  Mary  Putnam  Gilmore. 


The  full  throat  of  the  world  is  charged  with  song, 
Morning  and  twilight  melt  with  ecstasy 
In  the  high  heat  of  noon.     Simply  to  be, 

Palpitant  where  the  green  spring  forces  throng, 

Eager  for  life,  life  unashamed  and  strong  — 
This  is  desire  fulfilled.     Exalted,  free, 
The  spirit  gains  her  ether,  scornfully 

Denies  existence  that  is  dark  or  wrong. 

This  is  enough,  to  see  the  song  begun 
Which  shall  be  finished  in  some  field  afar. 
Laugh  that  the  night  may  still  contain  a  star, 
Nor  idly  moan  your  impotence  of  grace. 
Life  is  a  song,  lift  up  your  care-free  face 

Gladly  and  gratefully  toward  the  sun. 

—  Helen  Hay  Whitney. 


229 


HAPPINESS 

LET  us  learn  to  dwell  in  the  upper  chambers 
of  our  being.  There  the  mental  atmos- 
phere is  always  clear,  the  moral  horizon  is 
unflecked  by  clouds,  only  enchanting  distance 
and  mysterious  space  meet  the  gaze  of  the 
Ego  through  the  windows  of  the  purified 
soul. 

TO  be  keenly  sensitive  to  the  ugly  and  the 
bad  is  to  be  delicately  sensitive  to  the 
beautiful  and  the  good.  To  be  sufferingly 
sensitive  to  human  inharmonies  is  to  be  joy- 
fully alive  to  enlightened  lawfulness.  So 
closely  akin  are  joy  and  sorrow  that  while  one 
hand  may  be  pressing  a  heavy  heart,  the  other 
may  be  stretching  upward  toward  the  stars. 

WHEN  one  comes  into  virtual  possession 
of  the  wealth  of  the  universe  through 
conscious  affinity  with  it,  poverty  in  material 
things  is  no  longer  to  be  feared.  Who  can 
rob  us  of  the  soil  over  which  we  lightly  tread? 
Who  can  deprive  us  of  the  air  we  freely  and 
deeply  breathe?  WTho  can  bar  from  our  vision 
the  beauty  of  sky  and  star?  Who  can  alter 
by  one  slightest  shade  the  glorious  coloring 
of  the  landscape  or  the  gorgeousness  of  the 
setting  sun? 

231 


232      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

WE  wish  for  freedom  to  live,  to  act,  within 
the  perfect  laws  of  God,  yet  independ- 
ent of  the  laws  of  man,  which  must  be  ever 
changing,  never  perfect.  This  does  not  mean 
lawlessness,  but  law////ness.  Man's  laws  are 
only  an  approach  to  those  of  nature,  an  im- 
perfect copy  of  them.  He  who  sees  nature's 
law  back  of  man-made  law  will  not  disobey 
the  latter  and  it  will  be  no  bondage  to  him. 
His  own  natural  law  is  the  higher. 

ONE  touch  of  real  sorrow  is  worth  a  thou- 
sand days  of  that  which  is  ordinarily 
considered  happiness  unalloyed.  And  what  is 
sorrow  but  contact  with  the  realities  of  life, 
with  the  seriousness  of  death,  with  the  wonders 
of  God's  ways?  Why  should  we  then  wish 
that  sorrow  never  enter  our  path?  Sorrow? 
It  is  not  sorrow, —  that  is  only  our  name  for 
it.  It  is  the  opening  of  the  clouds  before 
us,  giving  us  a  glimpse  of  the  vastness  of 
Heaven.  It  is  God's  hand  appearing  out  of 
the  haze  pointing  to  a  glory  never  yet  con- 
ceived in  our  days  of  simple,  complacent  hap- 
piness. 

IN  the  course  of  time  all  Nature  assumes  for 
us  a  character  of  intelligence,  of  life,  and 
her  laws  become  friendly  creatures.  We  may 
commune  with  them,  yield  to  them,  trust  them, 
feel  ourselves  shielded  and  protected  by  them. 


HAPPINESS  233 

Even  the  darkness  of  the  night  is  friendly. 
It  hushes  us  to  repose,  it  soothes  us  to  sleep. 
Whv  need  one  be  restlessly  wakeful  when  thus 
closely  befriended?  The  space  and  the  silence 
are  full  of  stirring  creatures,  our  many  friends. 

ILLUMINATION  from  within  transfigures 
all  upon  which  it  falls.  Thus  again  may 
we  make  a  new  world  about  us.  It  is  the 
nature  of  light  to  transfigure  and  the  object 
seen  takes  on  a  special  hue  from  the  character 
of  the  light  which  shines  upon  it. 

FATE  is  my  mission,  my  loved  work,  the 
particular  work  which  I  can  do  better 
than  I  can  do  other  things,  the  work  which  I 
can  do  better  than  some  one  else  can  do  it. 
Fate  is  a  mighty  friend  in  disguise. 

LET  no  one  say  that  he  cannot  live  a  suc- 
cessful, happy  life  in  the  spot  where  his 
birth  places  him  or  in  places  where  the  trend 
of  events  takes  him.  The  inner  life,  the  life 
of  strength,  nobility,  patience,  effort,  dignity, 
beauty,  depends  not  upon  its  location  in  the 
material  world,  depends  not  on  outer  surround- 
ings, but  rather  by  its  own  inherent  force  does 
it  draw  unto  itself  from  earth  and  heaven  the 
strong  vital  currents  which  mingling  make  for 
that  life  a  new  atmosphere,  make  for  that  life 
almost  a  new  environment.     So  translucent  in 


234     BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

time  may  that  atmosphere  become  that  the 
soul,  without  moving  the  body  from  one  spot, 
may  have  a  vision  far  exceeding  in  acuteness 
and  range  the  vision  of  the  insatiate  traveler, 
though  his  travels  be  world-wide. 

PRIDE  of  attainment  in  spiritual  things  is 
inconsistent  with  that  attainment.  Rather 
should  we  be  grateful  that  we  have  been 
brought  under  the  law. 

WHY  not  repose  in  the  protecting  good- 
ness of  the  Powers  that  Be?  Surely  it 
cannot  be  that  the  Maker  of  majestic  orbs 
travelling  nightly  their  course  across  the  heav- 
ens, suggesting  to  us  unerring  law  and  flashing 
down  upon  us  their  starry  brilliancy,  will  leave 
His  human  children  uncared  for  and  adrift. 


A 


BLOW  like  death  knocks  us  out  of  our 
petty  selves. 


THE  mercurial  temperament  suffers  more 
than  the  phlegmatic.  It  must  be  remem- 
bered, however,  that  the  mercurial  tempera- 
ment senses  various  degrees  of  heat  and  cold 
in  its  atmospheric  environment,  and  when  Mer- 
cury cultivates  his  intellect  he  is  able  to  pick 
and  choose  the  climate  in  which  he  shall  daily 
dwell. 


HAPPINESS  235 

IT  is  a  blessed  thing  to  give  of  our  substance 
and  feel  it  no  denial,  not  because  we  have 
much,  but  because  we  wish  to  give  that  which 
we  have. 

LIFE  is  serious,  or  should  be.  Yet  it  is 
the  man  who  is  apparently  the  most  se- 
rious who  most  easily  bursts  into  the  happy 
laughter  of  the  light  of  heart.  The  deeply 
serious  man  looks  into  the  principles  of  being, 
into  the  laws  of  life,  understands  the  secrets 
of  the  Most  High.  He  is  the  man  then  who 
may  at  times  be  lifted  into  the  bright  airiness 
of  God's  fairy  lands. 

WE  find  ourselves  at  times  in  states  of  mind 
which  seem  to  be  those  of  transition. 
We  do  not  quite  understand  what  is  taking 
place  within.  Things  that  once  would  have 
given  us  pleasure  have  lost  their  attraction. 
Occurrences  which  once  would  have  caused  in 
us  excessive  emotion  no  longer  have  that 
power.  Affection  itself  seems  to  wane  and 
dependence  on  our  friends  is  less  binding.  We 
are  a  little  fearful  lest  in  some  way  past  our 
comprehension  and  beyond  our  control  our 
hold  on  life  is  weakening  and  our  interest 
flagging.  Yet  we  need  not  be  anxious. 
Transition  states  such  as  these  are  glorious 
harbingers  of  better  things  to  come.  Irksome 
bondage  of  the  flesh  is  dropping  off  and  free- 


236      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

dom  is  being  acquired.  Let  us  welcome  al- 
ways the  advance,  be  watchful,  trustful  and 
calm.  The  resistless  laws  of  nature  are  sweep- 
ing us  on. 

DEATH  saddens?  It  must  be  sweet  to 
lay  down  the  burdens  of  life  and  fall 
asleep  in  the  arms  of  God,  just  as  we  lay  down 
the  burdens  of  a  day  and  fall  asleep  in  the 
arms  of  night.  And  as  God  speaks  to  us  in 
the  darkness  of  the  night,  bidding  us  lay  down 
the  burdens  of  the  day,  so  he  calls  us  by  the 
cloudiness  of  death  to  lay  down  the  burdens  of 
life.  Let  us  reverence  and  welcome  both  the 
darkness  of  night  and  the  cloudiness  of  death, 
for  God  is  in  both. 

ONE  is  always  happy  in  conscious  power 
when  exerted  for  good.  Spirit  unham- 
pered is  strong.  Therefore  by  as  much  as  we 
free  the  spirit,  give  play  and  exercise  to  its 
attributes,  by  so  much  do  we  become  con- 
sciously powerful,  by  so  much  do  we  grow 
like  unto  the  gods. 

•  ET  us  cling  to  a  friendship  which  shows 
*- '  itself  persisting  through  differences  of 
opinion,  divergence  of  interests  and  separation 
of  lives.  Such  a  friendship  proves  that  the 
heart  is  stronger  than  the  head  and  that  the 
heart's  needs  are  all-important. 


HAPPINESS  237 

IF  one  listen,  listen,  with  concentrated  spirit- 
attention,  just  as  he  would  listen  with  the 
physical  ear  were  he  trying  to  catch  a  sound, 
he  will  hear  many  beautiful  things  which  pass 
unheeded  by  the  busybody  and  the  listless. 

RENEWED  consecration  to  holiness  of  life 
and  nobility  of  conduct  will  always  and 
immediately  lift  one  from  the  slough  of 
despond. 

WHEREIN  is  depth  different  from 
height?  Well  may  he  who  can  look 
into  the  depths  of  the  Commonplace  and 
wrest  from  it  its  meaning  be  envied  by  his  fel- 
low-man and  not  despised  by  him  who  is  on 
the  mountain  top.  Delicate  courtesy  compels 
us  and  the  commonest  relations  in  life  never 
cease  to  be  objects  of  beauty  when  we  see 
them  as  the  marvels  that  they  are. 

THE  term  that  we  glibly  use,  "  Face  of 
Nature,"  is  itself  suggestive  of  life,  for 
in  a  human  face  there  is  the  expression  of 
all  the  qualities  that  make  up  the  soul.  Let 
us  call  it  then  face  of  nature,  or  face  of  God. 
If  we  are  akin  with  it,  it  will  be  very  much 
alive.  Then  we  shall  see  in  the  changing 
clouds,  the  waving  trees,  the  widest  waters, 
only     the     expression     of     the     unseen     life 


238      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

aback,  responsive  to  each  sentiment  of  our 
own,  answering  each  appeal.  We  do  not 
need  the  language  of  words  when  love  shines 
upon  us  from  a  beaming  countenance.  Then 
why  are  we  so  deaf  to  this  most  eloquent  mes- 
sage that  comes  to  us  from  the  face  of  Nature, 
revealing  the  Almighty  Soul  behind? 

INEXPRESSIBLE  is  the  joy  of  having 
found  a  confidence  that  replaces  fear,  a 
trust  that  takes  the  place  of  doubt,  a  compo- 
sure wrought  out  of  agitation,  light  that  ban- 
ishes darkness,  and  a  freedom  that  breaks 
down  all  prison  walls. 


VARIOUS  INTIMATIONS 


It  is  a  mystery  of  the  unknown 

That  fascinates  us;  we  are  children  still, 
Wayward   and   wistful ;  with  one  hand  we  cling 

To  the  familiar  things  we  call  our  own, 
And  with  the  other,  resolute  of  will, 

Grope  in  the  dark  for  what  the  day  will  bring. 

—  Henry  Wadsworth  Longfellow. 


Prais'd  be  the  fathomless  universe, 

For   life   and    joy,   and    for  objects   and    knowledge 

curious, 
And  for  love,  sweet  love  —  but  praise!  praise!  praise! 
For  the  sure-enwinding  arms  of  cool-enfolding  death. 

—  Walt  Whitman. 


'  By  her  own  strength  can  Virtue  live? 

Self-poised  can  Hope  wide-winging  soar?  ' 
List!  for  our  deepening  age  shall  give 
Some  answer  surer  than  of  yore;  — 
Stand  fast,  high  hearts,  thro'  woe  and  weal ; 
Watch  thro'  the  night,  if  watch  ye  may; 
Wait,  till  the  rifted  heavens  reveal 
Unheard-of  morning,  mvstic  day. 

—  F.  W.  H.  Myers. 


239 


VARIOUS  INTIMATIONS 

"DLESSED  is  the  man  for  whom  the  mys- 
**"  tery  of  life  has  become  a  continual  attrac- 
tion, who  sees  beauty  mirrored  in  its  depths, 
and  a  divine  significance  to  it  all. 

ASTRONOMERS  are  endeavoring  to  dis- 
cover the  nature  of  life  on  the  planet 
Mars.  Yet  what  has  that  life  to  do  with  us? 
If  it  were  not  that  our  globe  itself  is  unfold- 
ing, giving  forth  its  secrets  to  the  questioning 
mind  of  man;  if  it  were  not  that  the  race  as  a 
race  is  evolving,  acquiring  new  powers  with 
each  passing  generation,  there  might  be  some 
reason  in  the  claim  that  what  the  Creator  has 
not  seen  fit  to  reveal  to  us  He  never  intended 
we  should  know.  Yet  it  is  not  at  all  incon- 
ceivable that  with  newly  evolved  powers  of 
the  human  mind,  with  ever  higher  attainment 
in  spiritual  living,  with  more  finely  attenuated 
human  organisms,  means  will  be  found  in  the 
not  distant  future  by  which  we  may  even  be- 
come cognizant  of  the  interests  of  our  neigh- 
bors on  the  ruddy  orb  which  we  name  Mars. 
If  friends  who  have  passed  from  our  sight  are 
living  on  still,  they  must  be  not  only  in  some 
place  but  in  a  state  of  real  vitality.  Can  it 
be  wrong  to  try  to  reach  them? 

CONCENTRATION   is   the   withdrawing 
of  the  mind  from  the  many  to  the  few, 
241 


242      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

from  the  multitudinous  to  the  homogeneous, 
from  complexity  to  simplicity,  from  manifes- 
tation to  the  unmanifest,  from  the  material 
to  the  spiritual,  from  the  agitated  to  the  calm. 
If  one  wishes  one  may  find  sleep  through  con- 
centration,—  sleep,  the  withdrawal  of  the  Ego 
from  the  outer  to  the  inner,  from  the  seen  to 
the  unseen. 

WHEN  I  was  a  child  I  looked  at  the 
pale  green  of  the  western  sky,  tinged 
here  and  there  with  rose,  and  something 
within  me  responded  to  this  beauty  which  I 
beheld  at  a  distance.  It  stirrd  within  me  an 
unutterable  longing  to  be  able  to  express  in 
my  own  nature  a  purity  such  as  I  saw  em- 
blazoned there.  Surely  God's  handiwork 
appeals  to  the  inner  eye,  the  organ  of  the 
inmost  self. 

MY  real  life,  that  which  I  feel  surging 
through  my  body,  welling  up  in  my  emo- 
tions and  bursting  out  from  my  brain,  is  in- 
dependent of  time  and  space  every  day. 
Death  then  only  marks  the  end  of  certain  ac- 
tions and  a  certain  course  of  conduct,  as  the 
hour  of  dusk  marks  off  the  actions  of  the  day. 

DIGNITY  is    more    becoming    than    self- 
consciousness.     Dignity  is  self-conscious- 
ness grown  divine. 


VARIOUS  INTIMATIONS       243 

THIS  straining  after  arguments  to  prove 
that  the  Ego  survives  the  death  of  the 
body  seems  needless,  seems  at  times  folly  to  the 
soul  that  is  conscious  that  wherever  it  moves 
it  walks  among  Irving  things,  that  nowhere 
is  there  really  death,  but  only  transformation. 

I  CRAVE  that  which  satisfies  my  ideal  of 
spiritual  dignity  and  beauty,  as  one  looks 
constantly  in  the  material  for  beauty  of  form 
and  color. 

THE  glow  that  one  feels  from  closeness 
to  the  Great  Impersonal  may  be  just  as 
vivid  as  that  which  flows  from  bodily  contact 
with  a  human  friend, —  nay,  more  so.  The 
human  soul  can  touch  the  Eternal,  and  the 
human  soul  when  linked  with  the  Over-Soul 
generates  new  and  wonderful  powers. 

GENTLENESS  in  the  human  countenance 
is  more  beautiful  than  assertion.  The 
mild  eye  is  more  pleasing  than  the  sharp,  and 
may  sparkle  with  a  lovelier  light.  The  saintly 
man  appears  to  breathe  out  gentleness  from 
every  portion  of  his  body. 

THE  EGO  has  many  kith  and  kin  in  the 
Universe  whom  it  may  take  delight  in 
meeting  when  the  sheath  of  the  personality 
is  laid  aside. 


244      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

LOVE    and    selflessness    make    the    vision 
clear. 

IT  is  true  that  there  are,  here  and  there  in 
our  very  midst,  individuals  who  claim  to 
be  repositories  of  what  is  known  as  "  Hermetic 
Philosophy,"  the  knowledge  of  which  is  not 
to  be  found  in  printed  books  but  has  been 
handed  down  by  sure  means  from  the  wisdom 
of  the  past.  It  is  well  known  that  many 
truths  relating  to  the  material  universe,  only 
recently  established  by  science,  were  known  to 
Eastern  sages  many  years  ago,  secrets  of  the 
Cosmos  wrung  from  it  by  I  know  not  what 
sort  of  spiritual  acumen.  This  occult  lore  is 
so  vast  in  its  scope  that  it  comprehends  as  a 
matter  of  course  life  on  more  planes  than  one, 
and,  among  its  privileged  initiates,  to  speak 
of  death  as  ending  all  seems  an  affront  to  their 
intelligence  as  well  as  to  their  faith.  Not- 
withstanding this,  the  masses,  the  millions, 
bury  in  the  black  earth  the  dear  bodies  of 
their  friends  and  turn  away  with  that  terrible 
sinking  of  the  heart  which  means  that  joy  has 
gone  out  of  their  lives.  They  are  only  con- 
scious that  the  monster  Fate,  to  which  all 
men  must  bow,  has  at  last  overtaken  them. 
Into  such  hearts  one  who  sees  the  light  ahead 
longs  to  shed  a  ray  of  hope. 


VARIOUS  INTIMATIONS       245 

NEITHER  the  mind  nor  the  body  can  be 
composed  if  there  is  agitation  at  the  cen- 
tre. And  calmness  is  not  dullness,  it  is  not 
inactivity.  It  is  power  exerted,  it  is  control 
of  forces,  it  is  intense  mental  action,  it  is 
spiritual  energy. 


WHEN  death  comes  to  one  of  two  who 
have  been  inseparable  in  the  bonds  of 
love,  one  is  born  into  new  life  on  the  other 
side  of  the  Veil,  one  is  born  into  new  life  on 
this  side.  They  go  on  together  as  before, 
except  that  the  thin  partition  between  the  Seen 
and  the  Unseen  divides  their  bodies  but  not 
their  souls.  Nay,  the  bond  that  bound  them 
becomes  the  sweeter  and  the  stronger.  With 
the  great  event  called  death  between  them, 
both  open  new  eyes  to  God's  wonders  at  one 
and  the  same  time.  "  The  flesh  does  not  con- 
join, but  dissever;  although  through  its  very 
severance  it  suggests  a  shadow  of  the  union 
which  it  cannot  bestow."  ! 

IT  will  give  us  delight  to  trust  the  goodness 
of  the  Universe,  aye  its  friendliness,  as  if 
it  were  a  personal  being.  These  impersonal 
qualities  may  become  real  to  us,  as  though  em- 
bodied in  human  form,  and  our  confidence  in 
them  increase. 

1  F.  \Y.  IT.  Myers,  Human  Personality,  Vol.  I,  p.  112. 


246      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

NO  one  is  great  who  cannot  sacrifice  him- 
self whenever  and  wherever  he  is  actu- 
ally called  upon  to  do  so.  Needless  self-sac- 
rifice is  a  degradation  to  the  soul. 


WE  love  people  who  are  imperfect.  We 
love  people  who  are  less  perfect  than 
ourselves.  Let  us  do  what  we  can  by  word 
or  deed  or  silent  force  to  bring  our  loved  ones 
up,  but  let  us  never  sink  to  their  level  if  it  be 
below  our  own,  however  much  we  love  them. 


IN  brief  moments  of  unconsciousness  or  in 
longer  hours  of  absorption,  time  for  us  is 
not.  It  appears,  then,  that  there  is  no  such 
thing  as  time,  but  only  occurrences  in  con- 
sciousness. Yet  when  we  recall  a  definite 
epoch  from  out  the  dimness  of  the  past,  time 
stretches  out  at  length.  Why?  Because  we 
ourselves  have  walked  on  apace,  because  much 
has  transpired  within. 

TO  the  finely  developed  mind  of  the  natu- 
rally sensitive  person  it  must  be  only  the 
thinnest  of  veils  that  separates  him  from  the 
denizens  of  another  and  higher  world,  for  he 
himself  draws  his  breath  in  those  elements 
which  apparently  are  the  sustainers  of  life  in 
that  higher  world. 


VARIOUS  INTIMATIONS       247 

WHEN  I  was  a  child  I  conceived  of  the 
soul  as  a  mass  of  white  or  pearly  mist, 
oval  in  form,  located  somewhere  in  the  trunk, 
of  the  body.  Now  I  sometimes  picture  the 
spiritual  body  as  an  expansion  of  something 
far  more  delicate  than  mist;  not  confined  to  the 
trunk  of  the  body  but  permeating  and  radiating 
from  it;  not  white  or  pearly  but  aglow  with 
delicate  and  various  colors,  approaching  to 
whiteness  in  proportion  as  the  Ego  is  pure; 
with  centres  of  thought  or  light  scattered 
through  it  like  nuclei ;  keeping  in  general  the 
bodily  form  yet  shooting  from  these  nuclei  its 
search-light  rays,  which  pierce  more  deeply 
into  the  abyss  of  the  Unknown  according  as 
the  soul  is  great. 


THERE  is  a  dignity  of  spiritual  conscious- 
ness and  a  dignified  way  of  living  which 
is  not  obliged  to  be  constantly  asking  itself 
how  it  shall  dress,  how  it  shall  act,  how  it  shall 
talk.  All  these  minor  things  fall  into  har- 
monious relation  with  the  superior  creature 
within  who  has  accomplished  this  feat  of 
dignified  living.  Great  dignity  of  character 
makes  one  ashamed  to  ask  how  its  possessor  is 
garbed,  in  fact  almost  blinds  altogether  to  the 
fact  that  he  is  garbed  at  all.  Yet  if  we  take 
note  of  particulars  it  will  be  apparent  that  the 
garment  is  becoming  and  fitting.     Some  subtle 


248      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

essence  emanates  from  the  cultured  soul,  blend- 
ing the  outer  apparel  into  the  harmony  of  the 

whole. 

THERE  are    more    things  in  the  possibili- 
ties of  the  seeker  than  are   dreamt  of  in 
the  philosophy  of  the  dogmatist. 

IT  may  do  injury  to  those  who  have  passed 
away  to  wish  them  to  keep  in  touch  with  the 
sorrows  of  this  life,  but  it  cannot  injure  them 
to  keep  in  touch  with  its  loves.  Selfish  grief 
on  our  part  may  hold  them  back  in  their 
career,  but  true  love  in  this  world  or  any  other 
can  do  naught  but  bless.  Love  loves  the 
lovely,  and  love  itself,  long-suffering  though 
it  be,  may  at  last  grow  cold  if  the  object  that 
once  attracted  it  be  constantly  bathed  in  grief. 
I  think  we  may  judge  of  them  as  we  judge  of 
ourselves,  when  we  ask  the  question,  is  it 
wrong  to  expect  them  to  keep  in  touch  with  our 
lives. 

ONE  who  learns  the  art  of  living  easily 
here  is  becoming  fitted  to  enter  naturally 
into  life  beyond.  It  is  only  spiritual  living 
that  is  easy.  What  conception  can  the  mole 
have  of  the  glory  of  the  sunlit  heavens?  Yet 
the  robin  perches  on  the  swaying  bough,  the 
lark  soars  upward  toward  the  blue,   and  the 


VARIOUS  INTIMATIONS      249 

eagle  ranges  the  mountain  top.  When  we 
look  into  the  earth,  blackness  bars  our  vision. 
When  we  look  into  the  heavens  there  is  no 
limit  to  the  glory,  save  the  weakness  in  the 
physical  eye. 

THE  more  devotedly  one    loves    a  single 
person   the  more   is   his   heart  open   to 
lesser  degrees  of  friendly  relation. 

IT  would  seem  that  each  grade  of  matter 
were  permeable  by  a  finer  which  is  its  life, 
and  that  when  the  finer  is  withdrawn  from  the 
coarser  the  latter  dies.  In  relation  to  our 
coarser  bodies  the  air  is  spirit,  is  the  breath  of 
life.  It  is  not  at  all  difficult  to  conceive, 
analogously,  of  those  we  call  dead  inhabiting 
a  finer  than  fleshly  form,  which  must  in  the 
nature  of  things  be  invisible  to  our  outward 
sense,  even  as  is  pure  air. 

THE  simple,  devoted  soul  has  faith;  the 
intelligent,  knowing  soul  has  a  greater. 
Trust  may  be  the  accompaniment  of  igno- 
rance; a  greater  trust  is  the  accompaniment  of 
wisdom. 

THE  newly  bereaved  stands  mourner  be- 
side the  open  grave.  The  deathly  still- 
ness that  prevails  but  faintly  symbolizes  the 
deadly  inaction  of  his  heart.     Man  tries    in 


250      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

myriad  ways  to  keep  before  his  eyes  in  endur- 
ing bronze  and  marble  a  reminder  of  death. 
Yet  above  all  these  silent  testimonials  waves 
the  green  of  the  foliage  and  shines  the  blue  of 
the  ether,  both  palpitating  with  life.  Let  the 
mourner  but  look  upward,  and  with  steady 
gaze  the  heart  gradually  succumbs  to  nature's 
persuasion,  and  the  bronze  and  the  marble 
lose  their  terror. 


GOD  speaks  to  us  in  flower  and  star  and 
sky,  in  love  and  tenderness  and  suffering. 
The  word  "  language  "  means  that  which  can 
be  uttered  by  the  tongue,  but  many  thousand 
things  are  communicated  to  us  by  other  means. 
Let  us  call  it  speaking,  for  lack  of  a  more  ac- 
curate term.  Can  you  hear  the  speech  which 
God  utters  every  hour  in  every  place?  A 
speech  more  eloquent  than  language,  as  the 
speech  of  the  eye  is  more  eloquent  than  the 
uttered  word.  God  speaks  through  the  per- 
fection of  human  beauty  in  another,  through 
grace,  through  composure  of  soul.  These  are 
about  us  every  day.  Let  us  listen  for  the 
music  of  their  voice. 


AFTER  disillusionment  life  becomes  increas- 
ingly wonderful,  interesting  and  inviting. 
Not  the  outer  world  of  sense,    but    the  inner 


VARIOUS  INTIMATIONS       251 

meanings  of  things;  the  tremendous  signifi- 
cance of  it  all  and  its  fathomless  depths. 
These  are  the  things  that  now  attract. 

IF  a  deep  love  for  one  person  possess  our 
heart,  it  should,  while  losing  none  of  its 
individual  strength,  be  gradually  sublimated 
into  the  impersonal  quality,  like  unto  that 
which  exists  in  the  bosom  of  the  Infinite. 

IT  has  ever  been  one  of  the  mysteries  of  life 
that  we  must  give  up  in  order  to  own,  that 
we  must  sacrifice  in  order  to  possess,  that  we 
must  die  daily  to  ourselves  in  order  to  realize 
the  larger  self.  A  kind  deed  by  the  wayside, 
then,  has  a  far  deeper  significance  than  the 
mere  earning  of  a  little  happiness  as  we  pass. 
It  is  a  part  of  the  complicated  network  of 
relationship  that  binds  all  human  beings  to- 
gether and  bears  us  all  onward  toward  the 
possession  of  better  life.  It  is,  in  the  language 
of  a  Myers,  "  that  universal  scheme  by  which 
the  higher  helps  the  lower,  and  the  stronger 
the  weaker,  through  all  the  ideal  relationships 
of  the  world  of  life." 

WE  say  that  the  spirit  is  a  spark  from  God, 
but  from  birth  onward  it  must  be  con- 
stantly fanned  into  greater  glow  until  its 
scintillation  becomes  a  light  divine. 


252      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

WITH  a  person  who  is  conscious  of  uni- 
versal life,  to  whom  the  distant  star  and 
the  whole  starry  host  seem  friendly,  it  is 
wholly  contrary  to  what  has  become  his 
normal  thought  to  relegate  to  the  category  of 
the  dead  an  intelligent  loved  or  an  intense 
lover.  The  harmony  of  the  plane  on  which 
such  a  person  habitually  dwells  would  be 
destroyed  by  non-belief. 

THE  mystic  seeks  God  in  every  department 
of  life.     To  be  a  mystic  is  not  necessarily 
to  be  a  recluse. 

LET  it  be  remembered  that  there  are  per- 
sons who  are  finer  built,  more  delicately 
sensitive,  more  spiritually  sublimated  than  are 
we  ourselves.  And  it  behooves  us  to  listen 
with  respect  when  they  tell  us  of  existence  in 
higher  conditions  and  on  planes  of  finer  matter 
than  we  ourselves  know. 

THE  spiritual  life,  what  is  it,  either  here  or 
there?  The  person  who  strives  daily  to 
live  as  much  of  that  life  as  is  possible  to  him, 
the  best  that  is  revealed  to  his  understanding, 
comes  in  time  to  realize  strength,  vitality, 
goodness,  joyousness,  all  things  satisfying  in 
themselves,  to  such  degree  that  his  questions 
are  all  answered  in  himself.  This  new  strong 
unfoldment  within  himself,  this  thing  that  he 


VARIOUS  INTIMATIONS       253 

perceives  grows  larger  daily,  is  life  itself,  and 
to  call  life  death  is  an  absurdity. 

LET  us  invent  a  new  term  for  the  taking 
leave  of  the  body  by  the  spirit.  Let  it 
be  one  to  which  no  faint  touch  of  sadness 
clings.  The  mystery  and  the  loveliness  in 
death  overshadow  its  sadness. 

UNTIL  we  know  what  death   is,  we  do  not 
know  what  life  is;  until  we  know  what  loss 
is,  we  do  not  know  what  love  is. 


LOVE 


Comfort  our  souls  with  love, — 

Love  of  all  human  kind ; 

Love  special,  close  —  in  which,  like  sheltered  dove, 

Each  weary  heart  its  own  safe  nest  may  find ; 

And  love  that  turns  above 

Adoringly,  contented  to  resign 

All  loves,  if  need  be,  for  the  Love  Divine. 

—  Dinah  Mulock  Craik. 


255 


LOVE 

LOVE  is  too  lofty  a  theme  to  be  broached 
by  any  but  the  wisest  minds,  to  be  handled 
by  any  but  reverent  hands.  From  the  view- 
point of  this  chapter  I  may  but  look  at  it  from 
afar,  may  but  kiss  the  hem  of  its  garment; 
yet  with  that  touch  and  that  look  know  that 
its  effulgence  is  spread  over  me,  that  its  virtue 
passes  through  me. 

LOVE  unlocks  closed  portals,  builds  a  beau- 
tiful   archway    through  the    densest     of 
woods. 

LOVE  is  a  pain,  an  aching,  yet  sings  when 
all  else  is  sad. 


T 


HE  death  of  the   loved  one   brings  life  to 
the  lover. 


LOVE  looks  out  through  open  windows,  lays 
a  hand  on  the  departing  soul. 

LOVE  blinds  because  it  dazzles. 

OVE  envelops  one  in  a  beautiful  soft  mist 
■*— '  which  sheds  its  whiteness  on  all  around. 
It  must  then  be  of  the  nature  of  ethereal 
light. 

T  OVE  pierces  the  farthest  vistas,  knows 
*■* '  that  sometime,  somewhere,  it  may  claim 
its  own. 

257 


258      BOTH  SIDES  OF  THE  VEIL 

LOVE  purified,  intensified,  floods  the  heart 
with  light  and  wisdom. 

LOVE  loses  its  loveliness  in  too  many  words. 


I  4  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  PROM  WHICH  BORROWED 


FROM  WHICH  BORROW 

!fc|iwf 


* 


This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 

on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 

Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 


% 


sspjrjei 


0 


AUG  26  860 


"M  «  0  I90fr 


&U1UHG 


REC'D  uU 


AUG15  ig9b 


TSBP"  *■«  1  4  2001 


AUG 


AUG  2  8  REC'D -9  AM 


APR  H  197] 


— -o^i 


LD  21-50m-6,'59 
(A2845sl0)476 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


UC   BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


C030b?2?52